JP2019069340A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of providing a preferred game, while saving the power.SOLUTION: According to a game machine of the present invention, when mode setup means capable of setting any of a normal mode and a power-saving mode, sets a mode to the power-saving mode and it is determined by determination means that a game is not executed, power-saving means reduces electric power for use in at least a part of performance electric components so as to save the power when the game is not executed. The mode setup means is configured to adjust an output quantity by a prescribed electric component out of the performance electric components into a plurality of stages in each of the normal mode and the energy-saving mode, so as to adjust the output quantity by the prescribed electric component to a quantity suited to the game. This configuration can provide a player with a preferred game, while saving the power.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine or the like.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example. In a gaming machine provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, a symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display screen triggered by the establishment of a start condition (for example, winning of a ball to the start opening), and the fluctuation display is stopped. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of predetermined symbols, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and a large amount of award balls can be paid out. In such gaming machines, various effects (for example, advance effects, reach effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are performed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In recent years, various effects have been performed by making full use of a large number of electrical components (for example, liquid crystal display screens, light emitters such as LEDs, movable bodies operated by motors or solenoids, speaker devices, etc.).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-174956

  On the other hand, players are becoming more aware of power saving from the viewpoint of environmental protection. However, when power saving is achieved by simply reducing the number of electrical components, for example, there has been a problem that differentiation due to diversification of effects becomes difficult, and the fun of the game due to effects decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a suitable game while saving power.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an electric component for presentation driven by electric power, and is manually operated to execute the game by the player in the normal mode. Mode setting means capable of setting the mode to any one of the power saving mode in which the power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode, and the judgment means for judging whether or not the player is playing a game. Power saving means for reducing the power used for at least a part of the electric component for effect when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means and the game is judged not to be executed by the judgment means; And the mode setting means sets, for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode, a plurality of output amounts by a predetermined one of the electric components for effect. Adjustable configured.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the mode setting means is configured to be capable of rotational operation, and can sequentially change a plurality of output values in accordance with the rotational operation. When rotating in a predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially increased, and after reaching the maximum value, it shifts to the minimum value, and when rotating in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially Among the plurality of output values, the normal mode is assigned to a part of the plurality of continuous output values, and the remaining plurality of outputs are configured to decrease and to reach the maximum value after reaching the minimum value. A power saving mode is assigned to the value, and the gaming machine includes conversion means for converting an output value from the mode setting means into an output amount by the predetermined electric component, and the conversion means is the mode. Setting means The amount of output by the predetermined electrical component increases to the maximum value and then decreases as the output values that can be output from the output change in one direction, and then increase toward the maximum value after reaching the minimum value And the first output value assigned to the normal mode, and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. A third output value assigned to at least one of the output values, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and different from the first output value; The output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the output value 3 is assigned to at least one of the fourth output different from the second output value.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting either the normal mode or the power saving mode, and the judging means judges that the game is not executed. The power saving means reduces the power used for at least a part of the electrical components for effect, so that it is possible to reduce the power consumption (power saving) when the game is not executed. . Further, since the power saving by the power saving means is limited to the case where the power saving mode is set by the manually operated mode setting means, it is switched as necessary whether or not to save the power when the game is not executed. It has the effect of being able to

  Furthermore, the mode setting means is configured to be able to adjust the output amount by a predetermined electrical component of the electrical components for presentation in a plurality of stages for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode. In addition, as an output amount by the electrical component for a predetermined | prescribed effect, the volume which is an output amount from the electrical component for presentation which can output a sound (for example, speaker apparatus), for example, the electrical component for a light emission possible effect The luminance is an output amount of (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED), and the operation amount is an output amount of an electrical part for presentation (for example, a movable body for presentation) which performs a predetermined operation. That is, the amount of output by the predetermined electric component can be adjusted to the amount suitable for the game by the mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In addition, since the amount of power consumed by the electric component can be reduced when the output amount of the predetermined electric component is lowered, switching of whether or not to save power when the game is not executed, and the predetermined The adjustment of the power consumption of the electric parts for presentation can be realized by the mode setting unit 1. The setting operation can be easily performed and the operation load can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect exhibited by the first aspect, the following effect is exhibited. An output value from the mode setting means is converted by the conversion means into an output amount by a predetermined electric component. In the conversion by the conversion means, as the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means change in one direction, the amount of output by a given electrical component increases after reaching the maximum value and decreases to the minimum value Converted to increase towards the post maximum. At this time, at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value is the maximum value of the output amount. A third output value assigned to the value, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and being different from the first output value, and adjacent to the third output value The output value assigned to the power saving mode is assigned to at least one output value of a fourth output different from the second output value. Therefore, even when the mode setting means is operated to rotate, it is prevented that the amount of output (for example, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device) by a predetermined electrical component is rapidly increased or decreased. It has the effect of being able to

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a front frame and a lower tray unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a game board. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram showing composition of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a production control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list of the operation | movement according to power consumption mode about the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area order sending process performed in the fluctuation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by a presentation control apparatus. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a power consumption mode setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode counter update process performed in the presentation mode setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process performed in the audio | voice lamp production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display production process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display process performed in the display production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each display process performed in the display production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by the inside of a production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening LED lighting control processing performed in command reception interruption processing of FIG. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation image corresponding to a light emission means. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation image corresponding to the movable body for presentation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp production process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation lamp display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening LED lighting control processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the symbol display apparatus for power saving, (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line | wire of (a). It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the process in which the symbol display apparatus for power saving transfers to a closing state. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-saving mode transfer process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transfer process of 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a sound volume adjustment switch, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the output value from a sound volume adjustment switch, and a sound volume setting value. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement in a normal specification or a power-saving specification about the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a production control device of a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sound volume setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting presentation cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command reception interruption processing of a 5th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine 10 of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of work RAM of a display control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting presentation cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-saving mode transfer process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display production process performed in the main process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 (not shown for the lower side hinges) are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1). The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side provided with 19 as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14a having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top opened by projecting forward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed on the upper right side of the upper surface of the wall portion 17a of the upper plate 17 that protrudes forward. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a ball rental button 42, a return button 43, and a frequency display unit (not shown). When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit (not shown) is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in light emitting diode (hereinafter referred to as "LED") lights up and the remaining amount is numeric as remaining amount information. Is displayed. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In addition, a mode change button 22 is provided on the top surface of the wall 17a. The mode change button 22 is a button operated by the player and functions as a button for changing an effect mode of an effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with three types of effect modes: a general effect mode, a notice effect mode, and a feature effect mode, and the player can play a predetermined time (in this embodiment, These three types of effect modes can be switched by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation or during customer waiting effects). That is, the player can switch to the effect mode according to his / her preference by appropriately operating the mode change button 22 at an appropriate timing.

  Of the three types of effect modes that can be switched by the mode change button 22, the general effect mode is configured as the simplest effect mode. On the other hand, the notice effect mode is a mode in which the notice effect (notice effect) is a effect with a higher degree of impression, and in the notice effect, the light emitting means for effect such as the first peripheral LED 301 (see FIG. 4) is a general effect mode It is a mode designed to light up or blink more frequently than in. The feature effect mode is a mode in which the degree of impression of the effect by the movement of the effect movable body 361 (see FIG. 7) provided on the game board (see FIG. 2) is enhanced, and the effect movable body 361 is a general effect It is a mode designed to operate at a higher frequency than the mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when compared in the same power consumption mode, the power consumption in the feature presentation mode is the largest, and the details will be described later, but the operation of the power saving button 23 described below will be described. When the large power saving mode is set, the feature effect mode can not be set even if the mode change button 22 is operated.

  In addition, a power saving button 23 is provided on the top surface of the wall 17a. The power saving button 23 is a button operated by the player and functions as a button for switching the power consumption mode of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with three types of power consumption modes: a normal consumption mode, a small power saving mode, and a large power saving mode, each time the player operates the power saving button 23. These three power consumption modes can be sequentially switched. The normal consumption mode is a mode in which each electrical component provided in the pachinko machine 10 is normally used without power saving. On the other hand, the small power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than the power consumption in the normal consumption mode. The large power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is further reduced as compared to the power consumption in the small power saving mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to have different power consumption according to the power consumption mode, and the power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23. Therefore, the power consumption can be suppressed as needed ( Power saving). In addition, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player having high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty for power consumption. Can. Also, although the details will be described later, even in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), for a specific electric component, it is configured to operate or emit light as usual. It is possible to provide the player with a suitable game such as being maintained.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like at various places around the front frame 14 to allow the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means through the light transmitting cover. be able to. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a speaker device (audio output device) 226 is provided on the upper left and right of the front frame 14. From the speaker device 226, sound effects for enhancing the effects of various effects performed using the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the light emitting means described above, and for notifying various conditions such as error occurrence An alarm sound or the like is output (sound output).

  Also, on the lower right side of the window portion 14a, a transparent resin is attached from the back side to form a small window 35 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. The seal paper etc. affixed to the reference) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor (not shown), a push button stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a change in When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the operation is performed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the handle 51, whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Be When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  Further, on the left side of the lower plate 50, an effect button 53 is provided. The effect button 53 is for causing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to display an effect indicating an expectation of a jackpot and an expectation indicating an expansion to a reach while fluctuating display of symbol rows. It is a button. The effect button 53 is composed of a light transmitting cover (not shown) and an effect button LED 323 (see FIG. 4) covered by the cover, and the player performs effects during a period in which the effect button LED 323 lights or blinks. By operating the button 53, an effect corresponding to the operation can be displayed.

  In the lower tray unit 15, light emitting means are provided respectively on the left and right of the lower tray 50, and the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made visible to the player through the light transmissive cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the lower tray unit 15 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in this FIG. 2, in order to make code | symbols intelligible, illustration of a nail, a metal fitting, etc. is abbreviate | omitted. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14a (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is an area which is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 (an area in which a winning opening and the like are provided and a shot ball falls).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112 a to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done.

  A first symbol display device 37 mainly for displaying a first symbol is disposed on the left side (left side in FIG. 2) of the gaming area in a front view. The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a 7-segment LED 37a, an LED 37b, and a special view holding lamp 37c. The 7-segment LED 37a is for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game and an error display.

  On the other hand, the LED 37b is composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) having emission colors of red, green and blue, and displays the first pattern by the lighting color (lighting mode). Specifically, every time the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the color change display (variation display) of the LED 37b is performed, and the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37b) when the fluctuation display is stopped The winning result of the jackpot made by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 7) is triggered by the winning of the first entrance 64 and is displayed in a definite manner.

  More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the LED 37b changes the color of the three-color LED at high speed in the order of red → green → blue → red → ... (variation display), and predetermined time When has passed, one of the colors is displayed. When the jackpot lottery is won, the LED 37b is displayed in red or green (for example, stop display for several seconds).

  In particular, the confirmation display in red indicates that the type of jackpot that has been won is "probable jackpot". When the LED 37b is displayed in red, the game mode after the end of the special game state (big hit game) is increased in the big hit probability of the big hit lottery than the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second symbol described later is usually It is a high probability mode that is higher than the probability. On the other hand, the confirmation display in green indicates that the type of jackpot that has been won is "normal jackpot". When the LED 37b is displayed in green, the game mode after the end of the special game state is the normal time probability that the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is the normal probability, but the time shortening mode in which the collision probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability It becomes.

  In the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time or time to open the electric role associated with the first ball entrance 64 The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in one hit.

  Further, if the jackpot lottery is not won, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "off", the LED 37b is displayed in blue in a definite manner. When the LED 37b is displayed in blue for confirmation, the game mode after the end of the special game state is a normal mode in which both the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the collision probability of the second symbol are normal probabilities.

  Further, the special view holding lamp 37c displays the number of times the ball winning (entering the ball) to the first ball entrance 64 has been held (entering the ball), and in the present embodiment, four single color LEDs (for example, red LEDs) It consists of. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the stop of the first symbol by the LED 37b in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball has hit the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the big hit is started. Until the display is made, ball winning (ball entry) to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is the special view retention lamp 37c. It is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which comprises. Hereinafter, the number of holding times for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as a special image holding ball number N. The special view holding lamp 37c may be configured of, for example, two three-color LEDs, and the number of holding times (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed by a combination of display colors of the LEDs.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that variably displays the third symbol by using a winning (entering ball) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A second symbol display section 83 configured of an LED that variably displays the second symbol by using the symbol display device 81 and the passage of the ball of the second ball inlet 67 (through gate) as a trigger; The second symbol hold lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held by the ball that has passed through the gate), and a notification that the result of the big hit lottery is "probably hit big hit" before the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) A notice lamp 85 is provided to give notice and notice.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the effect control device 117 (see FIG. 7) described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 7). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 7) and the lottery result of the big hit (lighting of the LED 37b) On the other hand, the decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the first symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the LCD.

  The second symbol display portion 83 alternates between a symbol of "o" as a display symbol (second symbol) and a symbol of "x" every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (a symbol of "o"), the motorized role 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined time It becomes an open state, and it is constituted so that it may be in the state where it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  The number of times of passage of the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) of the ball is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is lit and displayed in the second symbol hold lamp 84 which is an LED. In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display section 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol hold lamp 84 may be performed by part of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of times the ball is reserved for the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control unit 110, and the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 and the decoration according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 Display is shown by the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters the general winning opening 63 are the same. Although it comprised, it is good also as a different number. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be twenty.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of a big hit At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is generally given (non-special gaming state) as the provision of gaming value (game value). A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown in FIG. 7) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a part of the solenoid 209). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a, and the open state and normal time closed Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, a special gaming state is not limited to the form mentioned above. If the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 lights up in a mode corresponding to a big hit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  In addition, the game board 13 is provided with a movable body 361 for effect (see FIG. 7). The effect movable body 361 is composed of electric parts such as a solenoid and a motor and a character part made of resin, and operates by supplying power to the electric parts. By causing the effect movable body 361 to operate at the time of the effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. As the effect movable body 361, for example, an accessory component is normally stopped, and at the time of rendering, the accessory component performs a predetermined operation (for example, movement in a predetermined direction, forward and backward movement, rotation, etc.) Are illustrated. In addition, the electrically operated combination as the movable body 361 for presentation is not only the above-mentioned operation, but is usually stored in the center frame 86 and appears on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of presentation, It is also good. In addition, the electrically powered combination as the movable body 361 for presentation is usually housed in the center frame 86, and at the time of presentation, a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD and appears from the left and right or up and down directions. It may be a shutter member that can be stopped at the covering position.

  Also, in the game area of the game board 13, as in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 described above, light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like are provided at various places, and light emitted from the light emitting means is It can be made visible to the player through the light transmissive cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 has a main board (main controller 110) and an effect control board (effect control apparatus 117) mounted thereon as a unit. The control board unit 91 has a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (emission control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116, and is unitized. There is.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111, the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is shown as a thin line so that the arrangement of the light emitting means is clear.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front frame 14 includes, as light emitting means, eight first inner peripheral LEDs 301 arranged above the window 14a and ten tenths arranged on the right of the window 14a. 2 inner circumference LEDs 302, nine third inner circumference LEDs 303 disposed below the window 14a, 12 fourth inner circumference LEDs 304 disposed to the left of the window 14a, and the speaker device 226 at the upper left Of four first outer peripheral LEDs 305 arranged at the upper left of the upper left, five second outer peripheral LEDs 306 arranged at the side farther from the window portion 14a than the first inner peripheral LED 301, and upper right of the upper left speaker device 226 Four third outer peripheral LEDs 307 arranged, three fourth outer peripheral LEDs 308 arranged on the side farther from the window portion 14 a than the second inner peripheral LED 302, and five five arranged in the lower right of the front frame 14 5th outer periphery LED 309 , A five sixth outer peripheral LED310 disposed on the lower left side of the front frame 14, three of the notification LED311 and is provided to be disposed on the right upper side of the third outer peripheral LED 307. Note that all of the LEDs 301 to 311 are installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are light emitting means for effect used at the time of presentation. Each of these LEDs 301 to 310 is formed of a three-color LED, and in the case of various effects to be performed at the time of a jackpot or reach, a light emission mode (a light emission color, a color change mode, lighting or By lighting or blinking in the blinking mode), it plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, the notification LED 311 is a light emitting means used for notification applications. The notification LED 321 is formed of a three-color LED, and when a notification event occurs, such as when an error occurs or the payout of a prize ball occurs, the player lights or blinks in a light emission mode according to the notification event. It plays the role of informing the employees of the hall and the hall.

  On the other hand, the lower tray unit 15 includes seven lower right tray LEDs 321 disposed on the right of the lower tray 50 and seven lower left tray LEDs 322 disposed on the left of the lower tray 50 as light emitting means. Three effect button LEDs 323 disposed in the portion of the effect button 53 are provided. The LEDs 321 to 323 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). These LEDs 321 to 323 provided in the lower tray unit 15 are all light emitting means for effect, and all are constituted by three-color LEDs, and in the case of various effects as in the above-described LEDs 301 to 310, By lighting up or flashing in the light emission mode according to the contents of the effect, the effect of the effect is enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of light emitting means provided on the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is shown as a thin line so that arrangement | positioning of a light emission means may become clear.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game area of the game board 13, as a light emitting means, 13 first decoration LEDs 341 arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and a third design display from the first decoration LEDs 341 Ten second decoration LEDs 342 arranged on the side away from the device 81 to the right, three first side LEDs 343 arranged at the upper right of the game area, and three three arranged to the right of the game area A cover that covers the second side LED 344, the three third side LEDs 345 disposed to the lower right of the game area, the five notification lamps LED 346 disposed in the notification lamp 85, and the first ball entrance 64. Three starting opening LEDs 347 arranged inside the member and two specified winning opening LEDs 348 arranged inside the cover member covering the variable winning device 65 are provided. These LEDs 341 to 348 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means, the decorative LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 are all light emitting means for effect, and are configured by three-color LEDs. Similar to the above-described LEDs 301 to 310 and LEDs 321 to 323, these LEDs 341 to 346 play a role in enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing in a light emission mode according to the content of the rendering at the time of various renderings .

  The starting opening LED 347 is a light emitting means that lights or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode each time a ball hits (enters) the first ball entrance 64. The specific winning opening LED 348 is a light emitting means that lights up or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode during a big hit game. The starting opening LED 347 and the specific winning opening LED 348 are both configured by three-color LEDs.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can switch the power consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23, and can be configured to save power as necessary. Although the details will be described later, when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), a part of the light emitting means shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. With respect to the light emitting means, power saving (suppression of power consumption) is achieved by lowering the brightness as compared to the normal consumption mode or turning off the light.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 6 is a schematic view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows (virtual symbol reels) by arranging the main symbols in the ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same The jackpot is configured to generate a big hit after the main symbol of the is aligned and stopped. In the case of shifting to the high probability mode (probability variation mode) after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned and stopped. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the normal probability after the end of the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “normal symbols”) to which the even numbers are added are aligned and stopped.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbols is the lateral direction X, and in such lateral variation (horizontal scroll), each symbol row has three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 at the top, middle and bottom. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right upward line L4, and a left upward line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When the ball enters the ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 (winning) and the fluctuation display is performed to scroll in the predetermined fluctuation direction (in the present embodiment, in the horizontal direction X), the fluctuation display is performed after the predetermined fluctuation time , And stop in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned and stopped on any of the activated lines, a jackpot will occur, and a jackpot movie (jackpot effect during the jackpot game) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation direction (scroll direction) is the lateral direction X, but the variation direction may be the vertical direction (that is, a direction orthogonal to the lateral direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective line is the upper line (line of Z1 in FIG. 6), middle line (line of Z2 in FIG. 6), lower line (line of Z3 in FIG. 6). 5), the line L4 rising to the right, and the line L5 rising to the left. Then, in the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the fluctuation display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  Further, in the lower left area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a special figure reserve number display portion 87 is displayed. The special figure reservation number display unit 87 is a part that displays the number of times the ball winning (entering) of the ball to the first entrance 64 is reserved, that is, the special figure reserved ball number N.

  Specifically, the special figure reservation number display unit 87 is configured as four circular display units 87a to 87d arranged in a line in the horizontal direction, and the display unit according to the value of the special figure reservation ball number N, 87a to 87d are displayed only in the outer frame or are filled and displayed in a predetermined color (for example, red). In more detail, when the number of special figure reservation balls N is zero (that is, when there is no held ball), all the display parts 87a-87d are displayed only by the outer frame. On the other hand, when the number of special figure holding balls N is more than 1 (that is, when there are no holding balls), the number N of special figure holding balls is represented by the number of display portions 87a to 87d that are filled. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 6, three display parts 87a-87c are filled up, the display part 87d is displayed only with an outer frame, and it is shown that the number of special figure reservation balls N is three.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the prize-winning to 1st entrance 64 may be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum frequency | count (maximum value of N in special figure reservation number of balls N) is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to three, and may be set three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In such a case, the number of display units constituting the special-image suspension number display unit 87 may be provided for the maximum number of suspension times.

  In the lower right area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a power saving mode display 88 of "in power saving mode" is displayed when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). . When the power consumption mode is the power saving mode, since the power saving mode display 88 is displayed, it is possible to make the player realize that power saving is in progress.

  The power saving mode display 88 displays different displays in the small power saving mode and the large power saving mode, for example, displays "in small power saving mode" in the small power saving mode, and in the large power saving mode. It may be displayed as "in large power saving mode". Alternatively, “in power saving mode” may be displayed in different colors in the small power saving mode and the large power saving mode. Also, the power saving mode display 88 is not a character “in power saving mode” as shown in FIG. 6, but it is possible to distinguish three types of power consumption modes by the length and size of the figure, the number of figures, etc. For example, any aspect may be adopted.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the above-described pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 controls the entire operation of the pachinko machine 10, transmits various commands to the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub control device It is The various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in only one direction. The sub controller may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub controller to the main controller 110.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 to be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the storage ball storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the buffer for counters, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 and the like will be described. . FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing an outline of each counter.

  The storage ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 etc. are the determination of the big hit, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37, the display of the second symbol display part 83 It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to draw a result or the like.

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for fluctuation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display portion 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of main processing (see FIG. 12) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to when executing various control programs, the values of each counter stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Be done.

  The holding ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (entries) to the first entrance 64. In this storage ball storage area, four storage areas (storage first area to storage fourth area) so that data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the winning timing of the ball can be stored up to four times. And one execution area referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 15).

  An area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are respectively stored in the four storage areas (storage first area to storage fourth area) in the storage ball storage area An area for setting and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are provided. In the present embodiment, three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 are provided in each of the holding areas in one holding ball storage area, but a plurality of holding ball storage areas are provided These three areas may be divided and stored in a plurality of storage ball storage areas. For example, a part (one or two areas) of the three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two holding ball storage areas provided, and the remaining areas are It may be configured to be provided in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the holding ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 can be stored up to a maximum of four times. In the case of storing data of one cycle, data are sequentially arranged from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is stored. That is, as the reserved area with the smaller area number is stored, the data corresponding to the earlier winning in time is stored. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning combination in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  In the execution area in the storage ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first per-class counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 An area for storing is provided. In the variation process (see FIG. 13) to be described later, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the pending first area of the pending ball storage area are shifted to the execution area and referred to. Based on the jackpot lottery results are determined. Then, variable display and stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed by the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b) or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. For example, the first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 738, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed. It is updated once each time and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 12).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that will be the jackpots is the normal probability (when the jackpot probability is normal) in the normal mode or the time shortening mode, and the high probability (the jackpot probability is higher than the normal) in the high probability mode. There are two types of settings. There are two types of random numbers that will be the jackpot at the normal probability (the jackpot probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that can be a big hit at high probability (when the big hit probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523 , 631, 683, 733 ". A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the large hit is made from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, as the type of jackpot determined by the first collision type counter C2, a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) which is a high probability mode after the jackpot end and a jackpot (usually jackpot) which is a time shortening mode after the jackpot end Depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the first collision type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 4 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt process of FIG. 16 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , And more specifically, is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant storage area with the smallest area number in the storage ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number to be “big hit (probable variation big hit) to be“ high probability mode after big hit end ”” is “1, 2, 3”, “big hit to become time shortening mode after big hit (normal big hit) The value of the random number which becomes "" is "0, 4". A table storing a random number value that determines whether “the jackpot in high probability mode after the jackpot end” or “the jackpot in time reduction mode after the jackpot end” from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as "big hit" based on the value of the first random number counter C1. And, if it is determined that "the jackpot becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot end" based on the value of the first hit classification counter C2, then the jackpot becomes the "probably variable jackpot". On the other hand, when it is determined that "big hit" is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and determined to be "big hit in the time saving mode after the big hit ends" based on the value of the first type counter C2. Is usually a "big hit".

  Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first collision type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots (certainly variable jackpots or normal jackpots) and one type of display corresponding to deviation Among the three types of display modes in total, one of the display modes is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  In the “probable variation jackpot” in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is between the maximum round number of 16 rounds and the next round until it becomes the next jackpot (probably variable jackpot or normal jackpot) It is a jackpot (16 round probability variation jackpot) which shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  Moreover, after the "normal jackpot" in the present embodiment and the jackpot the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the normal state (the jackpot probability is the normal state), and It is a big hit (16 rounds usually a big hit) where only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by an interval (in the present embodiment, 100 variations). In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "usually big hit", it is comprised so that the probability of hitting of the 2nd symbol may be raised for a predetermined number of times of change, but it changes to this and the lottery of the next big hit It may be configured to continue to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol until the result is determined.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “permanent big hit” or “normal big hit” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, and various values (eg, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) Can be Further, in the present embodiment, both the maximum round number of “permanent variation jackpot” and the maximum round number of “ordinary jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum round number is made to differ between “permanently variation jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot” It is good. For example, the maximum number of rounds of “permanent variation jackpot” may be 16 and the maximum number of rounds of “normal jackpot” may be seven.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it becomes "a definite change big hit", it is comprised so that the hit probability of the 2nd symbol may be raised until the lottery result of the next big hit is determined, but it is instead The hit probability of the second symbol may be increased by a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the pattern of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol is shifted only one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Lear back and forth out of reach” (for example, range of 0 to 8) and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” (for example, range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop design stops other than the front and back of reach reach Three stop patterns (a form of display result of dynamic display) with "complete out" (for example, the range of 39-238) where reach does not occur are selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting the stop pattern from the value (random number value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of such tables are provided such that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 which can take one stop pattern is different. This is whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state) or a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) This is to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern according to the like.

  For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the range of random numbers corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is 10 so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. A wide table of ̃238 is selected, and “complete out” is likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" narrows to 0-5, and the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" also narrows to 6 to 9, "front and back out of reach" and "back and forth It becomes difficult to select "reach except out".

  Moreover, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the holding ball storage area in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal) A table with a narrow random value range of 51 to 238 corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out." In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" is 0 to 8, the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" is as wide as 9 to 50, and "reach other than back and forth out" is easily selected It has become. Therefore, since the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 can be secured in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. For example, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), and the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 may also be referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 may be referred to as "second variation type counter".

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used to select (select) a pattern (variation pattern) of variation display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, and super reach fluctuation are set as the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured such that the rendering time (variation time) is different.

  Among these fluctuation patterns, “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, out-of-order fluctuation) that produces a lost display result without reaching display. In the present embodiment, the “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 11 seconds.

  "Normal reach fluctuation" is a so-called normal reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach indication. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 20 seconds.

  "Super reach change" is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the time the reach occurs and the final symbol stops. In the present embodiment, the “super reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect which appears between the occurrence of the reach in "super reach change" and the stop of the final symbol, a specific character may be made to appear, or a specific background may be displayed, It is exemplified that the symbol is changed in a specific mode (for example, the symbol is enlarged or reduced, the symbol is shaken, or the like).

  When selecting a fluctuation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referred to. This first selection table is a stop symbol at the time of outfall determined by the value of the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first collision type counter C2 or the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 Alternatively, it is provided for each reach except for the back and forth deviation, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different in each first selection table. That is, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern is different for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in the present embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second change type counter CS2 is a change pattern until a final stop symbol stops after a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching may be simply referred to as "the number of fluctuation symbols". That is, in this embodiment, after the symbols (left symbol) of the left symbol row Z1 and the symbols (right symbol) of the right symbol row Z3 in the normal reach are stopped by the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the middle symbol row The number of fluctuating symbols until the symbol (middle symbol) of Z2 stops is determined.

  The second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 when determining the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching is reached Is selected and referenced. This second selection table is a stop symbol at the time of outfall determined by the first hit type counter C2 (probable variation big hit or normal big hit) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 Or, it is provided for each reach except for the back and forth deviation, and in each fluctuation pattern selection table, the allocation of the range of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 to the number of fluctuation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after reaching is different . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of fluctuation symbols after the reach occurrence until the final stop symbol stops varies.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the type of fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, a rough symbol variation mode such as a reach type such as normal reach is determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and more detailed symbols such as normal reach A, normal reach B, etc. are determined by the second variation type counter CS2. The variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize various diversification of the fluctuation display.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a "third variation type counter".

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the advance effect effect. That is, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the changing symbol (so-called "slip effect") or returns the symbol (so-called "return effect") other than the change of the third symbol. Since it is possible to perform advance notice effects such as passing a notice character for giving notice of occurrence of reach effect, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the effect pattern that adds (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) the time required for the preliminary effect production to the fluctuation time, and the time during which the fluctuation display is performed contrary thereto. The effect pattern which subtracts fluctuation time to (for example, -1 second etc.) and the effect pattern which does not add or subtract fluctuation time are selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the addition / subtraction value of the rendering time is determined. The addition or subtraction value of the rendering time determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 is added to or subtracted from the variation time determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 to make the first symbol or the third symbol The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of (ie, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, by further combining the fluctuation type counter CS3, the fluctuation display can be further diversified.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, also in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the notice effect selected to the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different There are several tables provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) Tables are provided in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different according to the like. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 in the same manner as the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). For example, in the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the ball is either the left or the right second ball entry port 67 (through gate) Acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) in which a random number value for determining whether or not the second random number counter C4 is determined from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

  In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Again referring back to FIG. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counters and flags described above, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed, and power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 82, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the first ball entrance switch 208a. And various switches 208 consisting of switches or sensors not shown, and a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a and a solenoid for driving a motorized product. It is connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Further, the RAM 213 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 213. The NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control device 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) executed by the main control unit 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected by a touch sensor (not shown) that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the hit stop switch for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets output of sound in the speaker device 226 as an audio output device, setting of lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, setting of an operation pattern of the movable body 361 for effect, The third symbol display device (LCD) 81 controls the variation display of the third symbol, the jackpot effect, the display of the special figure holding ball number N, and the like.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body drive device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic device via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the first to sixth LED controllers 291 to 296, the movable body drive device 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and the effect button 53 and a speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body drive device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic device via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the first to sixth LED controllers 291 to 296, the movable body drive device 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and the effect button 53 and a speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like.

  Here, the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 273 includes a power saving counter 273a, an effect mode counter 273b, a large power saving mode flag 273c, a changing flag 273d, a customer waiting effect flag 273e, a mode changeable flag 273f, and a change. And a mode change flag 273g.

  The power saving counter 273a is a counter for setting a mode selected or instructed by the power saving button 23 among three types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode, small power saving mode, large power saving mode). The power saving counter 273a is incremented by one each time the player operates the power saving button 23, and is returned to zero after reaching a value defined as the maximum value ("2" in this embodiment). The power saving counter 273a is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear).

  The effect mode counter 273 b is a counter for setting an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among three effect modes (general effect mode, advance notice effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 273b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear).

  The effect mode counter 273 b is incremented by one each time the mode change button 22 is operated at valid or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed variation or during customer waiting effect). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the conditions under which the rendering mode counter 273b is returned to zero differ depending on the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 0 or 1 (that is, in the case of the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode), the effect mode counter 273b is a value set as the maximum value (this embodiment) Then, after reaching "2", it is returned to zero. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (that is, in the case of the large power saving mode), the rendering mode counter 273b is forced to be zero along with the operation of the mode change button 22 after reaching 1. Will be returned to That is, when the power consumption mode is the large power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b can not obtain 2 and can not be set to the feature effect mode.

  The large power saving mode flag 273 c is a flag indicating whether the set power consumption mode is the large power saving mode. When the large power saving mode flag 273 c is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the large power saving mode is set, and when it is set to off (ie, “0”). , Indicates that the large power saving mode is not set, that is, the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode is set. The large power saving mode flag 273c is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then set to on when the value of the power saving counter 273a is set to "2", and the value of the power saving counter 273a is other than "2" When set to a value, it is set to off.

  The fluctuating flag 273 d is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuating display is being executed (that is, fluctuating) in the third symbol display device 81. If the flag 273d is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the flag is in motion, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"), the variable is suspended. Indicates that there is. The during-fluctuation flag 273 d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then turned on along with the start of the fluctuating display, and is turned off when the fluctuating display is ended.

  The waiting for customer effect flag 273 e is a flag indicating whether or not the waiting for customer effect is being performed by the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that "customer waiting effect" is a display unrelated to the gaming state displayed on the third symbol game apparatus 81 when the variable display or the movie display during the big hit game is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect (for example, a title display or a demonstration display). When the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and if it is set to OFF (ie, "0"), the customer is Indicates that no waiting effect is being performed (ie, it is fluctuating or jackpot). The customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on. Then, after the presentation control device 117 receives a customer waiting effect command from the main control device 110, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is a customer waiting effect image (customer waiting effect) in the customer waiting effect flag 273e. When switched, it is set to on, and is set to off with the start of the variable display (that is, the end of the customer waiting effect).

  The mode changeable flag 273f is a flag indicating whether it is time (in the present embodiment, high speed change) in which change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible during change (during change display). When the mode changeable flag 273f is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that it is a time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 (that is, during high speed fluctuation) during fluctuation. When it is off (ie, "0"), it indicates that it is time to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22 during the change. The mode changeable flag 273 f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then set to on during high speed fluctuation and is set to off during high speed fluctuation.

  The fluctuating mode change flag 273g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the fluctuation display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation. If the changing mode change flag 273g is set to ON (that is, "1"), the effect mode in the change display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 273g is set to off (that is, "0") as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high speed change, and then the change display Will be turned off when the

  Again referring back to FIG. RAM 273 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by MPU 271 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, values of I / O, etc. Region). Furthermore, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like in addition to those described above.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of each of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 based on an internal command received from the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 to intervene in reading and writing of data. The data stored in the RAM 276 is read at a predetermined timing, and a variable display image in units of frames is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (third symbol or decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. In the character ROM 275, for example, various data for effect used for fluctuation display (variation effect) and jackpot effect are stored. Data for variation display (variation display data) stored in the character ROM 275 is composed of data of a character symbol of the third symbol, data for a background image, data for a notice character symbol, and the like. The variable display data stored in the character ROM 275 is prepared for each effect mode (i.e., the general effect mode, the advance effect mode, the feature effect mode), and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control means The variable display data corresponding to the value of the effect mode counter 273b is read out by the image controller 274.

  In the character ROM 275, the above-described effect data is stored in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the data for effect is configured by about 1024 M bytes, and the data of about 1024 M bytes is compressed to about 768 M bytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary data (rendering data) compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read, decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing data for effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (ready to be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). The variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (fluctuation effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 274 according to time to generate a variable display image in frame units.

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable display data storage area is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM. For example, when the effect data is read out from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, when the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read out and smooth display can not be performed or clear. It may be impossible to display. It is also because it is easier to process display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative pattern or changing the color of the background pattern) by storing in the RAM.

  The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 all control the lighting of the LED as the light emitting means by PWD (Pulse Width Modulation). The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are connected to the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start opening LED 347, and the specific winning opening LED 347, respectively. The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 respectively change the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start opening LED 347, and the specific winning opening LED 347 according to the game state. It controls based on the lighting pattern which MPU27 set and output.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment causes the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348 to emit light (turn on or blink), and the power consumption required to operate the movable body 36 for effect in three stages. It is configured to be able to change according to the power consumption mode. Here, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), mainly among the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), the rendering effect In the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 that play a role of enhancing the power consumption, power saving is achieved by lowering the luminance to a lower luminance than the luminance in the normal consumption mode or turning off the light.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346 Of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 by reducing the duty ratio (the ratio of the on time to the sum of the on time and the off time) of the current in the normal consumption mode. Decrease (decrease) the brightness. Hereinafter, the brightness in the normal mode is referred to as “normal brightness”, and the brightness in the small power saving mode is referred to as “middle brightness”. In addition, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, the duty ratio of the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 Are turned off (i.e., not turned on or kept off), the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 are turned off.

  The movable body drive device 297 is connected to the electric component (solenoid, motor, etc.) of the effect movable body 361, and drives and controls the electric component by the PWD based on the operation pattern set and output by the MPU 271 according to the game state. Thus, the effect movable body 361 is operated.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to change the required power consumption according to the set power consumption mode also for the electric component (solenoid, motor, etc.) for operating the movable body 36 for effect ing.

  Specifically, for the effect movable body 361 operated by a motor, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the duty ratio of the current supplied to the motor is normally consumed By setting the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 smaller or zero as compared to the normal consumption mode by making the ratio smaller or zero as compared with the duty ratio in the mode (ie, stopping the operation), Thus, power consumption can be saved.

  On the other hand, for the effect movable body 361 operated by a solenoid, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the number of times the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 excites the solenoid By setting an operation pattern smaller than the number of excitations in the normal consumption mode, the amount of operation of the movable body for effect 361 can be made smaller or zero compared to the normal consumption mode (that is, the operation) Can be used to save power consumption.

  In this embodiment, the control of the sound outputted from the speaker device 226, the control of lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, and the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. Although control such as variation display of symbols is collectively performed by the effect control device 117, various types of control may be shared and performed by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of LEDs and various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 The control may be performed by a dedicated control device (display control device).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are provided in the effect control device 117, but may be provided separately from the effect control device 117. In such a case, the effect control device 117 sets the lighting patterns of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348 and the luminance according to the power consumption mode, and the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 You may be comprised so that lighting and light extinction of LED301-311,321-323,341-348 may be controlled based on a setting. Similarly, the movable body drive device 297 is provided in the effect control device 117, and in the effect control device 117, setting of the operation amount according to the operation pattern and power consumption mode of the effect movable body 361 is performed. The driving device 297 may control the effect movable body 361 based on the setting.

  In addition, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are one LED control device, and the LEDs 301 to 311 and 321 to 323 are based on the lighting pattern and the luminance output from the effect control device 117 by this one LED control device. , 341-348 may be controlled.

  Further, the MPU 271 may be configured to have the functions of the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 and the movable body drive device 297. In such a case, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 and the movable body drive device 297 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 7 are omitted, and the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348, and the movable body for effect 361 are connected to the input / output port 277 respectively.

  The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase having a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). A switch circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110, 112, 117, and 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and the voltage of 12 volts, the voltage of 5 volts and the backup voltage are controlled by the respective control devices 110, 112, 117, 291 to 297, the speaker device 226 Supply the necessary voltage to the

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete the process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the backup data and clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A payout initialization command is sent to the payout control device 111.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the power saving button 23 operable by the player, and the player operates the power saving button 23 to set the power consumption mode (that is, the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be able to change the power consumption). Here, with reference to FIG. 10, it will be described how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of operations according to the power consumption mode for main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 10, inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, and notification LEDs 311 provided on the front frame 14, and lower tray LEDs 321 and 322 and effect button LEDs 323 provided on the lower tray unit 15 are provided as main electrical components. The first symbol display device 37 which is an LED, the second symbol display device 83 which is an LED, the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD, the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 provided on the game board 13 , The starting opening LED 347, the specified winning opening LED 348, and the effect movable body 361 are mentioned.

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, all the listed electric components emit light with normal luminance and are operated in normal operation. That is, in the normal consumption mode, the electric component operates with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, among the listed electric components, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, the effect button LED 323, The brightness of the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, the notification LED 346, and the start opening LED 347 is reduced from the normal brightness to the medium brightness. On the other hand, the other LEDs or LCDs are usually left at the brightness. Further, the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 is dropped from the normal movement to the weak movement. Therefore, in the small power saving mode, the brightness and the operation amount of some of the electric components are reduced to the middle brightness and weak operation, so power saving can be achieved compared to the normal consumption mode.

  Furthermore, when the power consumption is set to the large power saving mode, each of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 whose brightness is set to the middle brightness in the small power saving mode described above is turned off. The other LEDs or LCDs remain at normal brightness as in the case of the small power saving mode. Also, the effect movable body 361 is stopped. Therefore, in the large power saving mode, some of the electric components are turned off or stopped, so that power can be saved more greatly than the small power saving mode.

  As described above, even when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power mode, large power saving mode), the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, maintains the normal brightness. The third symbol display device 81 is a device capable of causing the player to most effectively recognize various effects (for example, advance notice effect, reach effect, etc.) executed to enhance the interest of the game. Even if the luminance of some LEDs is lowered (or turned off) by maintaining the luminance of the third symbol display device 81 as normal luminance, maintaining the fun of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 Can.

  Also, the brightness of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always kept at the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Since the specific winning opening LED 348 is disposed in the portion of the variable winning device 65 which is the most important member for providing a benefit to the player in the jackpot game, the brightness of the specific winning opening LED 348 is left as normal brightness. Thus, the player can be made to recognize with certainty that it is in the jackpot game providing a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning opening 65a, and the jackpot game is in progress. It can prevent the player from reducing the pleasure and enjoyment felt.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 as a trigger, and the second symbol display device 83 Is a display of the result of the winning lottery performed with the winning of the ball to the second entrance 67 as a trigger. That is, each of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is a device for displaying the lottery result relating to the player's profit so that the player can visually recognize it. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the brightness of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is always kept the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode Therefore, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the notification LED 311 is also always kept at the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Therefore, the player or the employee of the hall can surely be notified of various errors generated in the pachinko machine 10, the error can be quickly eliminated, and the player can quickly return to the game, or the wrongdoing It is possible to find out early.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power saving mode can be changed not only by the power saving button 23 operable by the player, but also by the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). However, since a specific electric component is configured to operate or emit light as usual, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game, such as maintaining the fun of presentation. In addition, since the power consumption mode can be changed by the player by operating the power saving button 23, a player having a high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty about power consumption. it can. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a suitable game can be provided while performing power saving.

  In particular, in the small power saving mode, the brightness of a part of the light emitting means (i.e., LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) is lower than that in the normal consumption mode (i.e., middle) The power consumption is reduced by reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 631 to lower the brightness) or reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 631. It is possible to provide the player with the fun of the effect almost the same as the mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 includes start-up processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, and timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment) And NMI interrupt processing is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11, the start-up process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S101). Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance, it waits for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the presentation control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. In order to do this, wait processing (one second in this embodiment) is performed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not stored (S105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S111. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) (S111). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S112, S113), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S108). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S110, an interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (outputted) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). In this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 16) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. Also, by this external output process (S201), the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the type command, the stop command, the presentation time addition / subtraction command, etc. are transmitted to the presentation control device 117 If the ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112. When an error occurs in the main control unit 110 and an error command for the error is set, the error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 117 in the external output process (S201).

  After the process of S201, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the processing and the first pattern display device 37 are performed. A variation process of setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation processing, the jackpot processing for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and thereafter, a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (specific implementation) is made to the specific winning opening 65a. In the embodiment, when ten balls enter, the processing for closing the specific winning hole 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when it passes and the second symbol display device 82 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display unit 83 of the above. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S207, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117). It transmits (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S207 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It can start from the process of S201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S302: No), the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the special figure holding ball number N is acquired (S303). After the processing of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304).

  At this time, if the number of special map holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 A holding ball storage area sequential feed process is executed to shift in order to the execution area side (S305). The detailed process executed in the holding ball storage area order forwarding process (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the storage ball storage area order sending process (S305), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variation start process for starting the variation display of the first symbol (S306), and the variation process (S204) is ended. The detailed process executed in the change start process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing as a result of confirmation by the processing of S302 (S302: Yes), the special view control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is selected. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). The special view control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the presentation time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  Here, as for the stop symbol displayed in the stop display of the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol of whether or not the big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. Furthermore, for the stop symbol of the big hit, according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2, the stop symbol when it becomes the high probability mode after big hit (that is, probability variation big hit) and when it becomes the time shortening mode after big hit (that is, Usually, it is distinguished from the stop pattern of the jackpot). For example, if it is a probability variation big hit, the red is lit as the stop symbol on the LED 37b, and if it is a large hit normally, the green is lit as the stop symbol on the LED 37b. On the other hand, when the lottery result (the value of the first random number counter C1) is out, blue is turned on as the stop symbol on the LED 37b. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  The variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, each time the variation process is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display setting is performed to end (stop) the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S309), after setting the stop command to synchronize the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 (S310), the fluctuation process (S204) is ended and the main process Return to (see FIG. 12). When the effect control device 117 receives the stop command set in S310, the effect control device 117 ends the 1 variable display being executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as a result of the discrimination in the process of S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), it is discriminated whether the customer waiting effect waiting flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on. To do (S311). At this time, if the customer waiting effect waiting flag is off (S311: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned on (S312), and clocking of the customer waiting effect waiting time is started using a counter not shown (S313) End the variation process (S204), and return to the main process (see FIG. 9). Note that, when time counting by a counter (not shown) is started by the process of S313, this counter is updated each time timer interrupt processing (not shown) is executed periodically. Note that this counter may be updated during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) described later.

  Further, as a result of the determination in the process of S311, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the start of timekeeping in S313 (S314), and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S314: No) Because it is in a period of waiting for the execution of the customer waiting effect, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S314, when the predetermined time has passed (S314: Yes), since it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect command is set (S315). After the standby flag is turned off (S316), the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). The customer waiting effect command set by the process of S315 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 to be executed next in the main process (see FIG. 12). Upon receiving the customer waiting effect command, the effect control device 117 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the customer waiting effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the above-mentioned holding ball storage area order sending process (S305) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the storage ball storage area order sending process (S305) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  In this holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305), first, each data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area (the value of the first random number counter, the value of the first collision type counter, and the stop pattern The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each piece of data stored in the pending second area to the pending fourth area is shifted to an area with a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, among the second to fourth reserve areas, data shift is performed only for the reserve area in which data is stored (pending). Therefore, since no data shift process is performed on a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second to fourth reserved areas may be shifted to an area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the special figure holding ball counter value (special figure holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball counter after subtraction is set (S354). The pending number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 to be executed next in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number as the number N of special drawing holding balls indicated by the holding number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special drawing holding number display unit 87. The display section of is displayed in full (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (special figure holding ball number N), the new number of holding times is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which constitutes the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37 (S355), the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305) ends, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  Next, the aforementioned variation start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area (S401). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at each time.

  In the present embodiment, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “310” or “608” at the time of normal probability (during normal mode or time shortening mode), it is determined as a big hit by the process of S401. Be done. On the other hand, at the high probability (high probability mode), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, If it is any of 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ", it is determined by the process of S401 that a jackpot has occurred.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37b) at the time of jackpot displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S402). Specifically, in S402, after determining the big hit type (that is, stop symbol for big hit) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, the big hit type determined Setting is performed so that the display mode corresponding to is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3” is “probability variation big hit”, and the value of the first hit type counter C 2 is “0, 4”. In the case of "", the jackpot type is "usually a jackpot".

  After the processing of S402, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 S403).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined from normal reach variation (20 seconds) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 The fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol in middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol) in the present embodiment)) stops is determined based on the value of. By the determination of the fluctuation pattern by the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until stopping with the big hit symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined .

  Note that the above-mentioned fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 can be set. Whether to set or to set with both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be appropriately determined depending on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions at each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37b) at the time of detachment displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408). Specifically, in S408, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the storage ball storage area, the stop symbol (front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, or complete out) is determined Then, the display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is set to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the processing of S408, the variation pattern at the time of removal based on the stop symbol at the time of removal indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the values of variation type counters CS1 and CS2. (S409).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, similar to the process of S403 described above, rough out of out fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol) stops) is determined after the reach occurrence based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide. By the determination of the variation pattern by the process of S409, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until stopping with the third symbol display device 81 is determined. .

  In the process of S408, when "reach before out of reach" or "reach other than before or after out of reach" is set as the display mode at the time of out, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S409. The table is preset as described above.

  After the processing of S403 or S409, a rendering time (addition or subtraction value of the rendering time) to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the processing is determined (S404). At this time, based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203, the effect time to be added / subtracted is determined.

  After the processing of S404, a fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S403 or S409 is set (S405), and then the display mode set by the processing of S402 or S408 (that is, stop Set the type command according to the symbol). (S408). Thereafter, a presentation time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the presentation time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S404 is set (S407), the variation start process (S306) is ended, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  As described above, after the “number-of-holds command” is set in the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (see FIG. 14), “variation pattern command”, “type” in the variation start process (see FIG. 15) Commands are set in the order of “command” and “operation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 12), each command is output in the order in which the commands were set, so when starting the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “number-of-holds command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When 619, 15, 238, 250) respectively are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, the start winning process with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the launch control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the release control processing detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by a touch sensor (not shown), and that a strike stop switch (not shown) for stopping the release is not operated. The condition is a process of determining on / off of the ball firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Here, the above-mentioned start winning process (S504) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), a start winning command is set (S602). The start winning combination command set by the process of S602 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). At this time, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64, and the special figure reservation number of balls N <4 (S603: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the step S503, the first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604).

  Next, the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N is incremented by 1 (S605), and the holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after addition It sets (S606). The pending number command set by the process of S606 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number as the number N of special drawing holding balls indicated by the holding number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special drawing holding number display unit 87. The display section of is displayed in full (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (special figure holding ball number N), the new number of holding times is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which constitutes the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37 (S607) The start winning process (S504) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, it is not the special figure holding ball number N <4 (S603: No , S604 to S606 are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed at the time of power shutoff of the pachinko machine 10 due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the execution information of the power shutoff is stored in the RAM 203 by execution of the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 includes start-up processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, and commands executed each time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, initialization is performed in response to power on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, the power on notification process is executed (S1002). The power on notification process (S1002) is to notify that the power is on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is on, and the notification is made by the speaker device 226, the front frame 14 or the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 or the like, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301), the screen of the third symbol display device 81, or the like.

  After execution of the power on notification process (S1002), to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and video is displayed. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, the initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 determines whether the current start-up process is performed because the MPU 271 is reset during the execution of the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) described later. It is determined whether the disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instant power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect control device 117 or the like. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 stores power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. And execute the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20). The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process.

  That is, during the execution of the power-off process, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. If the power is completely shut off during or after the completion of the power-off process, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, and in this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, when the power-off process flag is off, the current start-up process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. In the first state, the power supply is completely shut off. Since the data in the RAM 273 is lost when the power is completely shut off, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the second state, a power failure process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power failure does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power failure process is completed. The MPU 271 is in a reset state. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is held without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the third state, only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset by noise or the like. That is, when the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110), the power-off process flag is kept off and the data of the RAM 273 is held. Be done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed It confirms (S1006). It should be noted that it is checked here whether the data is destroyed if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held if the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. For example, control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  The confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the power-on process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the power is turned off (the RAM 273 is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, although a power failure process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, the power is not shut off and returns to normal, and then the MPU 271 is reset after the power shutdown process is completed. If the current start-up process is started after the current start-up process is started, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off occurs. Then, the state returns to normal, and thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset during execution of the power-off process. In this case, the current memory state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue the control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is judged whether or not the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). In addition, as a check method performed in S1007, first, write "0FFh" for each byte, read it for each byte, and check whether it is "0FFh", and if "0FFh", it is normal Determine. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. The read / write check of the RAM 273 clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 has an abnormality (S 1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S 1014), and the power is shut off. Loop up to infinity. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 273. In addition, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the abnormality of the RAM 273 may be notified.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 273 or not.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is performed, and turned off when the power is completely shut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process The MPU 271 is reset during execution of the program or after completion of the process.

  Therefore, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011). Next, an initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process shifts to main processing (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off when the start-up process is executed, for example, the data of the RAM 273 including the data of the power-off flag is lost, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like. Is reset and the power-off flag is not turned on (ie, no power-off command from the main control device 110 is received).

  Therefore, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is off (S1010: No), S1011 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1012 and the RAM 273 After setting the initial value of (S1012), the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the processing shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 20).

  When the power-off flag is turned off, the clear processing of S1011 is skipped if only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up processing is started. This is because control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by storing data of the work area. When the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to a game effect (voice output, display, etc.), and is executed after the start process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 described above ends, and then repeatedly It is a process to be performed.

  In the main processing, first, power consumption mode setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The details of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). The details of the effect mode setting process (S1102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102) is performed, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination is performed (that is, the process of S1103 is performed last time) (S1103), and the previous time If 1 ms or more has passed since the determination of step 1 is performed (S1103: Yes), voice lamp effect processing, which is processing to execute lighting control of various lamps and voice output control, is executed (S1104), S1105 Move to the process of The details of the sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1103, if 1 ms has not elapsed from the previous determination (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. In addition, when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination is performed in the process of S1101, skipping the process of the audio lamp effect process (S1104) is executed in the audio lamp effect process (S1104) This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control in a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed (S1105) after the previous determination is performed (that is, after the process of S1105 is performed the previous time). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect or a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect is displayed as the third symbol A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1106). The details of the display effect process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the display effect process (S1106), the effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. In this effect movable body control process (S1107), the operation pattern of the effect movable body 631 corresponding to each effect is set to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable body drive device The output to 297 causes the effect movable body 631 to operate in the set operation pattern.

  When the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a solenoid, for example, an operation pattern in which the number of times of excitation of the solenoid varies according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode) By setting, the power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained. That is, power consumption is achieved by setting the number of excitations of the solenoid to the normal consumption mode (the number of excitations corresponding to the normal operation)> the small power saving mode (the number of excitations corresponding to the weak operation)> the large power saving mode (the number of excitations = 0). It is possible to obtain the power saving effect according to the mode.

  In addition, when the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a motor, for example, by setting an operation pattern in which the driving period (voltage application time) of the motor is different according to the value of the power saving counter 273a, It is possible to obtain a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode. In other words, by setting the drive period of the motor to normal consumption mode (drive period corresponding to normal operation)> small power saving mode (drive period corresponding to weak operation)> large power saving mode (operation stop), the power consumption mode is set. According to the power saving effect can be obtained.

  On the other hand, when the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a motor, the movable body is driven according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode) in addition to the setting of the operation pattern. By setting information that defines the operation amount of the device 297 and outputting the information to the movable body drive device 297, it is possible to obtain a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode. For example, by setting a value defining the duty ratio of the drive voltage of the motor according to the value of the power saving counter 273a and outputting it to the movable body drive device 297, a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained.

  Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273 a is “0”, the movable body drive device 297 outputs information defining the duty ratio of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effect movable body 631 becomes a normal operation. Do. Thereby, in the normal consumption mode, the movable body drive device 297 can be operated in the normal operation. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “1”, the information defining the duty ratio (value smaller than the normal operation) of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effect movable body 631 becomes weak Output to the device 297. Thereby, in the small power saving mode, the movable body drive device 297 can be operated with a weak operation. In addition, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “2”, information that specifies that the duty ratio of the drive voltage is zero is output to the movable body drive device 297. As a result, in the large power saving mode, the movable body drive device 297 remains stopped.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1105, if 20 ms has not yet passed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the process of S1106 and S1107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1108. In addition, when 20 ms has not passed since the previous determination was executed by the process of S1105, the process of the display effect process (S1106) is skipped by this display effect process being the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. This is because the image to be displayed is updated according to the fluctuation time, so it is not necessary to execute such processing in a cycle shorter than 20 ms. Further, similarly, the effect movable body control process (S1107) does not have to be executed in a cycle shorter than 20 ms.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is stored in the RAM 273 (S1108). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1108: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1110), and the power-off processing is performed. It executes (S1111). After execution of the power-off process (S1111), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1112), and then the process is infinitely looped.

  In the power-off process of S1111, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), and the third The output of the symbol display device 81 is turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased. Note that turning off each output port is to prevent abnormal display or abnormal voice output, and prevents the player from being confused by the abnormal display or abnormal voice output. It is for.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the process of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored (S1108: No), the keyword "55AAh" stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 19). Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1109). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1109: No), the process returns to S1101 and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1109 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the display effect process (S1106) is not executed because it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is an infinite loop, thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. As a result, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can, for example, call a store clerk in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the above-described power consumption mode setting process (S1101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), first, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201), and if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is performed. The process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the power saving counter 273a (S1202), and it is judged whether the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2. It discriminates (S1203).

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2 (S1203: Yes), the power saving counter 273a is cleared to zero, the value is set to zero (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 or less (S1203: No), the process of S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. The power saving counter 273a is sequentially changed within the range of 0 to 2 each time the power saving button 23 is operated by the processing of S1023 and S1204.

  In S1205, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1205). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1205, that is, if the power saving mode is set to the large power saving mode (S1205: Yes), the large power saving mode flag 273c is turned on ( S1206), end the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), and return to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1205, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1205: No), the large power saving mode The flag 273c is turned off (S1207), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the effect mode setting process (S1102) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process (S1102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the effect mode setting process (S1102), first, it is confirmed whether the mode change button 22 is operated (S1221), and if the mode change button 22 is not operated (S1221: No), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is performed. The process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1221 (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-fluctuation flag 273d is on (S1222). At this time, if the variation flag 273d is on (S1222: Yes), it is determined whether the mode change enable flag 273f is on (S1223).

  If it is determined that the mode changeable flag 273f is off as a result of the process of S1223 (S1223: No), it is possible to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22 even during the change (in this embodiment, In this case, the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the mode change enable flag 273f is on as a result of the determination in the process of S1223 (S1223: Yes), a time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 during change (in this embodiment, high speed change) In this case, the during-changing mode change flag 273g is turned on (S1224).

  After the process of S1224, the effect mode counter updating process is executed (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). The effect mode counter updating process (S1225) is a process for updating the value of the effect mode counter 273a, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S1222, if the during-fluctuation flag 273d is off (S1222: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting rendering in-progress flag 273e is on (S1226). At this time, if the customer waiting effect in progress flag 273e is off (S1226: No), since it is a time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited, in such a case, the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, It returns to the main processing (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1226, if the customer waiting effect in-progress flag 273e is on (S1226: Yes), since it is a time when the effect mode can be changed (permitted), After the effect mode counter updating process is executed (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the effect mode setting process (S1102), the timing at which the mode change button 22 is operated is whether the mode change enable flag 273f is on (that is, during high speed fluctuation) or the customer waiting effect effect flag 273e Is on (ie, during customer waiting effect), the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is executed. Thereby, the value of the rendering mode counter 273b is updated, and the rendering mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed (switched).

  Next, the effect mode counter update process (S1225) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing effect mode counter update processing (S1225) executed in the effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 22) described above.

  In the effect mode counter updating process (S1225), first, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is incremented by 1 (S1231), and it is determined whether the large power saving mode flag 273c is on (S1232).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S1232, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is on, that is, the power saving mode is set to the large power saving mode (S1232: Yes), the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 1 It is determined whether it exceeds (S1233). If the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 1 (S1233: Yes), the rendering mode counter 273b is cleared to zero (0) (S1234), and the rendering mode counter updating process is performed. The process ends (S1225), and returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 1 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S1233 (S1233: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is ended. , And returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is set to the large power saving mode (that is, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is on), the effect mode counter 273b does not change the mode change button 22 by the processing of S1233 and S1234. The value of 0 or 1 can be alternately taken each time it is manipulated. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the large power saving mode, the general effect mode or the advance effect mode can be set, but it is not possible to set the utility effect mode with the largest power consumption.

  Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S1232, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal power consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1232: No), the effect mode counter It is determined whether the value 273b exceeds 2 (S1235). If the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1235 (S1235: Yes), the rendering mode counter 273b is cleared to zero, and the value is set to zero (S1234). The process ends (S1225), and returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 2 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S1235 (S1235: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter updating process (S1225) is ended. , And returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b is in the range of 0 to 2 every time the mode change button 22 is operated by the processing of S1235 and S1234. It will be changed sequentially within. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, any one of three types of effect modes (general effect mode, advance effect mode, and feature effect mode) can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-mentioned sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the audio lamp effect process (S1104), first, a lamp output process (S1241) is executed. The lamp output process (S1241) is a variety of LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 or the like so as to have a lighting pattern edited in the process of S1243 described later. Processing for setting the output of (.about.323, 341 to 346), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1242). In this effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), the effect button 53 monitors an input as to whether or not the player has operated the game to enhance the effect, and the input of the effect button 53 is confirmed. It is a process set so as to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, the expectation value of the jackpot by the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the presentation button 53, or the expectation to the jackpot is displayed by pressing the presentation button 53 during reach production. Change to a playable effect. The operation timing of the effect button 53 is also suggested to the player by lighting or blinking of the effect button LED 323.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), lamp editing processing is executed (S1243). In the lamp editing process (S1243), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310 and 321 to 1) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  After the lamp editing process (S1243) is executed, a sound editing / output process is executed (S1244). In the sound editing / output process (S1244), the output pattern of the speaker device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1244, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1245), the sound lamp effect process (S1104) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1243 and the sound editing / output process of S1244 are executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S1245).

  Next, the above-described lamp output process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a lamp output process (S1241) performed in the above-described voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251). If the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the light emission based on the normal luminance is set to the sixth LED control device 296 (S1252), the process proceeds to S1253. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1253.

  In S1253, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1253). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1253 (S1253: Yes), light emission with normal brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 (S1254), The lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed last time is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended. The process returns to the sound lamp presentation process (see FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1253 (S1253: No), it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256: Yes), light emission with medium brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1257). The lighting pattern edited in step S1243 executed in step is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 (S1255), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended, and the voice lamp effect process (FIG. 24) Return to

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination in the process of S1256, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1256: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 On the other hand, turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1255 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296, and the LED control devices 291 to 293 that have received the setting. , 296 are lighting patterns corresponding to the received setting, and light or blink corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346, 348.

  In addition, the brightness set in S1255, S1257, and S1258 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, and the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are the brightness set in S1255, S1257, and S1258. The corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are lit or blinked.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 turn on or off with different brightness according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). It blinks or goes out. Specifically, the luminances of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are regarded as normal luminance when set to the normal consumption mode, and medium luminance when set to the small power saving mode. It is assumed. When the large power saving mode is set, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are turned off (that is, the luminance is set to zero).

  Also, the brightness set in S1252 is output to the sixth LED control device 296, and the sixth LED control device 296 lights or blinks the specified winning opening LED 348 at the brightness set in S1252. Therefore, the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always the normal luminance regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a.

  Next, the above-described display effect process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a effect for a big hit (that is, whether it is a big hit) (S1261), If it is inside (S1261: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S1273). In this jackpot effect processing, effect data according to the jackpot effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276, thereby updating the jackpot effect image. After the end of the jackpot effect process (S1273), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1261, if it is not a big hit (S1261: No), it is determined whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is performing the variation display of the third symbol (that is, it is in the process of variation). (S1262). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S1262: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1263).

  The fluctuation start flag (not shown) is a flag instructing the start of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is started when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on in S1263. . This fluctuation start flag is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29), and is set to OFF when starting the fluctuation display of the third symbol.

  If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1263: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1264), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S1265), and the fluctuation flag 273d is turned on. It turns on (S1266).

  After the process of S1266, an initial value is set to a fluctuation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S1267). In addition, the fluctuation time counter which is not shown in figure is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the fluctuation display of the 3rd symbol is started. The initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S1267 is a time obtained from the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the presentation time indicated by the presentation time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1267, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S1268). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S1262, when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed (during fluctuation) (S1262: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S1274) and the processing of S1268 Then, it is judged whether or not it is within the fluctuation time.

  If it is within the fluctuation time as a result of the judgment by the processing of S1268 (S1268: Yes), fluctuation display processing is executed (S1269). The fluctuation display process (S1269) is a process for executing fluctuation display (that is, fluctuation effect) of a symbol (third symbol), and the detailed process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1269, the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1268, if the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S1268: No), setting based on the type command received from main controller 110 The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1270). After the processing of S1270, the during-fluctuation flag 273d is turned off (S1271), the during-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off (S1272), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag is off (S1263: No), each display process is executed (S1275), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. In each display process (S1275), a display process such as a customer waiting effect or the like is executed when a predetermined time has not elapsed while the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. The detailed process of each display process (S1275) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation display process (S1269) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing variation display processing (S1269) executed in the display effect processing (see FIG. 26).

  In the variation display process (S1269), first, it is determined whether the during-variation mode change flag 273g is on (S1301). As a result of the determination in the process of S1301, if the changing mode change flag 273g is off (S1301: No), since the effect mode is not changed by the operation of the mode change button 22 during high speed change, in such a case Based on the value of the rendering mode counter 273b and the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, the variation display image of the current rendering mode (ie, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b) It sets according to the value of (not shown) (S1305), and shifts processing to S1303.

  That is, in S1305, the fluctuation display image selected by the effect mode indicated by the value of the presentation mode counter 273b and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, and the fluctuation display image of the timing indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter Make settings for Thereby, the image controller 274 reads necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a variation display image (variation display image in frame units) set by the processing of S1305, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81. Let

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in the process of S1301 is that the during-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is on (S1301: Yes), since the effect mode is changed by the operation of the mode change button 22 during high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode Based on the value of the counter 273b and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, to the value of the fluctuation time counter in the previous rendering mode (that is, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b before being updated) A variation display image is set in which the background image in the corresponding variation display image is changed to the background image corresponding to the current rendering mode (that is, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b at this time) (S1302), To step S1303. The image controller 274 reads necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a variation display image (variation display image in frame units) set by the process of S1302, and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the same.

  The variable display image of one frame is a first image layer (layer) in which the third pattern is drawn, a second image layer in which the background image is drawn, and a third image layer in which the advance character symbol is drawn And the first and third image layers are generated corresponding to the previous rendering mode, and the second image layer (the image layer on which the background image is drawn). ) Is switched to the one corresponding to the current rendering mode. Therefore, when the effect mode is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation, only the background image is switched to the one of the new effect mode, so even if the fluctuation is in progress, the effect mode change is not odd It can be realized.

  If the effect mode is changed during high-speed change, the in-change mode change flag 273g remains on until the change display is ended, so the process of S1302 is executed and only the background image is changed. The display is changed to that of (new) effect mode and the variable display is continued. Thereafter, with the stop of the fluctuation display, the fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off, so from the next fluctuation display, the processing of S1305 is executed, and the fluctuation display in the effect mode after the change is the third symbol display It will be displayed on the device 81.

  In S1303, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter, it is determined whether or not high speed fluctuation is in progress (S1303). If it is determined that the speed change is in progress (S1303: Yes), the mode change enable flag 273f is turned on (S1304) because it is the time when the change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible. End the variable display process. On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the processing of S1303, if it is not in high speed fluctuation (S1303: No), the mode changeable flag 273f is turned off (S1306), the fluctuation display processing (S1269) is ended, and the display effect processing Return to (see FIG. 26).

  Next, each display process (S1275) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing each display process (S1275) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26).

  In each display process (S1275), first, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1321). As a result of the determination in the process of S1321, if the customer waiting effect execution flag is on (S1321: Yes), since the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control unit 110, switching to the customer waiting effect image (S1322) The customer waiting effect execution flag is turned off (S1323), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned on (S1324), and each display process is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1321, if the customer waiting effect execution flag is off (S1321: No), as another process, for example, an error corresponding to the case where an error command is received from the main control device 110 Processing such as setting an image for display is performed (S1325), and each display processing (S1275) is ended, and the process returns to the display effect processing (see FIG. 26).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control apparatus 110, and is an interrupt process executed each time the various commands transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 are received. It is.

  In the command reception interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1401). At this time, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1402.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S1406), and the fluctuation display is started in the third symbol display device 81 The fluctuation effect setting process for setting the fluctuation effect data necessary for performing the process is executed (S1407), and the process shifts to the process of S1402.

  In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect command has been received (S1402). As a result of the judgment by the process of S1402, when the customer waiting rendering command is not received (S1402: No), it shifts to the process of S1403.

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect command is received (S1402: Yes), the customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) set in the RAM 273 is turned on (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1403.

  In the process of S1403, it is determined whether a start winning command has been received (S1403). If the result of determination in the process of S1403 is that the start winning command has not been received (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1404.

  On the other hand, when the start winning command is received (S1403: Yes), the start opening LED lighting control processing for controlling the lighting of the start opening LED 347 is executed (S1409), and the process shifts to the processing of S1404. The details of the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether an error command has been received (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that no error command has been received (S1404: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  On the other hand, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), the fourth LED control unit 294 emits light with a lighting pattern (that is, a lighting pattern according to the error content) according to the received error command and normal brightness. The setting is made (S1410, S1411), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1405.

  The lighting pattern and the light emission luminance set in S1410 and S1411 are output to the fourth LED control device 294, and the fourth LED control device 294 is the lighting set in S1410 with the luminance set in S1411 (that is, normal luminance). The notification LED 311 is lighted or blinked in a pattern (that is, a lighting pattern according to the content of the error). As described above, the brightness of the notification LED 311 is always lit or blinked at normal brightness regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode).

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1405). At this time, if another command has not been received (S1405: No), this command reception interrupt processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when another command is received (S1405: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1411), and this command reception interrupt processing is ended. In addition, as processing (S1411) according to other commands, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received, the special figure holding ball number N indicated by the number-of-holds command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Addition of a presentation time to the display of the figure holding number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d), setting of a stop symbol when a type command is received, presentation time addition / subtraction command reception For example, determination of a notice effect (for example, a slip effect, a return effect, etc.) according to a value may be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-mentioned starting opening LED lighting control process (S1209) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1209) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  In the start opening LED lighting control process (S1209), first, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1341). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1341 (S1341: Yes), light emission with normal luminance is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1342), and a predetermined lighting pattern , And sets the fifth LED control device 295 (S1343), ends the starting opening LED lighting control processing (S1209), and returns to the command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1341 (S1341: No), it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344: Yes), light emission with medium brightness is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1345), and the process proceeds to S1343.

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination in the process of S1344, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1344: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is turned off. The setting is made (S1346), the start opening LED lighting control process (S1209) is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  In the start hole LED lighting control process (S1209) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1343 is output to the fifth LED controller 295, and the fifth LED controller 295 starts with the predetermined lighting pattern set in S143. The mouth LED 347 is turned on or blinks.

  In addition, the brightness set in S1342, S1345, 1346 is output to the fifth LED control device 295, and the fifth LED control device 295 lights or blinks the starting aperture LED 347 at the brightness set in S1342, S1345, 1346. .

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the starting opening LED 347 is lighted, blinked, or extinguished with different brightness according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, the brightness of the start opening LED 347 is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and to the medium brightness when the small power saving mode is set. When the large power saving mode is set, the start opening LED 347 is turned off (that is, the brightness is set to zero).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the power consumption is configured to be different depending on the power consumption mode, and the power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23. Power consumption can be reduced (power saving). In addition, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player having high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty for power consumption. Can.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the brightness of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 347 is smaller than when the power consumption mode is set to the normal power consumption mode. Since the player is dropped (dropped), the player can realize that he / she is saving electricity by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is changed (the atmosphere is switched) by lowering the luminance of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 34 to 347, the player is also changed to the atmosphere of such effect Can also realize that they are saving electricity. Similarly, in the case of the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 is reduced, so that the player saves power according to the changing appearance and effect atmosphere. I can feel that I am

  Furthermore, the player can not only change the power consumption mode by the power saving button 23 which can be operated, but also for the specific electric parts as usual even in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). Since the system is configured to operate or emit light, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game, such as maintaining the fun of presentation while performing power saving.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 40. In the first embodiment described above, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, a predetermined electric component (a light emitting means such as the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 or the like) of a plurality of electric components The power consumption is reduced by reducing the luminance and the operation amount of the effect movable body such as the movable body 361.

  In the second embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, as in the large power saving mode in the first embodiment, the predetermined light emitting means and the movable body for effect are not operated (that is, turned off or the operation is stopped). Control the power consumption by However, when the light emitting means and the movable body for effect are not operated, while the power consumption can be suppressed, the visual effect (for example, the effect of the effect) carried by the light emitting means and the movable body for effect decreases. There is a possibility that inconveniences such as loss of interest will occur. As a countermeasure, in the second embodiment, in the power saving mode, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means or the movable body for presentation set as the target of the power saving (that is, turned off or stopped) It is configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, how the operation of the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed in accordance with the power consumption mode in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the power consumption mode is configured from three modes of the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, but in the second embodiment, the power consumption mode is normally It is comprised from two types of modes, the power saving mode in which the power consumption by an electrical component is small compared with the consumption mode and its normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electric components according to the power consumption mode in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 31, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment as well, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electric components operate with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, except for the notification LED 311, the first symbol display device 37, the second display symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81, Each light emitting means is turned off. More specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the light emitting means for effect (inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LED 341 , 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346), start opening LED 347, and specified winning opening LED 348 are turned off. Further, in the power saving mode, the operation of the effect movable body 361 is also stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, in the power saving mode, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346 as light emitting means for effect, the starting opening LED 347, and the specified winning opening LED 348 are turned off . However, various disadvantages may occur when these LEDs (light emitting means) are turned off. For example, when the light emitting means for effect such as the decoration LEDs 341 and 342 are turned off, there is a possibility that the effect of the lighting or blinking by the light emitting means for effect is lost and the interest of the game is reduced. Also, when the specific winning opening LED 348 is turned off, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot game is in progress, and the player feels the pleasure and enjoyment that the player is feeling for being in the jackpot game. There is a possibility of causing it. Similarly, with regard to the movable body for effect, when the operation of the movable body for effect (movable body for effect 361) is stopped by being set to the power saving mode, it may cause a disadvantage that the interest of the game decreases. .

  In order to suppress these problems, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, generates a pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means and the movable body for effect. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 32 is a schematic view for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441, the pseudo side lamp display portion 442, and the pseudo light lamp portion are displayed as areas for displaying the pseudo image of the light emitting means. The third symbol display device 81 in which the notification lamp display portion 443, the pseudo start opening lamp display portion 444 and the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display portion 445 are formed by the opening 86 a of the center frame 86 as a pseudo image of light emitting means. Provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of

  The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 includes a first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a provided on the upper left side of the screen and a second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b provided on the upper right side of the screen. The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (441a, 441b) (that is, in the hatched area), a pseudo image is displayed in a display mode according to the lighting pattern of the decoration LEDs 341, 342 in the normal consumption mode. As a display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 (441a, 441 b) in the power saving mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined color) is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441. The entire area blinks, or the position or color gradation of a predetermined image (for example, a round image or a fish image) flows in a predetermined direction in the area of the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as the mode. Further, the display mode in which the first pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441b do not have to be symmetrical is not necessary, and various display modes with high rendering effects can be adopted.

  The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is adjacent to the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a and is adjacent to the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442a provided on the lower left side of the screen and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b. And a second pseudo side lamp display unit 442 b provided on the lower right side of the screen. The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (442a, 442b) (that is, in the hatched area), a pseudo image is displayed in a display mode according to the lighting pattern of the side LEDs 343 to 345 in the normal consumption mode. The display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 (442a, 442b) in the power saving mode can adopt various display modes similarly to the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 described above.

  The pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 is provided at the upper center of the screen, more specifically, between the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 b. The pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the notification LED 346. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and when the power saving mode is set, the pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 of the notification LED 346 in the normal consumption mode At the lighting timing, a predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking) in the area of the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 (that is, in the hatched area).

  The false start opening lamp display unit 444 is provided at the lower center of the screen, more specifically, between the false specified winning opening lamps 445a and 445b. The false start opening lamp display unit 444 is an area for displaying a false image corresponding to the start opening LED 347. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the start in the normal consumption mode is set when the power saving mode is set. At the lighting timing of the mouth LED 347 (that is, the timing when the ball hits the first entrance 64), a predetermined image is predetermined in the area of the simulated starting opening lamp display unit 444 (that is, in the hatched area). It is displayed in a display mode (for example, lighting or blinking).

  The pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445 includes a first pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445 a provided between the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442 a and the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 and a second pseudo operation. A second pseudo specified winning opening lamp display portion 445b is provided between the side lamp display portion 442b and the pseudo start opening lamp display portion 444. The pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the specified winning opening LED 348. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and a predetermined image is displayed when the power saving mode is set. It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking). In the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, the display mode of the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 is a display mode in which the opening / closing state of the specified winning opening 65a is known. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. If it is, the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display 445 is lit in red, and if the specified winning opening 65 a is closed, the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display 445 is lit in yellow. That is, in the power saving mode, the display contents of the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 express the opening and closing of the specified winning opening 65 a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means is displayed on each of the lamp display portions 441 to 445 in the power saving mode, so that the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur as the light is turned off.

  For example, the light emitting means for effect such as the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 play a role of giving information on the state of the game to the player by being lit or blinking. When the player's state is advantageous by the player, the player can feel a sense of expectation or the like by the light emission mode of the light emitting means for these effects. Therefore, when the light emitting means for the effect is turned off in the power saving mode, it is not possible to obtain information on the state of the game from the light emitting means for the effect, so that the information the player can enjoy Information and changes in the gaming state), which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the game, which may reduce the interest of the game. In addition, since the light emitting means for effect plays a role of enhancing the effect by being lit or flickering, when the light is turned off in the power saving mode, the effect of the effect may be lost and the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means to be turned off is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441, the pseudo side lamp display portion 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 in a mode corresponding to the lighting pattern of each LED 341-346. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem (a decrease in information related to a game or a decrease in the effect of presentation) that may occur as the light emission means is turned off.

  In addition, since the specific winning a prize LED 348 plays a role of making the player recognize that it is in the jackpot game providing a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning a prize opening 65a, the specific winning a prize If the mouth LED 348 is turned off in the power saving mode, there is a possibility that the player feels less pleasure, enjoyment or the like against being in the jackpot game. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 is displayed at the same lighting timing as the specific winning opening LED 348, the joy or enjoyment of being in the jackpot game Can be provided to the player as in the case where the specific winning opening LED 348 is lighted.

  In addition, the starting opening LED 347 emits light (lights up, blinks) each time a chance for winning a big hit lottery (that is, winning of a ball to the first ball entrance 64) occurs. Therefore, the player recognizes that the opportunity of the jackpot lottery has occurred when the starting opening LED 347 is lighted, and expects the jackpot to be selected in the jackpot lottery. That is, the starting opening LED 347 plays the role of giving the player a sense of expectation based on the occurrence of the jackpot lottery event. When the starting opening LED 347 is turned off in the power saving mode, the above-mentioned role may not be played, and the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the starting opening LED 347 to be turned off is displayed at the same lighting timing as the specific winning opening LED 348 (that is, the timing when the ball wins in the first ball entrance 64 and a big win lottery trigger occurs). Therefore, the player can recognize that a jackpot lottery opportunity has occurred as in the case where the specific winning opening LED 348 is lighted, and thus can expect that a jackpot will be selected in the jackpot lottery. .

  Also, in general, since the third symbol display device 81 is a part that displays the big hit lottery after the variable display, it is a part where the player's consciousness tends to be concentrated. In this embodiment, instead of turning off the light emitting means in the power saving mode, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 where the player's awareness tends to be concentrated. The pseudo image can be sufficiently or easily recognized by the player. Therefore, this pseudo image (substitute image) can be sufficiently functioned as a substitute for the light emission means turned off, and the light emission means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) is turned off in the power saving mode. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur with the

  Moreover, since each display parts 441-445 are provided so that the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may be surrounded, the display content (for example, the fluctuation display of a symbol is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) It is possible to prevent the visibility of various effects and the like from being lowered by the display of the pseudo image. Therefore, the inconvenience (for example, the fall of a rendering effect etc.) which may arise by the fall of the visibility of the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be suppressed.

  In particular, the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 are light emitting means corresponding to the pseudo images displayed on the display units 441 to 443, that is, decoration LED 341 respectively. The position according to the arrangement of the LEDs 342 to 345 and the notification LEDs 346 effectively functions as a substitute for the LEDs 341 to 346 and effectively reduces the visual effect associated with the turning off of the LEDs 341 to 346. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is easily recognized by the player as described above, it is displayed even without displaying the power saving mode display 88 as in the first embodiment described above. It is possible to make the player realize that power saving is being performed by the pseudo image. Not only the pseudo image but also the power saving mode display 88 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, each of the pseudo images displayed on each of the display units 441 to 445 is different from the first to third image layers (layers) for displaying variations and effects of symbols. The fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image is formed on the front of the image layer (first to third image layers) for displaying the fluctuation and effects of the symbol, ie, the player. It is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by overlapping on the closer side. Thereby, the pseudo image can be displayed without reducing each data such as the variable display data stored in the character ROM 275, and the control load of the effect control device 117 (MPU 271) accompanying displaying the pseudo image can be reduced. The increase is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the present embodiment, the special drawing reserve number display unit 87 is configured to display at a position not overlapping with each of the display units 441 to 445. As a result, even when a pseudo image is displayed on each of the display portions 441 to 445, the pseudo image and the special figure holding number display portion 87 do not overlap with each other. There is no need to change the display position of the display unit 87. Also in this point, an increase in control load of the effect control device 117 accompanied by displaying the pseudo image is suppressed.

  FIG. 33 is a schematic view for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the effect movable body. As shown in FIG. 33, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed as the third symbol display device instead of operating the effect movable body 361. Displayed on 81.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 is displayed at the timing when the effect movable body 361 is operated, and the motion of the effect movable body 361 is expressed by a moving image. In the example shown in FIG. 33, two simulated images 451 in the shape of clouds are respectively revealed from the left side (left side in a front view) of the screen and are moved in the arrow X2 direction. The movement of the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the movement of the image in one direction (the direction of the arrow X2) as shown in FIG. Various actions that can be expressed can be adopted.

  When the effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable member 361 is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable to make the same shape as the shape of the effect movable body 361 overlapping the screen, and to make the movement (moving direction, moving speed) of the pseudo image 451 the same as the movement of the effect movable body 361. That is, when both the display of the effect movable body 361 and the display of the pseudo image 451 are performed, the pseudo image 451 may be formed and moved so that the effect movable body 361 overlaps the front of the pseudo image 451. preferable. Thereby, even when the movement of the effect movable body 361 is stopped, it is possible to perform an effect as if the effect movable body 361 is operating, and the effect of the effect movable body 361 and the effect Similar effects can be obtained.

  Further, the movement of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not have to be the same as the movement of the effect movable body 361 provided on the pachinko machine 10, and these movements are different. It is also good. The motion image has a higher degree of freedom than the motion of the effect movable body 361 operated by the electric component such as a solenoid or a motor, so the motion of the pseudo image 451 is compared to the motion of the effect movable body 361. It is possible to make it a complicated movement. By making the motion of the pseudo image 451 a complicated motion as compared to the motion of the effect movable body 361, the appearance of flashy or luxurious appearance due to the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) being turned off It is possible to compensate for the reduction in On the other hand, by making the movement of the pseudo image 451 and the movement of the movable body for presentation 361 the same, the player does not feel discomfort due to the difference between the presentation in the normal consumption mode and the presentation in the power saving mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Similarly, the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not have to be the same as the shape of the effect movable body 361 provided on the pachinko machine 10, and these shapes are different. May be If the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed in the power saving mode is different from the shape of the effect movable body 361, effects unique to the power saving mode can be made, and provision of added value by setting the power saving mode It becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the pseudo image 451 is different from any of the first to third image layers for displaying the variation and effect of the symbol and the fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means. It is configured to be formed in the fifth image layer. As a result, the contents displayed on the first to third image layers which are image layers for displaying the fluctuation and effect of the symbol (that is, the fluctuation display and effects of the symbol, etc.) are also included in the fourth image layer. The pseudo image 451 can be displayed without affecting the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means to be displayed. Therefore, the pseudo image 451 can be displayed by the moving image data of the pseudo image 451 instead of using the dedicated variable display data or presentation data including the pseudo image 451, and the moving image data can be used in various scenes. , Is advantageous in terms of storage capacity. In the example shown in FIG. 33, the fifth image on which the pseudo image 451 is formed is disposed behind the first to fourth image layers (that is, the side away from the player). The arrangement order is not particularly limited.

  Note that the effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the shape and movement of the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 are the same as those of the effect movable body 361. When making it the same as the movement, only the data of the moving image (the variable display data and the effect data) including the pseudo image 451 may be prepared. For example, when a shutter member for effect overlapping the front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of closing is provided as the effect movable body 361, the variable display corresponding to the effect that the shutter member for effect opens and closes As data and effect data, data of a moving image including a pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect shutter member is prepared. When moving image data including the pseudo image 451 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 replacing the movable body for effect 361 is visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, even in the case of the normal consumption mode, since the effect movable body 361 is positioned in front of the pseudo image 451, the player visually recognizes the effect movable body 361, so the effect movable body 361 There is no problem even if the pseudo image 451 is displayed behind the. Therefore, in such a case, only the data of the moving image including the pseudo image 451 may be prepared instead of both the variable display data and the effect data, and the moving image data of the pseudo image 451. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode, so the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur. That is, since the effect movable body 361 plays a role of enhancing the effect by its operation, when the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped in the power saving mode, the effect is lost and the game is entertained May decrease. However, since the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed as a moving image on the third symbol display device 81, it is thereby possible to compensate for the decrease in effect due to the operation stop of the effect movable body 361 it can.

  FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, since the power consumption mode is two types of the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode, the large power saving mode flag 273 c is omitted in the RAM 273 of the second embodiment, and the power saving counter 273 a is replaced with It has a power saving flag 273h. In addition, the RAM 273 of the second embodiment has a start winning combination flag 273i.

  The power saving flag 273 h is a flag indicating which one of two types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode and power saving mode) is set as the power consumption mode. When the power saving mode flag 273 h is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, is set to the normal power consumption mode. The power saving mode flag 273 h is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is alternately switched on and off each time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The start winning combination flag 273i is a flag indicating that a ball has won in the first ball entry port 64 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. When the start winning combination flag 273i is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the ball has won at the first ball entry port 64 in the power saving mode. The start winning flag 273i is set to ON when the ball hits the first ball entry port 64 in the power saving mode, and the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo starting opening lamp display 444 associated with the winning is finished, It is set to off (ie, "0"). The start winning combination flag 273i is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. The start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the second embodiment which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the second embodiment is executed after the end of the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the main processing of the second embodiment, the pseudo lamp display processing (S2101) is performed after the effect movable body control processing (S1107), the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from the main processing of.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the second embodiment, power consumption setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The processing contents of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of this embodiment have different points from the above-described first embodiment, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). In the second embodiment, regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, all three types of effect modes can be selected by the mode change button 22. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter updating process (S1225) in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed The value of the effect mode counter 273b is incremented by one each time, and when the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 2, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is changed to processing for zero clearing.

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103). At this time, if 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103: Yes), the voice lamp presentation process is executed (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105, and 1 ms or more has not elapsed In the case (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1105. The processing contents of the sound lamp rendering process (S1104) of the present embodiment have different points from the first embodiment described above, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, in the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode in the variable display process of S1269, the jackpot effect process of S1273, etc. The fifth image layer (an image layer for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the movable object for presentation) of the pseudo image (for example, the pseudo image 451) corresponding to the movable object for presentation 361 at the timing of moving the movable member 361 A process of forming an image on the other image layer and displaying it is performed. The formation of the pseudo image on the fifth image layer is performed based on the moving image data of the pseudo image.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1107, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, a pseudo lamp display process is performed, which is a process of displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means on each display unit 441 to 445 (S2101). Details of the pseudo lamp display processing (S2101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the pseudo lamp display process (S2101), or when it is determined in S1105 that 20 ms has not yet passed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the first embodiment described above Similarly to the above, the processing of S1108 to S1112 is executed.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the second embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201). If it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No), the power saving flag 273h is set on (S2202), and if the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes) The power saving flag 273h is set to off (S2203). Then, after the process of S2202 or S2203, the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the audio lamp presentation process (S1104) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the second embodiment.

  In the audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the present embodiment, first, a lamp output process (S1241) is executed. The lamp output process (S 1241) of the second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment described above, with various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like. , The processing contents are different from the first embodiment described above, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. . After the lamp output process (S1241), the effect button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1242) as in the first embodiment described above.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241). As a result of the determination in the process of S2241, when the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2241: No), as in the first embodiment described above, The lamp editing process (S1243), the sound editing / output process (S1244), and the liquid crystal effect execution managing process (S1245) are executed, the voice lamp effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 273h is on as a result of the determination in the processing of S2241 (S2241: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are light emitting means to be controlled. Since the light sources 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, the setting of the lighting pattern for the light emitting means is not necessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S1243) is skipped, and the sound editing / output process (S1244) and the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245) are executed as in the first embodiment described above. The voice lamp presentation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S1243) is not executed when the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S1243) may be executed.

  Next, the lamp output process (S1241) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) according to the second embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251), and if the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the power saving flag 273h is turned on or not. It discriminates (S2251).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S2251, when the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2251: No), as in the first embodiment described above, For the sixth LED control device 296, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1252), and the process proceeds to S2252.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2251: Yes), the sixth LED control device 296 is checked. Turn off is set (S2253), and the process proceeds to S2252. As a result of the process of S2253, the specific winning opening LED 348 is extinguished, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 as a substitute for the specific winning opening LED 348 being extinguished ) Is displayed on the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 (see S2265 in FIG. 39).

  If the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a jackpot (S1251: No), the process proceeds to S2252. In S2252, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2252). When the power saving flag 273h is off as a result of the determination in the process of S2252 (S2252: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are determined based on the normal brightness as in the first embodiment described above. Light emission is set (S1254), and the lighting pattern edited in S1243 previously executed is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and lamp output processing To return to the voice lamp presentation process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 273h is on as a result of the determination in the process of S2252 (S2252: Yes), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are the same as in the first embodiment described above. Turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37). As a result of the process of S1258, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 which are light emitting means for effect are extinguished, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the light emitting means for effect which is extinguished Alternatively, pseudo images are displayed on the display portions 441 to 443 (see S2263 in FIG. 39). After the process of S1258, the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, the above-described pseudo lamp display process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a pseudo lamp display process (S2101) performed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the second embodiment described above.

  In the pseudo lamp display process (S2101), first, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2261). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off (S2261: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo image is displayed on the display portions 441 to 445 on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is not necessary to display, in such a case, the pseudo lamp display processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is on and the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2261: Yes), the pseudo lamp editing process is executed (S2262). The simulated lamp editing process (S2262) is a process corresponding to the lamp editing process (S1243) executed in the normal consumption mode, and each display unit 441 to 445 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Is a process of setting the display mode of the pseudo image to be displayed.

  After the processing of the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 442, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 are pseudo images based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process. Is controlled to be displayed in the set display mode (S2263). The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 442, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 as an alternative to the light emitting means for effect turned off by setting the power saving mode by the process of S2263 (in the present embodiment, the LED 341 to 346). The pseudo notification lamp display 443 displays a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means.

  After the processing of S2263, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S2264), and if the jackpot is in progress (S2264: Yes), the pseudo specified winning opening based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing processing (S2262) Control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed in the set display mode on the lamp display unit 445 (S2265). As a substitute for the specific winning opening LED 348 which has been turned off by setting the power saving mode by the process of S2265, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 is displayed on the pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445.

  After the process of S2265, the process proceeds to S2266. If the result of the determination in the process of S2264 is not a big hit (S2264: No), the process of S2265 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2266.

  In S2266, it is determined whether or not the start winning combination flag 273i is on (S2266). If it is determined that the start winning combination flag 273i is on (S2266: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to finish displaying the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2266: Yes) S2267).

  If it is not the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 as a result of the determination by the processing of S2267, that is, if the pseudo image is continuously displayed on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2267: No), based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed in the set display mode on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2268), The pseudo lamp display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). By the process of S2268, a pseudo image corresponding to the starting opening LED 347 is displayed on the pseudo starting opening lamp display unit 444 as a substitute for the starting opening LED 347 which is turned off because the power saving mode is set.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo starting opening lamp display unit 444 as a result of the determination by the processing of S2267 (S2267: Yes), the start winning flag 273i is set to OFF ( S2269), the pseudo lamp display process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In addition, as a result of the determination in the processing of S2266, if the start winning combination flag 273i is off (S2266: No), it is not the timing to display the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444, so the pseudo lamp display process is ended. Then, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) according to the second embodiment. The starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29). Among the processes executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29), the process similar to that of the above-described first embodiment is executed except for the start opening LED lighting control process (S1409) shown in FIG. Be done.

  In the start hole LED lighting control process (S1409) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2341). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2341: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, light emission with normal brightness is set (S1342), a predetermined lighting pattern is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1343), the start opening LED lighting control processing is ended, and the command reception interrupt processing is performed. Return to (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S2341, when the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2341: Yes), the same as the first embodiment described above. In the fifth LED control device 295, turn off is set (S1346). As a result of the process of S1346, the start opening LED 347 is turned off, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the pseudo image corresponding to the start opening LED 347 is simulated as a substitute for the turned off start opening LED 347. It is comprised so that it may display on the starting opening lamp display part 444 (refer S2268 of FIG. 39). After the processing of S1346, the start winning combination flag 273i is set to ON (S2342), the start opening LED lighting control processing is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 29).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, one of the predetermined electric components (the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the decoration LEDs 341, 342, etc. While the light emitting means of the part and the movable object for presentation such as the movable object for presentation 361 are turned off or stopped, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the predetermined electric component which is the target of the power saving It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the light emission mode or the operation mode of the electric component.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visual effects (for example, the reduction in rendering effects) caused by the turning off or stopping of the electric component. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 used for performing variable display of symbols and jackpot effect etc. is used as a display device used for displaying a pseudo image, the electric component is turned off or the operation is stopped. Power consumption can be reduced (power saving) by the amount of power consumption. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, since it is possible to suppress the reduction in visual effects (for example, rendering effects) in the power saving mode, it is possible to save power and to suppress the decrease in interest of the game. Can be provided to the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. In this third embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, the variable display of symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD, and the power saving is configured for saving power by using a 7-segment LED which consumes less power than the LCD. Power consumption is reduced by using the symbol display device 181. In the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed in accordance with the power consumption mode in the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode and the power saving mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than that of the normal power consumption mode. Composed of different types of modes.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electric components according to the power consumption mode in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 41, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment as well, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electric components operate with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, light emitting means for effect (inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower dish LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LEDs 341 and 342, side Among the LEDs 343 to 345 and the notification LED 346), light emitting means other than the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 (ie, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and The notification LED 346) is all turned off. On the other hand, for the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the luminance is dropped from the normal luminance to the middle luminance.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 of the light emitting means for effect are lit (or blinked) at medium brightness. In the power saving mode, although all of the light emitting means (decorative LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346) for effect provided on the game board 13 are turned off, the inner circumference LED 301 surrounding the periphery of the game board 13 By turning on or blinking 304, it is possible to suppress that the impression of the game board 13 that turns to a line of sight when the player performs a game becomes dark. At that time, since the brightness of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal brightness to the middle brightness, the power consumption of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is also reduced as compared with the normal consumption mode. You can get it.

  Further, outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 arranged apart from the game board 13 as compared with the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and light emitting means (lower dish LEDs 321 and 322 and effect button LED 323) provided in the lower dish unit 15 are Since the ratio at which the player is conscious during the game is relatively low, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are lit or the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are turned on even if the light emitting means (peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and effect button LED 323) By blinking, the power saving effect and the rendering effect can be suitably achieved.

  Moreover, even if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the notification LED 311, the specific winning opening LED 348, the first symbol display device 37, and the second display symbol display device As for 83, the normal luminance is maintained as in the first and second embodiments described above.

  Therefore, by keeping the luminance of the notification LED 311 as the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode, various errors generated in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the errors are displayed. It is possible for the player to quickly return to the game quickly and to detect the fraud early. In addition, by leaving the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 as normal luminance, it is ensured to the player that a jackpot is being played to provide a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning opening 65a. It can be made to recognize and it can prevent reducing the pleasure and pleasure which a player feels to being in the jackpot game.

  In addition, devices that display a lottery result relating to the player's benefit, such as the first symbol display device 37 and the second display symbol display device 83, always have normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Since the player is left as it is, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery.

  On the other hand, unlike the first and second embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power. However, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, it is not possible to display a decorative symbol (third symbol) indicating the lottery result of the big hit. The stop symbol indicating the jackpot result of the jackpot is also displayed by the lighting color of the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37, but the player tends to pay attention to the decorative third symbol whose lottery result is easy to distinguish Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished in the power saving mode and the third symbol can not be seen, the player can not determine the lottery result of the jackpot. Therefore, for example, when it is difficult for a player to grasp the lottery result after winning a prize in the first entry ball slot 64, and thereby it is felt that the tempo of the game has become worse or the detachment continues, the first entry ball slot A disadvantage may occur, such as doubting whether or not the drawing that should have been made on the occasion of the prize for 64 has actually been made.

  In order to suppress such inconveniences, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a symbol display device 181 for power saving composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and is changed to the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode. The power saving symbol display device 181 is used to display a stop symbol. As shown in FIG. 41, the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off in the normal consumption mode, and is lit with normal brightness when the power saving mode is set. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the stop symbol is displayed by numbers on the symbol display device 181 for power saving which is the 7-segment LED instead of the third symbol display device 81, so the player draws the jackpot lottery immediately after the symbol is stopped. The result can be easily determined, and the problems and the like exemplified above can be prevented. In addition, since the 7-segment LED consumes less power than an LCD such as the third symbol display device 81, a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off in the power saving mode by turning off the backlight of the LCD so that the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. Thereby, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be returned early.

  Next, the power saving symbol display device 181 described above will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.42 (a) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, and FIG.42 (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the power saving symbol display device 181 is configured of three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, and appears when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode to display the third symbol display device 81. Are provided on the front side (the side facing the player) of the shutter member 180 that covers the shutter. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 42 (a), the power saving symbol display device 181 has three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c in the top-bottom direction near the end on the right side on the front side of the left shutter member 180L. In the vertical direction). Although not shown, a substrate for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) is provided on the back side of the left shutter member 180L.

  The shutter member 180 appears from the left side of the opening 86a of the center frame 86 and covers the left side of the visible area of the third symbol display device 81 (the area of the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a) The right shutter member 180R appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81. The shutter members 180 </ b> L and 180 </ b> R are supported by a drive unit (not shown) so as to be vertically movable in the left and right direction.

  A drive unit (not shown) serves as an operating device (not shown) for moving the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R, including a motor capable of positioning control such as a servomotor and a stepping motor, and rotation of a rotor of the motor It has a rack and pinion mechanism that converts motion into linear motion. The moving mechanism of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R is a known technique, and therefore the details thereof will be omitted. However, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are straight lines converted from rotational movement of the motor by the rack and pinion mechanism. Move in the lateral direction by exercise.

  When the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode, the shutter members 180 are in the open state in which the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are accommodated in the center frame 86. When the shutter member 180 is in the open state, the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the player, and the player changes the display of the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the jackpot effect Etc. can be viewed.

  When the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the motor of the operating device (not shown) is driven and controlled, whereby the left shutter member 180L is moved in the closing movement direction (arrow ML direction) facing right. The right shutter member 180R moves in the closing movement direction (arrow MR direction) facing left. The left and right shutter members 180L and 180R stop in contact with each other substantially at the center of the opening 86a of the center frame 86, thereby forming a closed state.

  When the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is closed, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the visible area of the third symbol display device 81 (ie, the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a). The region is covered by the shutter member 180.

  As described above, since the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) are provided on the front side (the side facing the player) of the left shutter member 180L, the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are in the open state. If the shutter member 180 is closed, it can not be seen because it is hidden by the center frame 86, and becomes visible. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the symbol display devices for power saving 181 (181a to 181c) appear and can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player can recognize that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode from the shutter member 180 in the closed state being in the closed state, the appearance of the symbol display device for power saving 181, and the like.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and uses the symbol display device for power saving 181 (181a to 181c) instead. The stop symbol (the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed. Of the three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, the first seven-segment LED 181a disposed at the top corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the middle row The second 7-segment LED 181b disposed in the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the third 7-segment LED 181c disposed in the lowermost row is the third symbol display device 81 Corresponds to the below-described pattern row Z3 displayed on.

  At the time of the power saving mode, after these seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c are variably displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is represented by numbers and stopped. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is selected by the jackpot lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating the probability variation jackpot (for example, the combination of the same odd value) is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 a to 181 c as a stop symbol. When the big hit is selected by the big hit lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers (for example, the combination of the same even value) indicating that the big hit is usually displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 a to 181 c as the stop symbol. . On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is selected for out-of-lot, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating out-of-range is displayed as a stop symbol on the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, the left shutter member 180L is formed with a notch 180La above the end of the right side (the side in the closing movement direction of the left shutter member 180L). Similarly, in the right side shutter member 180R, a notch 180Ra is formed below the end of the left side (the side in the closing movement direction of the right side shutter member 180R). When the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are in the closed state, the player can view the screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the cutouts 180La, 180Ra.

  As described above, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, so the screen of the third symbol display device 81 seen from the notches 180La and 180Ra is a black screen. is there. Therefore, the player can confirm the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 through the cutouts 180La and 180Ra, and knows that the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished based on the confirmation. be able to. Therefore, from the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 visible through the notches 180La and 180Ra, it can be realized that the user is cooperating in power saving.

  FIG. 43 is a schematic view for explaining the process of shifting the power saving symbol display device 181 to the closed state. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, but the turn-off of the third symbol display device 81 is the display of the third symbol display device 81 Rather than deleting the content in an instant (turning off), the display content is gradually reduced, and after being reduced to a predetermined size, the display content is deleted.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, as shown in FIG. 43, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced. At this time, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color. Note that various colors such as black and red can be adopted as the lighting color (predetermined color) of the area 81 b. Then, after the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size, the display content of the display area 81a is erased.

  On the other hand, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is gradually moved in the closing movement direction (arrow ML direction, arrow MR direction) in accordance with the reduction speed of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the shutter member 180 is gradually moved in the closing movement direction so as to increase the overlap with the area 81 b which is enlarged as the display area 81 a is reduced. Then, after the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the display contents of the display area 81a are erased, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are moved to a position where they are in contact with each other (that is, until completely closed). Let

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the player can visually recognize both the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181 temporarily. It is done. Therefore, the player compares the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181 while switching the device used as the display device of the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery). It can be observed. This makes it possible for the player to convince the player that disadvantages such as a change in stop symbol will not occur with switching from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. It can be played without having a sense of distrust.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stop symbol is the third symbol display device 81, particularly if the variable display of symbols is executed when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size. The shutter member 180 is configured so as not to be in a completely closed state until it is displayed on both the and power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c). In the example shown in FIG. 43, “777” is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6), and “7” stops at each of the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the symbol display device 181 for power saving. It is displayed as a pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a character symbol corresponding to a numeral is displayed as a main symbol (see FIG. 6), but in FIG. 43, the character symbol is indicated by a numeral for convenience.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving are displayed when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the variable display of symbols is executed. Since the stop symbol is displayed on both of 181 and the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the stop symbol (the result of the jackpot lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is justified without doubt Can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from having a sense of distrust.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) It will be closed gradually. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player on switching from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode, and it is possible to impress the player that power saving is being performed. In particular, since switching from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode is performed by the player operating the power saving button 23, the player visually recognizes the display area 81a which is gradually reduced and the shutter member 180 which is gradually closed. In this case, you can realize that you are cooperating with saving electricity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating a big hit is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle line L2, and among the stop symbols, the number of the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a. The numbers in the middle symbol column Z2 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181b, and the numbers in the lower pattern column Z3 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181c, but the predetermined combination number indicating a jackpot is valid other than the middle line L2 Also in the case where the lines (left line L1, right line L3, right upward line L4, left upward line L5) are aligned, the numbers of the upper symbol row Z1 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a, and the numbers of the middle symbol row Z2 are 7 segments It may be displayed on the LED 181 b, and the numbers in the lower row design Z3 may be displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 c. In addition, when it is the combination which the stop design shows the disassembly, the number of each design column Z1-Z3 which is lined up on the particular effective line (for example, middle line L2), 7 point LED181a-LED181c similar to the case of big hit Display it.

  FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, since the display of the pseudo image (substitute image) is not performed, the configuration of the second embodiment (273b, 273d to 273h; see FIG. 34) excluding the start winning combination flag 273i, is the RAM 273 of this embodiment. In addition to the above, the in-transition flag 273 j and the closing start flag 273 k are included.

  The during-transition flag 273 j is a flag indicating whether the state of the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. If the in-transition flag 273 j is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is in transition. On the other hand, when the transition flag 273 j is set to off (ie, “0”), the state of the shutter member 180 is not in transition, ie, the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. During the transition, the flag 273 j is set to ON when the closing or opening of the shutter member 180 is started by the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. When open, it is set to off. The in-transition flag 273 j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 273k is a flag indicating that the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state have started closing. When the closing start flag 273 k is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the open state has started closing. The closing start flag 273 k is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) when the power is turned on, and in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 273 h is off), the player operates the power saving button 23. Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when the closing of the shutter 180 is started, it is set to be off.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 45 to 50. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. Further, the start-up process and the command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 and 29, respectively.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the third embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the third embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 as in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the main processing of the third embodiment, the processing of S3101 to S3104 is performed after the effect movable body control processing (S1107), the main of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from processing.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the third embodiment, power consumption setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The process contents of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of this embodiment have different points from the above-described first embodiment, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). Also in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, three types of effect modes are performed by the mode change button 22 regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode. Both are configured to be selectable. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter updating process in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment as in the second embodiment described above. Each time (S1225) is executed, 1 is added to the value of the rendering mode counter 273b, and when the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 2, the processing of changing the value of the rendering mode counter 273b to zero clear processing is performed. .

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103). At this time, if 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103: Yes), the voice lamp presentation process is executed as in the first embodiment (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1105.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, as in the second embodiment described above.

  After the processing of S1107, the power saving symbol display control processing, which is processing for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S3101). The details of the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S3101), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102: Yes), the apparatus used as a display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) is switched to the power saving mode from the normal consumption mode. A power saving mode transition process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S3103). The details of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S3102: No) as a result of the determination in the processing of S3102, the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode when the device used as the display device for the stop symbol is switched. A power saving mode release process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S3104). The details of the power saving mode canceling process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) or the power saving mode cancellation process (S3104), the processes of S1108 to S1112 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. Also, if it is determined in S1105 that 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the processing in S1108 to S1112 is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Do.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the third embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3201). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273 j is on (S 3201: Yes), the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. , End the power consumption mode setting process, and return to the main process (see FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is in operation, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-transition flag 273 j is off as a result of the determination in the processing of S 3201 (S 3201: No), the in-transition flag 273 j is set to on (S 3202). Next, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201).

  If it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No), the power saving flag 273h is set on (S2202), and the closing start flag 273k is set on (S3203). The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 273h is set to off (S2203), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the main process (FIG. Return to 45).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the lamp output processing (S1241) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) according to the third embodiment. The lamp output process (S1241) of the third embodiment is a process executed in the sound lamp effect process (S1104) in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment. It is to be noted that, of the processing executed in the sound lamp rendering processing (S1104), processing similar to that of the first embodiment described above is executed except for the lamp output processing (S1241) shown in FIG.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251). If the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the first embodiment is the same as the first embodiment. For the 6 LED control device 296, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1252), and the process proceeds to S3251. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3251.

  In S3251, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S3251). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S3251: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the first to third LEDs Light emission with normal brightness is set for the control devices 291 to 293 (S1254), and the lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed at the previous time is sent to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 Then, the setting is made (S1255), the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp presentation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3251: Yes), the first LED control device 291 is checked. Setting is performed so that the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 emit light at medium brightness (S3252). Next, the first LED control device 291 is set to turn off the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 (S3253), and the second and third LED control devices 292 and 293 are set to turn off (S3254). As described above, in the power saving mode, the processing of S3252 to S3254 is performed, so that only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 of the light emission means for effect are lit (or blink) at medium brightness, and the other light emission means The LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323) are turned off.

  After the process of S3254, the process of S1255 is executed, the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process. However, if the power saving flag 273h is on, the processing of S3253 and S3254 is executed, and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 are turned off. Then, the lighting pattern for the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 or the specific winning opening LED 348 among the lighting patterns edited in S1243 executed last time is set for the first LED control device 291 or the sixth LED control device 296. In the lamp editing process (S1243), when the power saving flag 273h is on, the lighting patterns of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 may not be set.

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S3101), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3401). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off (S3401: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and there is no need to display by the symbol display device for power saving 181, so Turns off the power saving symbol display device 181 (S3417), ends the power saving symbol device display control processing, and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress. It discriminates (S3402). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3402, if it is not a jackpot (S3402: No), it is discriminated whether or not it is in the process of fluctuation (during the display of fluctuation of the symbol) (S3403). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S3403: No), it is determined whether the change start flag (not shown) is on as in the process of S1263 in the display effect process (see FIG. 26) (S3404).

  If the result of determination in the process of S3404 is that the change start flag is off (S3404: No), each display process is executed (S3416). In this display process (S3416), a process of setting an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, a process of S1322 or a process of setting an image in the process of S1325 is omitted. The same processing as the display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment is executed. After execution of each display process (S3416), the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S3417), the power saving symbol device display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3404, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S3404: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S3405), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S3406), and the fluctuation is in progress. The flag 273d is turned on (S3407). After the process of S3407, as in the process of S1267 in the display effect process (see FIG. 26), an initial value is set in the fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S3408).

  After the processing of S3408, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S3409). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3403, if it is in the midst of fluctuation (S3403: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S3415), and it proceeds to the processing of S3409. Make a decision on

  If it is within the fluctuation time as a result of the judgment by the processing of S3409 (S3409: Yes), fluctuation display by the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S3410). That is, the segment patterns of the seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 are varied. After the processing of S3410, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3409, if the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S3409: No), setting based on the type command received from main controller 110 The stopped symbols are displayed on the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) (S3411). After the processing of S3411, the in-fluctuation flag 273d is turned off (S3412), the in-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off (S3413), the power saving symbol display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45). .

  If the result of the determination in the process of S3402 is that the jackpot is in progress (S3402: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S3414). In the power saving mode, when a big hit is generated, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the processing of S3414, so that the player can recognize that the big hit is in progress by visually recognizing the blinking. It can be recognized. In the power saving mode, since the display mode of the power saving symbol display device 181 in the jackpot is different from the other states such as in the movement, it is possible to play the jackpot providing the state advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the person surely recognize, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electric component. After the processing of S3414, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  Next, the power saving mode shift process (S3103) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process (S3103) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S3103), first, it is determined whether the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421). At this time, if the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421: YES), the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, and the shutter member 180 (180L, 180L, Since it is the timing to start the closing of 180R), in this case, first, the closing start flag 273k is set to OFF (S3422).

  After the process of S3422, the reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are set (S3423), and the process proceeds to S3424. When the processing of S3423 is executed, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display effect processing (see FIG. 26) is formed so as to be reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the third symbol display device It is displayed in the 81 display area 81a. On the other hand, the motor of the operating device (not shown) is controlled such that the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are closed in accordance with the reduction speed of the image. Thus, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction rate. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing start flag 273k is off (S3421: No), the process of S3422, S3423 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3424.

  In S3424, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3424). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273j is off (S3424: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The migration process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 273 j is on (S 3424: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 in transition to the closed state has reached the predetermined position (S 3424). S3425). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S3425: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, and the main process Return to (see FIG. 45).

  If the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position (S3425: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S3425, it is determined whether the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S3426).

  As a result of the discrimination by the process of S3426, if it is not in stop (S3426: No), the reduction of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427), and the process is changed to S3428 Transition. On the other hand, if the process is stopped (S3426: Yes), the process of S3427 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3428.

  At S3428, it is determined whether or not it is in motion (during symbol display of symbols) (S3428). At this time, if it is not during fluctuation (S3428: No), it is judged whether or not fluctuation display of symbols has been started (S3429). At this time, if fluctuation display of symbols is not started (S3249: No), predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after closing of the shutter member 180 (or reduction of the display area 81a) is stopped by the processing of S3427. Is determined (S3430).

  As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3430, when the closing display of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the variable display of the symbol is not executed (that is, S3428: No and S3429: No), and the predetermined time has not passed. (S3430: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S3430, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S3431), and The symbol display device 81 is turned off (S3432). Therefore, when the variation display of the symbol is not performed after the closing is stopped by the shutter member 180 reaching the predetermined position, the shutter member 180 is completely closed after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the third The symbol display device 81 is turned off. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 is turned off after the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player is allowed to display an image in a display area 81a of a predetermined size. It is hard to feel discomfort due to the 81a being erased.

  When the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player can view the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 only through the notches 180La and 180Ra. Here, when a color such as red is adopted as the lighting color of the area 81 b, after the shutter member 180 is completely closed, clearly identify the change in color visually recognized from the notches 180La and 180Ra. Can. Therefore, the player can strongly recognize that the power saving mode is in effect by the clear color change, and can strongly realize that he / she is cooperating in power saving.

  In S3432, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off by turning off the backlight of the LCD so that the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. By not interrupting the power supply to the image controller 274, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be restored early.

  After the processing of S3432, the in-transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3433), the power saving mode transition processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S3428 is that it is changing (S3428: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter (not shown) is 0 or not (S3434). Also, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3429, also when the fluctuation display of symbols is started (S3429: Yes), the processing is shifted to S3434.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3434 that the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the timing at which the fluctuation time ends (S3434: Yes), the processing is shifted to S3431. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the processing of S3431 (full closing of the shutter) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is not 0 as a result of the determination in the processing of S3434 (S3434: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to wait for the value of the fluctuation time counter to become 0. Return to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the shutter member 180 is moving at the time when the closing is stopped by reaching the predetermined position, or the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped. When the variable display of the symbol is started, the shutter member 180 is not completely closed until the variable display ends. That is, when the variable display of symbols is executed in the display area 81a reduced to a predetermined size, the stop symbol is the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving 181 (181a to 181c). The shutter member 180 is configured not to be completely closed until it is displayed on both sides. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is set to the power saving mode and thus the legitimacy without doubt. It is possible to prevent the person from having a sense of mistrust.

  Next, the power saving mode release processing (S3104) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode release process (S3104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode releasing process (S3104), first, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3441). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273j is off (S3441: No), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of determination by the processing of S3441, when the flag 273j during transition is on (S3441: Yes), the shutter member 180 is in a completely open state, and in such a case, the third symbol display device 81 Lights up (S3442). When the process of S3442 is executed, the image formed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26) is displayed over the entire visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S3442, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S3442). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, the shutter member 180 is completely turned on after the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. Open. At this time, since the shutter member 180 is opened after the third symbol display device 81 is turned on, the dark screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not seen from between the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the switching from the light-off state of the third symbol display device 81 to the lighting state, and it is difficult to feel a sense of discomfort in switching. After the processing of S3442, the in-transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3444), the power saving mode cancellation processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181 Is configured as. The seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol according to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to, and the player is the jackpot lottery There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern which is easy to determine the result of. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished and the stop symbol by the third symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and thereby the tempo of the game becomes worse, or If the deviation continues, it may cause inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery has been truly or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery is represented by a combination of numerals using the symbol display device for power saving 181 As configured as described above, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the symbol display device 181 for power saving, the third symbol After the display corresponding to the display content (for example, the fluctuation display of the symbol and the jackpot effect) displayed on the display device 81 is also displayed on the symbol display device 181 for power saving, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off Is configured as. That is, after displaying the same contents on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181, the display device used to display the stop symbol is displayed from the third symbol display device 81. It is comprised so that it may switch to the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the fluctuation display of symbols and the stop symbol etc.) and the display contents displayed on the symbol display device for power saving 181 are justified without doubt. This can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from having a sense of distrust.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 surrounding the periphery of the game board 13 among the light emitting means for effecting are lit (or blinked) Since this is done, it is possible to suppress that the impression of the game board 13 which looks at when the player plays a game becomes dark. At that time, since the brightness of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal brightness to the middle brightness, the power consumption of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is also reduced compared to the normal consumption mode. Power savings can be obtained.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. Also in the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, when the power saving mode is set, the variable display of symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81, and the power consumption is smaller than that of the LCD 7. The power consumption is reduced by using the power saving symbol display device 181 configured of segment LEDs. In the fourth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by an LCD as in the first and second embodiments. In the third embodiment described above, the power saving mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned on. However, in the fourth embodiment, use of the power-saving symbol display device 181 is started at the timing when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size. In the fourth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments described above are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. The RAM 273 according to the fourth embodiment has a closing stop flag 271 in addition to the configuration (273b, 273d to 273h, 273j, 273k; see FIG. 44) according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 51, the small letter "l (el)" of the block body is marked with a cursive el.

  The closing stop flag 2731 is a flag indicating whether or not the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R), which shifts from the open state to the closed state, is stopped at a predetermined position. When the closing stop flag 2731 is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the shutter member 180 is stopped at a predetermined position. On the other hand, when the closing stop flag 2731 is set to OFF (ie, "0"), the shutter member 180 is not stopped at the predetermined position, that is, the shutter member 180 changes from the open state to the closed state. Indicates that it is in transition, completely closed, or completely open. The closing stop flag 271l is set to ON when the shutter member 180 for transitioning from the open state to the closed state reaches a predetermined position, and is then set to OFF when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Note that the closing stop flag 271l is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 52 and 53. The control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 18 as in the third embodiment described above. Further, the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is also as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, as in the third embodiment described above.

  In addition, the main processing of the fourth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117, is skipped when the closing stop flag 2731 is on, and the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S3101) The same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above is executed except that the processing of the power saving mode transition processing (S3103) is different.

  Next, a power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment is a closing stop flag instead of the process of S3401 in the power saving symbol display control process (see FIG. 48) of the third embodiment. This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the process (S4401) of determining whether 2731 is on is performed.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether the closing stop flag 2731 is on (S4401). At this time, if the closing stop flag 2731 is off (S4401: No), the processing of S3417 is executed as in the third embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing stop flag 2731 is on as a result of the determination in the processing of S3401 (S4401: Yes), the processing of S3402 to S3417 is executed as in the third embodiment.

  Next, the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode shift process (S3103) according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3421 to S3426 are executed as in the third embodiment described above. Here, as a result of the determination in the processing of S3426, if the shutter member 180 is not stopped at the predetermined position (S3426: No), the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is the same as in the third embodiment described above. The reduction and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427).

  After the processing of S3427, the closing stop flag 271l is set to ON (S4421). By setting the closing stop flag 271l to ON, the use of the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) is started (see FIG. 52). Therefore, at this timing, the display of the content corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the symbol display device for power saving 181.

  After the process of S4421, as in the third embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 by the process of 3427 is stopped (S3430) . If it is determined that the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S3426: Yes), the process of S3427 and S4421 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3430.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S3430, when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: No), the power saving mode release process is ended, and the main process (see FIG. 45) Return to On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: Yes), the closing stop flag 2731 is set to OFF (S4422). After the process of S4422, the processes of S3431 to S3433 are executed as in the third embodiment described above.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, the display of the same content is performed on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181 Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 because the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. The player can clearly indicate to the player that the displayed content (for example, the variable display of the symbol or the stop symbol etc.) and the displayed content displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 are correct without any doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23 (specifically, the display area 81a has a predetermined size) Since the use of the symbol display device for power saving 181 is started at the timing when it arrives, the period for using both the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving 181 becomes short. Power consumption can be suppressed more suitably.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the power saving mode in the game can be switched using the power saving button 23 provided on the front frame 14 (upper tray 17). In the fifth embodiment, by using the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to switch the presence or absence of power saving during customer waiting effects, thereby suppressing power consumption. Plan. In the fifth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a volume control switch 227 is provided in the effect control device 117. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is also configured to function as a changeover switch as to whether or not to save power at the time of customer waiting effect.

  While a power saving button 23 is provided on the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 10 and is an operation element (button) for switching the power consumption mode according to the player's intention, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 The volume adjustment switch 227 is a dedicated operation (switch) for allowing the staff of the hall, not the player, to manage the power saving at the time of customer waiting effect.

  Here, the volume adjustment switch 227 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the volume adjustment switch 227. FIG. The volume adjustment switch 227 is a switch for changing the size (volume) of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226, and the rotary switch 227b (see FIG. 56) and the operation axis of the rotary switch 227b are manually operated. It is comprised from the operation knob 227a for making it rotate.

  The rotary switch 227 b is a 16-position (contact) rotary switch, and outputs a value of 0 to 15 (0 to F in hexadecimal) according to the position. The position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed by rotating the operating shaft.

  The operation knob 227a is a knob for manually rotating the operation shaft of the rotary switch 227b, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by an operator such as an employee of the hall. Therefore, when the operator rotates the operation knob 227a, the operation shaft can be rotated, whereby the position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed. Specifically, the position of the rotary switch 227b can be set by aligning the mark 227a1 written on the operation knob 227a with any of the values 0 to F written around the operation knob 227a. The rotary switch 227b outputs a value (output value) indicated by the mark 227a1.

  FIG. 55 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (that is, the output value from the rotary switch 227b) and the volume setting value. As described above, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 can take 16 levels of values from 0 to F (hexadecimal number; 0 to 15 in decimal number), and 0 to 0 for each of the 16 levels of output value. A volume setting of 8 is assigned. As the volume setting value is larger, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 is larger. That is, the minimum value “0” of the volume setting value is the minimum volume that the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 can take, and the maximum value “8” of the volume setting value is released from the speaker device 226 This is the maximum volume of the sound that can be heard.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 is “0”, the volume setting value is “0” and the mute is performed. As the output value (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) increases from "0", the volume setting value also increases. Specifically, as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value increases by one, and when the output value is "8", the volume setting value becomes "8" which is the maximum volume.

  Then, in the range where the output value is larger than "8", that is, in the range of 9 to F (hexadecimal number), as the output value increases, the volume setting value gradually decreases and the volume also decreases. Specifically, when the output value is "9", the volume setting value is "7", and as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value decreases by one, and the output value "F" , And the volume setting value is "1".

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the volume setting value when the output value is "0" is "0" and the volume setting value when the output value is "F" is "1". Therefore, the operator rotates the operation knob 227a to change the output value from “F” to “0” or change the output value from “0” to “F”. It is configured such that no sudden volume change occurs.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output value range of 0 to 8 is assigned as the volume setting range of the normal specification, and the output value range of 9 to F is assigned as the volume setting range of the power saving specification. ing. The "power saving specification" is a specification for saving power during customer waiting effects, and specifically, the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) for effect is turned off during customer waiting effects. Specifications. On the other hand, the "normal specification" is a specification which does not extinguish the light emitting means for effect even during the customer waiting effect.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), since the output value assigned to the normal specification is in the range of 0 to 8, in the normal specification, values of 0 to 8 can be taken as the volume setting value. On the other hand, since the output value assigned to the power saving specification is in the range of 9 to F, the power saving specification can take values of 1 to 7 as the volume setting value.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the volume settings (that is, the volume setting values within the range of 1 to 7) that can be set in not only the normal specification but also the power saving specification. The desired volume can be set.

  Here, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both of the normal specification and the power saving specification can be set by the single volume adjustment switch 227 for the volume setting values in the range of 1 to 7 It is configured. That is, only by rotating the operation knob 227a of the volume adjustment switch 227, adjustment of the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 (setting of the volume setting value in the range of 1 to 7), normal specification and power saving It can do both of switching with the specification. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing power saving.

  Also, as the volume is smaller, the amount of power consumed by the speaker device 226 is smaller. Therefore, the volume adjustment switch 227 enables not only the power saving during the customer waiting effect by the power saving specification but also the power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, the power saving by reducing the volume). Therefore, switching of presence / absence of power saving during the customer waiting effect and adjustment of the volume can be realized by one operator (in the present embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227), so a person who performs such switching / setting The operation of the hall staff should be easy, and the work load is small.

  In addition, since the maximum volume (volume setting value "7") that can be taken by the power saving specification is smaller than the maximum volume (volume setting value "8") that can be taken by the normal specification, Can contribute to power saving. In the present embodiment, the volume setting value “0” is assigned to the normal specification and not assigned to the power saving specification, but the volume setting value “0” is not assigned to the normal specification, and the power saving specification is It may be configured to be assigned to

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the volume setting value is increased or decreased by one each time the output value of 16 steps changes by one step. Although the range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the normal specification is 0 to 8, the range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the power saving specification is 1 to 7, but for example, 18 levels of output values can be taken As a result, the range of possible sound volume setting values of the normal specification and the power saving specification may be configured to be 0 to 8. That is, for example, an output value larger by one than the output value at which the volume setting value is "8" in the normal specification is assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for that output value is "8". An output value larger than the output value for which “1” is “1” may be assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for the output value may be set to “0”. However, this embodiment in which the sound volume setting values for the adjacent output values are different values is preferable because the boundary between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be easily distinguished by the change in the sound volume.

  The relationship between the output value and the volume setting value shown in FIG. 55 (b) is stored as a volume setting value table (not shown) in the ROM 272 of the effect control device 117, and the relationship from the volume adjustment switch 227 is stored. The output value (the output value from the rotary switch 227b) is referred to when converting into the volume setting value.

  FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (fifth embodiment). As shown in FIG. 56, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the block diagram of the first embodiment described above in that the rotary switch 227b of the volume adjustment switch 227 is connected to the input / output port of the effect control device 117. It differs from (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The RAM 273 according to the fifth embodiment has a rotary switch memory 273 m, a volume setting value memory 273 n, and a second power saving flag 273 o in addition to the configuration (273 a to 273 g; see FIG. 9) of the first embodiment. .

  The rotary switch memory 273 m is a memory for storing the output value from the rotary switch 227 b (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) to be described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  The volume setting value memory 273n is a value for storing a volume setting value corresponding to the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m (that is, the output value from the rotary switch 227b). The speaker device 226 emits a sound at a volume according to the value stored in the volume setting value memory 273 n (ie, the volume setting value set by the operation of the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the volume setting value memory 273n stores the volume setting value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) to be described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  The second power saving flag 273o is a flag that defines whether the specification is to save power during the customer waiting effect, that is, whether it is the power saving specification or the normal specification. If the second power saving mode flag 273o is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the power saving specification is set, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"). , Indicates that the normal specification is set. When the power is turned on, a value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time is set in the second power saving flag 273o. That is, when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 0 to 8, OFF is set, and when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 9 to F, ON is set. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) which will be described later, the stored content is updated according to the output value each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, how the operation of the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed between the normal specification and the power saving specification in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a list of operations in a normal specification or a power saving specification for main electric components provided in a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. As described above, since the normal specification and the power saving specification are specifications for power saving during the customer waiting effect, in FIG. 58, the electric components that can be operated during the customer waiting effect, that is, the light emitting means for the effect (LED 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346), the light emitting means (i.e., the notification LED 311) used for the notification purpose, and the operation of the third symbol display device 81 are listed.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the normal specification is set, all the listed electric components emit light with normal luminance. That is, when the normal specification is set, the light emitting means for effect and the notification LED 311 emit light with normal brightness, and in the third symbol display device 81, customer waiting effect is executed with normal brightness.

  On the other hand, when the power saving specification is set, in the third symbol display device 81, the customer waiting effect is executed with normal brightness, but all the light emitting means for effect is turned off. As a result, power can be saved compared to the normal specification as much as the light emitting means for effect is turned off. On the other hand, even when the power saving specification is set, the notification LED 311 is normally kept at the luminance. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to various errors during the waiting-to-wait effect, the errors can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, so that the errors can be eliminated quickly. Thus, it is possible for the player to quickly return to the game or to detect an illegal act early.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 to 63. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. In the present embodiment, in the launch control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), when the launch control device 112 is instructed to launch a ball, the effect control device 117 And a launch command indicating that a launch instruction has been issued. The start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the fifth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the fifth embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 as in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the main processing of the fifth embodiment, the volume setting processing (S5101) and the customer waiting rendering cancellation processing (S5102) are performed after the rendering mode setting processing (S1102). It differs from the main processing of the first embodiment shown.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the fifth embodiment, the power consumption setting processing and the rendering mode setting processing are executed as in the first embodiment described above (S1101 and S11202). Next, a volume setting process (S5101) and a customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) are executed, and thereafter, the processes of S1103 to S1112 are executed. Of the processing of S1103 to S1112, the processing content of the lamp output processing (S1241) executed in the sound lamp rendering processing (S1104) is the lamp output processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 25). And the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

  The volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment sets the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 according to the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b). The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. The customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) is a process for canceling the customer waiting effect accompanying the operation of a button such as the effect button 53, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described volume setting process (S5101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sound volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the volume setting process (S5101), first, the output value from the rotary switch 227b (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) is acquired (S5201), and the acquired output value and the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m And whether or not there is a change in the output value from the rotary switch 227b (S5202). At this time, if there is no change in the output value, that is, if the output value obtained in S5201 and the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273 m are the same (S5202: No), the volume setting process is ended. Return to main processing (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if there is a change in the output value, that is, if the output value obtained in S5201 is different from the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273 m (S5202: Yes), The process shifts to step S5203.

  In S5203, the output value acquired in S5201 is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m by overwriting (S5203). After the processing of S5203, the volume setting value corresponding to the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is stored in the volume setting value memory 273n. The volume setting value (that is, the volume setting value stored in volume setting value memory 273n) according to the value of rotary switch memory 273m is referred to the volume setting value table (not shown) provided in ROM 272. , Volume setting value converted from the value of the rotary switch memory 273 m.

  After the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (that is, 9 to F in hexadecimal notation) (S5205). At this time, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (S5205: Yes), the power saving specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227, so the second power saving flag 273o is set to ON (S5206). The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273 m is less than 9 (that is, 0 to 8) as a result of the determination in the process of S5205 (S5205: No), the normal specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227. The second power saving flag 273o is set to off (S5207), the volume setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the above-described customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S5102) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on (S5221). At this time, if the customer waiting effect flag 273e is off (S5221: No), since the customer waiting effect is not in progress, in such a case, the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the main process (FIG. 59) Return to

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5221, when the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect effect is being performed (S5221: Yes), the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, or It is determined whether or not various buttons provided on the pachinko machine 10, such as the power saving button 23, have been operated (S5222). At this time, if no button is operated (S5222: No), it is not a timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5222, when any button is operated (S5222: Yes), it is the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to OFF ( In step S5223, the processing for releasing the customer waiting effect is finished, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 59).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the lamp output processing (S1241) of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the lamp output processing (S1241) of the fifth embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag is on (S5251). As a result of the judgment in the processing of S5251, when the customer waiting effecting flag is off, that is, when the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S5251: No), the processing of S1251 to S1258 is the same as the first embodiment described above. Run.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5251, when the flag waiting for customer waiting effect is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is in progress (S5251: Yes), whether or not the second power saving flag 273o is on It is determined (S5252).

  If it is determined as a result of the processing in S5252 that the second power saving flag 273o is on (S5252: Yes), the power saving specification is set, so the process proceeds to S1258, and the first to third LED control devices 291 For ".about.293", turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp presentation process (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are set to be turned off, so the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 are light emitting means for effect. 346 will be turned off.

  On the other hand, if the second power saving flag 273o is off (S5252: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S5252, the normal specification is set, so the process proceeds to S1254, and the first to third LEDs In the control devices 291 to 293, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1254). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the normal brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, so the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 which are light emitting means for effect are set. ~ 346 is usually emitted with luminance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment. The command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is also for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, similarly to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment described above. This process is an interrupt process that is executed each time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to output a firing command to the effect control device 117 when instructing the firing control device 112 to launch a ball, as shown in FIG. The command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is different from the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment in that the process when receiving a launch command is included.

  Specifically, when the effect control device 117 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the customer waiting effect command, the start winning command, and the error command from the main control device 110, the command reception process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). (S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1411).

  Also in the command reception process of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), the fourth LED control device 294 responds to the received error command. The lighting pattern (that is, the lighting pattern according to the content of the error) and the light emission with the normal luminance are set (S1410, S1411). Therefore, when the error command is received during the customer waiting effect, the notification LED 311 can be lit at normal brightness regardless of whether it is the normal specification or the power saving specification. As a result, various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the errors can be quickly resolved to allow the player to quickly return to the game, or illegal. It becomes possible to detect an action early.

  Here, when the effect control device 117 receives a launch command from the main control device 110 (S5401: Yes), the customer waiting effect effect flag 273e is set to OFF (S5402). Therefore, when the player operates the operation handle 51 to cause the ball to be fired (that is, when the firing command is output from the main control device 110), the flag 273e during customer waiting effect is set to off. When the customer waiting effect is being executed, the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled.

  After the process of S5402, the process proceeds to S1405, and as in the first embodiment described above, if another command is to be received (S1405: Yes), the process according to the received command is executed ( S1411), end the command reception interrupt process. On the other hand, if the effect control device 117 has not received a launch command from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S5401 (S5401: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the 16 output values from the volume adjustment switch 227 are compared with a plurality of output values for each of the normal specification and the power saving specification (more specifically, By assigning 9 output values from 0 to 8 to the normal specification and 7 output values from 9 to F to the power saving specification, not only the normal specification but also a plurality of power saving specifications This volume setting value (more specifically, seven volume setting values from 1 to 7) can be set by the operation of the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, even in the power saving specification, it is possible to set a desired volume from among the seven levels of the volume by operating the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing power saving. Further, not only the power saving during the customer waiting effect by the power saving specification but also the power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, the power saving by reducing the volume) can be achieved.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. In the third and fourth embodiments described above, power saving is achieved by turning off the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) in the power saving mode, but in the sixth embodiment, the third symbol is used. The backlight of the display device 81 (LCD) is turned off, and the power supply to the image controller 274 is cut off (power is turned off) to save power. In the sixth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is changed to the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments described above, and an audio lamp control device 113 and a display control device 114. And.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is performed by the sound output in the speaker device 226, lighting and extinguishing in the various LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, lighting and extinguishing of the symbol display device 181 for power saving, and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 controls the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power supply unit 251 of the power supply device 115 performs the operation necessary for each of the control devices 110 to 114 and 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, etc. Supply voltage.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the configurations of the above-described audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the audio lamp control device 113 has an MPU 221, an input / output port 225, a bus line 224, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, and a movable body drive device 297. There is.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 225, the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the first to sixth LED control units 291 to 296, the movable body drive unit 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and effects The button 53 and the speaker device 226 are connected. Further, a power saving symbol display device 181 and an operation device 182 are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The operating member 182 is a device for moving the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R), and the rotational movement of the rotor of the motor such as a servomotor or stepping motor can be made linear motion. It has a rack and pinion mechanism to convert. In the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R, the rotational movement of the motor of the operating device 182 is converted into a linear movement by the rack and pinion mechanism, thereby moving in the left and right direction.

  The MPU 221 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 221 incorporates a ROM 222 storing control programs to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data and the like, and various circuits such as the RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The work RAM 233 has a fluctuation counter (not shown). The fluctuation time counter (not shown) is a counter that counts an elapsed time (variation elapsed time) from when the fluctuation effect is started when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This fluctuation time counter is a display effect process (see FIG. 79) executed every 20 milliseconds, and has an initial value corresponding to the fluctuation time extracted from the fluctuation pattern command for display immediately before the fluctuation effect is started. It is set (see S6606 in FIG. 79) and updated by subtracting 1 each time display effect processing is performed while variation effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see S6610 in FIG. 79) ). That is, the fluctuation time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the display effect process, the fluctuation effect data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter and the continuous notice effect data are read out from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233, as a flag (not shown), includes an effect permission flag (not shown) indicating whether the effect is permitted or not, a fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating whether to start fluctuation display, etc. Have. Note that the effect permission flag (not shown) is turned on when the effect permission command transmitted after the processing of the initial setting of the main control device 110 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S6411 in FIG. 77), and the power is off It is turned off by occurrence (not shown). Further, the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for display instructing a mode of fluctuation effects or continuous notice effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 77) When the variable display is started in the third symbol display device 81 (see S6412), it is turned off (see S6604 in FIG. 79).

  The image controller 236 is a video display processor (VDP) similar to the image controller 274 (see FIG. 7), and adjusts the timing of each of the character ROM 235, video RAM 234, and output port 238 based on internal commands received from the MPU 231. While reading and writing data, the data stored in the video RAM 234 is read at a predetermined timing, and a variable display image in units of frames is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (third symbol or decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. Data similar to that of the character ROM 275 (see FIG. 7) is stored in the character ROM 235 in the same format. The data for presentation compressed and stored in the character ROM 235 is read out and decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 236.

  Similar to the video RAM 276 (see FIG. 7), the video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state. The video RAM 234 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). The variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (fluctuation effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 236 according to time to generate a variable display image in frame units.

  FIG. 66 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the RAM 223 has a rendering mode counter 223b, a power saving flag 223h, a transition flag 223j, a closing start flag 223k, and a return waiting flag 223p.

  The effect mode counter 223 b is a counter for setting an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among three effect modes (general effect mode, advance notice effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 223b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 223b of this embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and the mode change button at an effective or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during customer waiting effects) Each time 22 is operated, it is incremented by one. Then, after reaching the value set as the maximum value ("2" in the present embodiment), the effect mode counter 223b is returned to zero.

  The power saving flag 223 h is a flag indicating which one of two types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode and power saving mode) is set as the power consumption mode. When the power saving mode flag 223 h is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, is set to the normal power consumption mode. The power saving mode flag 223 h is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is alternately switched on and off each time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The in-transition flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the state of the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. If the in-transition flag 223 j is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is in transition. On the other hand, when the flag 223j is set to off (ie, "0") during transition, the state of the shutter member 180 is not in transition, ie, the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. The transition flag 223j is set to ON when the closing or opening of the shutter member 180 is started by the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. When open, it is set to off. The during-transition flag 223 j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 223k is a flag indicating that the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state has started closing. When the closing start flag 223 k is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the open state has started closing. The closing start flag 223 k is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) when the power is turned on, and the player operates the power saving button 23 in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is off). Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when the closing of the shutter 180 is started, it is set to be off.

  The return standby flag 223p is a flag indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. When the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return. When the player operates the power saving button 23 in the power saving mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is on), the return standby flag 223 p is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) at power on. Set to on. Thereafter, when a return waiting time (25 seconds in the present embodiment) which is a predetermined wait time has elapsed, the return waiting flag 223p is set to off. Alternatively, in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is off), when the player operates the power saving button 23, the return standby flag 223 p is set to off.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, until the return standby time elapses). ) Is configured so that the power saving symbol display device 181 is not turned off. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power supply of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off in the power saving mode, so power saving can be suitably achieved. However, since the power supply of VDP is turned off, even if the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode and the power is turned on again to VDP, it takes time to start (return) of VDP. Therefore, there is a problem that the image can not be normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on again to the VDP until the VDP is started and returned. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is maintained on and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off during the return standby time. Therefore, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to the normal state, and the player can change the symbol display and stop symbols etc. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming invisible.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control apparatus 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the work RAM 233 has a rendering mode counter 233b, a customer waiting rendering in progress flag 233e, and a floating mode change flag 233g.

  The effect mode counter 233 b is a counter for setting the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among the three types of effect modes (general effect mode, advance effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 233b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 233b according to the present embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and an effect mode command (a command indicating an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22) from the audio lamp control device 113 Is received, the value of the effect mode command is set.

  The waiting for customer effect flag 233e is a flag indicating whether or not the waiting for customer effect is being performed by the third symbol display device 81. When the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"), the customer Indicates that no waiting effect has been made.

  After the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the customer waiting effect image (customer waiting effect) after the customer waiting effect flag 233e is received And set to on. Then, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF when the display control device 114 receives a customer waiting effect cancellation command from the sound lamp control device 113 or along with the start of the variable display. The voice lamp control device 113 displays a customer waiting effect cancellation command when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, or when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated. Output to That is, when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated, or when the variable display is started, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off. Ru. Note that the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The fluctuating mode change flag 233g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the fluctuating display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation. If the changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON (ie, "1"), the effect mode in the variable display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 233g is set to OFF (ie, "0") as an initial value at power-on, and then set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high speed change, and then the change display thereof Will be turned off when the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power consumption mode includes two modes: a normal consumption mode and a power saving mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than that of the normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electrical components according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, each electric component enumerated in FIG. 67 turns off the power supply of the image controller 236 (VDP) in the power saving mode when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. , And the third embodiment (see FIG. 41).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. However, in the present embodiment, in the firing control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the voice lamp control device is instructed when the firing control device 112 is instructed to shoot the ball. It is assumed that a launch command indicating that the launch instruction has been issued is output to 113.

  First, each process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer division activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a 2 ms cycle) There is an embedded process.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The start-up process is started when the power is turned on. When the start-up process is started, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S6001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S6122 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current start-up process (see FIG. 69). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S6002). As described later with reference to FIG. 69, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S6118 in FIG. 69), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S6122. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S6122 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S6002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power of S6122 is shut off. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S6006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S6003: Yes), the process proceeds to S6004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6007.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003: Yes), and the process moves to S6004.

  On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S6122 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S6003: No), and the process moves to S6007.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S6002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S6122. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S6004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S6004, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S6004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S6005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and RAM destruction check data is set (S6006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S6005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S6011), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the notification LED 311. Note that sound may be output from the speaker device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S6007, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S6007). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S6122 is performed (see S6121 in FIG. 69). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S6122 is performed, the process of S6007 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S6122 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S6007: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S6008), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6010). ).

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S6007 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, since the current startup processing was started after the power was completely shut off, S6004 through the processing of S6004 to S6006. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in this case (S6007: No), S6008 which is the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S6009, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6009).

  The reason for skipping S2008 clear processing is that when the processing from S6004 to S6006 is followed to the processing in S6007, all storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing in S6004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued. After the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S6009, the interrupt permission is set (S6010), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This main process is a process that is executed after the end of the above-described startup process (see FIG. 68) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main processing, first, power consumption mode setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S6101). The details of the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S6102). The details of the effect mode setting process (S6102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S6102), a customer waiting effect cancellation process is performed to cancel the customer waiting effect accompanying the button such as the effect button 53 being operated (S6103). The details of the customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the customer waiting effect releasing process (S6103), it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed (S6104) since the previous determination is performed (that is, the process of S6104 is performed last). If 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S6104: Yes), lamp output processing (S6105) is performed. The lamp output process (S6105) is a variety of LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like so as to be the lighting pattern edited in the process of S6109 described later. It is the processing which sets the output of ~ 323, 341-346). Although not shown, in the lamp output process (S6105) of the present embodiment, the same process as the lamp output process (see FIG. 47) of the third embodiment described above is executed.

  After the lamp output process (S6105) is executed, a power on notification process is executed (S6106). The power on notification process (S6106) is a notification to notify that the power is on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is on, and the notification includes the speaker device 226, a notification It is performed by light emitting means such as LED 311 or the like. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S6107 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

  In S6107, the effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S6107). In this effect button input monitoring / rendering process (S6107), in the same way as the effect button input monitoring / rendering process (S1242; see FIG. 42, FIG. 37) described above, the effect button 53 is used for the player to enhance the effect. This is processing for monitoring the input as to whether or not it has been operated, and setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the effect button 53 has been confirmed.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S6107), it is determined whether the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108). If it is determined in the processing of S6108 that the power saving flag 223h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6108: No), lamp editing processing is executed (S6109), The process shifts to step S6110. In the lamp editing process (S6109), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310 and 321 to 1) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6108, when the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are light emitting means to be controlled. Since the light sources 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, the setting of the lighting pattern for the light emitting means is not necessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S6109) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6110. In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S6109) is not executed when the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S6109) may be executed.

  At S6110, sound editing / output processing is executed (S6110). In the sound editing / output process (S6110), an output pattern or the like of the speaker device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After the sound editing / output processing (S6110), the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S6111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S6111), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S6109 and the sound editing / output process of S6110 are executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111).

  After execution of the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111), an effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S6112). In this movable object control process for effect (S6112), the operation pattern of the movable object for effect 631 corresponding to each effect is set to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable body drive device The output to 297 causes the effect movable body 631 to operate in the set operation pattern.

  After execution of the effect movable body control process (S6112), the power saving symbol display control process which is a process for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6113). The details of the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S6113), it is judged whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114). At this time, if the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114: Yes), the apparatus used as a display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) is switched to the power saving mode from the normal consumption mode. A power saving mode transition process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S6115). The details of the power saving mode transition process (S6115) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 223h is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6114 (S6114: No), the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode when the apparatus used as the display device for the stop symbol is switched A power saving mode release process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S6120). The details of the power saving mode canceling process (S6120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power saving mode transition processing (S6115) or the power saving mode cancellation processing (S6120), the decorative symbol variation display processing is executed (S6116). In the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command to set the effect aspect of the variation display (variation effect) in the third symbol display device 81 and instruct the set aspect to the display control device 114 (display variation pattern command , And a process for transmitting a display stop symbol command).

  After executing the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S6117). The details of the command determination process (S6117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S6117), it is determined whether or not generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 223 (S6118). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S6118 (S6118: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S6121), and the power-off process is executed (S6122). After execution of the power-off process (S6122), the power-off process flag is turned off (S6123), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process (S6122), the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and the output ports are turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), and 3 Turn off the output of the symbol display device 81. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S6118, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored (S6118: No), the keyword "55AAh" stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S6006 in the startup processing (see FIG. 68). Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6119). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S6119: No), the process returns to the process of S6101, and the above-described processes of S6101 to S6119 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6119 that the RAM 223 is to be destroyed (S6119: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the display effect process (S6505; see FIG. 78) is not executed by determining that the RAM is destroyed and the process is an infinite loop, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed thereafter. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), first, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S6201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S6201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation in the processing of S6201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S6201: Yes), it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6202). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223 j is on (S 6202: Yes), the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. , And ends the power consumption mode setting process, and returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is in operation, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-transition flag 223j is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6202 (S6202: No), the in-transition flag 223j is set to on (S6203). Next, it is determined whether the power saving flag 223h is on (S6204).

  If it is determined in the process of S6204 that the power saving flag 223h is off (S6204: No), the power saving flag 223h is set on (S6205), and the closing start flag 223k is set on (S6206). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to off (S6207), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in the process of S6204 is that the power saving flag 223h is on (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 223h is set to off (S6208). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to ON (S6209), and counting of the return waiting time is started (S6210).

  Next, a lighting restart command is output to the display control device 114 (S6211), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives this lighting restart command, it turns on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 and turns on the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP (power on again).

  As described above, according to the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the process of S6209 is executed, and the return standby flag 223p is set to ON. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, the recovery standby flag 223p set to ON in S6209 is maintained in the ON state in the period until the recovery standby time elapses, and in that period, the symbol display for power saving is displayed The display by the device 181 is continued. In the present embodiment, the recovery standby time is set as a time (for example, 25 seconds) sufficient for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal after the VDP (image controller 236) is turned on again. It is done. Thus, the player is switched between the power saving mode and the normal consumption mode, and after the lighting restart command is displayed on the display control device 114 in S6211, until the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal. However, it is possible to prevent that the display of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the stop symbol etc can not be visually recognized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the effect mode setting process (S6102) of the sixth embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing effect mode setting processing (S6102) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the effect mode setting process (S6102), first, it is checked whether the mode change button 22 is operated (S6221), and if the mode change button 22 is not operated (S6221: No), the effect mode setting process is ended, Return to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, when the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of confirmation in the processing of S 6221 (S 6221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is in progress (S 6222). At this time, if it is in the process of change (S6222: Yes), it is determined whether the process is in the high speed change (S6223).

  As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6223, if it is during high speed fluctuation (S6223: No), even if it is during fluctuation, it is not the time when the change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible. The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6223, if it is during high speed fluctuation (S6223: Yes), since it is time to change the rendering mode by the mode change button 22 during fluctuation, in this case, the fluctuation mode A change command is output to the display control device 114 (S6224). When the display control device 114 receives the during-fluctuation mode change command, the display control device 114 sets the during-fluctuation mode change flag 233g to on (see FIG. 77).

  After the processing of S6224, 1 is added to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (S6225). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect mode counter 223b exceeds 2 (S6226). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6226, when the value of the rendering mode counter 223b exceeds 2 (S6226: Yes), the rendering mode counter 223b is cleared to zero, the value is made zero (S6227), and the processing shifts to S6228 Do. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 223b is 2 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S6226, the process of S6227 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6228.

  At S6228, an effect mode command according to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (ie, indicating the value) is output to the display control device 114 (S6228). After the process of S6228, the effect mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives this effect mode command, the display control device 114 sets the effect mode counter 233b based on the effect mode command (see FIG. 77).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6222, if it is not in the process of variation (S6222: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6229). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6229: No), since it is a time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited, in such a case, the effect mode setting process is ended and the main process (see FIG. 69) Return to

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6226, if it is during the waiting for customer effect (S6226: Yes), since it is the time when it is possible (permitted) to change the effect mode, in such a case, the process S6225 Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the above-described customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing customer wait effect cancellation processing (S6103) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is in progress (S6241). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6241: No), the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the process of S6241, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6241: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, etc. It is determined whether or not various buttons have been operated (S6242). At this time, if no button is operated (S6242: No), it is not the timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect releasing process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6242, when any button is operated (S6242: Yes), it is the timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect release command is output to the display control device 114 (S6243). After the processing of S6243, the processing for releasing the customer waiting effect is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect cancellation command, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S6113), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6261). At this time, if the power saving flag 223h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S6261: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (S6262). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6262, if it is not a jackpot (S6262: No), it is discriminated whether or not it is in fluctuation (during symbol fluctuation display) (S6263). At this time, if it is not during the fluctuation (S6263: No), it is judged whether it is the start timing (the fluctuation start timing) of the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 (S6264).

  If it is the fluctuation | variation start timing as a result of determination by the process of S6264 (S6264: Yes), a process will transfer to S6265. In addition, as a result of the determination in the process of S6263, also in the case of being changed (S3403: Yes), the process is transferred to S6265.

  At S6265, it is determined whether it is a stop timing of the symbol (S6265). At this time, if it is not the stop timing of the symbol (S6265: No), since it is within the variation time of the symbol, the variation display by the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6266). That is, the segment patterns of the seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 are varied. After the processing of S6266, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3409, when it is the stop timing of the symbol (S3409: Yes), the symbol display device 181 for power saving is displayed for the stop symbol set based on the type command received from the main control device 110. It displays on (181a to 181c) (S6273). In this embodiment, the display pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command received from the main controller 110 (S6351; see FIG. 76), and the decorative symbol effect setting process (S6116; based on the display pattern of the extracted stop symbol). (Refer to FIG. 69). After the processing of S6273, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S6264, if it is not the fluctuation start timing (S6264: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the power saving symbol display control device is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69). In such a case, the stop symbol being displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S6272, if it is during the waiting for effect presentation (S6272: Yes), there is no need to display by the power saving symbol display device 181, and in such a case, the power saving symbol display device 181 Is turned off (S6270), the power saving symbol device display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). In the present embodiment, as a result of the determination in the process of S6272, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the stop symbol being displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is. When the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the processing may be shifted to S6270 (that is, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be turned off).

  If the result of the determination in the process of S6262 is that the jackpot is in progress (S6262: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S6271). In the power saving mode, when a big hit is generated, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the process of S6271, so that the player can recognize that the big hit is in progress by visually recognizing the blinking. It is possible to surely recognize, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electric component. After the processing of S6271, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6261, when the power saving flag 223h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6261: No), the recovery standby flag 223p is on. It is determined whether there is any (S6267).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6267, if the recovery standby flag 223p is on (S6267: Yes), the recovery standby time (25 seconds in the present embodiment) is after the recovery standby flag 223p is set to on. It is determined whether it has elapsed (S6268). At this time, if the return waiting time has not yet elapsed (S6268: No), the process proceeds to S6262. That is, after the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode), the symbol display device for power saving is performed until the return standby time elapses. The display by 181 is continued.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6267, when the recovery waiting time has elapsed (S6267: Yes), the recovery waiting flag 223p is set to off (S6269), and the power saving symbol display device 181 is extinguished (S6270). ). After the processing of S6270, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  Also, as a result of determination by the process of S6267, when the return standby flag 223p is off (S6267: No), after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the power saving symbol display device 181 is used. Since the period for continuing the display (that is, return waiting time) has already elapsed, the process moves to S6270.

  Next, the power saving mode shift process (S6115) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process (S6115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S6115), first, it is determined whether the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301). At this time, if the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301: Yes), it is the timing to start closing the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) based on the fact that the player operates the power saving button 23. In such a case, first, the closing start flag 223k is set to off (S6302).

  After the processing of S6302, the display area reduction command is output to the display control device 114 (S6303). The display area reduction command is a command instructing start of reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives this display area reduction command, the third display area reduction command 3 The image to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 is formed so as to be reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the reduced image is displayed in the display area 81a.

  Subsequently, closing of the shutter member 180 is set (S6304), and the process proceeds to S6305. When the process of S6304 is executed, the motor of the operating device 182 is controlled to move the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R in the closing direction. At this time, the operating device 182 sets the moving speed of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R (speed at which the shutter member 180 is closed) to the reduction speed of the display area 81a based on the display area reduction command output by the processing of S6303. Control the motor to fit. Thus, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction rate. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing start flag 223k is off (S6301: No), the process of S6302 to S6304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6305.

  In S6305, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6305). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223j is off (S6305: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The migration processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 223 j is on (S 6305: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 in transition to the closed state has reached a predetermined position (S 6305). S6306). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S6306: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, and the main process Return to (see FIG. 69).

  If the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position as a result of the determination in the process of S6306 (S6306: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 is stopping at the predetermined position (S6307).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6307, if it is not in stop (S6307: No), the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S6308), and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, if the process is stopped (S6307: Yes), the process of S6308 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6309.

  In S6309, it is determined whether or not it is in motion (during symbol display of symbols) (S6309). At this time, if it is not during fluctuation (S6309: No), it is judged whether or not fluctuation display of symbols has been started (S6310). At this time, if fluctuation display of symbols is not started (S6310: No), predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after closing of the shutter member 180 (or reduction of the display area 81a) is stopped by the processing of S6308. Is determined (S6311).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S6311, when the closing display of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the variable display of the symbol is not executed (that is, S6309: No and S6310: No), and the predetermined time has not passed. (S6311: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6311, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S6311: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S6312) Are output to the display control device 114 (S6313). When receiving the turn-off command, the display control unit 114 turns off the backlight of the third symbol display unit 81 and turns off the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP (turns off the power). After the process of S6313, the in-transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6314), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S6309 is that it is changing (S6309: Yes), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the symbol (S6315). Also, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6310, also when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started (S6310: Yes), the processing is shifted to S6315.

  As a result of determination by the processing of S6315, when it is the stop timing of the symbol (S6315: Yes), the processing is shifted to S6312. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the processing of S6312 (full closing of the shutter) is performed. On the other hand, if it is not the stop timing of a symbol as a result of determination by processing of S6315 (S6315: No), power saving mode shift processing is ended, and it returns to main processing (refer to Drawing 69).

  Next, the power saving mode release process (S6120) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode release processing (S6120) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode release process (S6120), first, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6321). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223j is off (S6321: No), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6321: Yes), it is determined whether the return standby flag 223p is on (S). At this time, if the return standby flag 223p is on (S6322: Yes), the period during which the third symbol display device 81 waits for normal return after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. In this case, the power saving mode release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6322, when the return standby flag 223p is off (S6322: No), the lighting restart command is output after the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode (ie, as shown in FIG. After the process of S6211 of 70 is executed), the return waiting time has elapsed, and the third symbol display device 81 has returned to the normal state. Therefore, in such a case, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S6323), the in-transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6324), the power saving mode release processing is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 69) is performed. Return. Therefore, according to the power saving mode cancellation processing, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. After returning to normal, the shutter member 180 is completely opened.

  Next, the aforementioned command determination process (S6117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S6117) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this command determination process (S6117), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and the main control It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the device 110 (S6341). At this time, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6341: No), the process proceeds to S6342.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the processing of S6341 (S6341: Yes), the variation pattern command reception flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set on. (S6349). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received from main controller 110, and is on (ie, "1") when the fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110. And set to off (that is, "0") when the display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S6350). Transfer to the processing of S6342. The fluctuation time extracted by the process of S6350 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223.

  When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is turned on by the process of S6349, fluctuation display (variation according to the fluctuation time extracted from the fluctuation pattern command by the process of S6350 in the decorative symbol fluctuation setting process (S6116; FIG. 69) The effect mode of the effect is set, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the set effect mode of the variable display is output to the display control device 114.

  In S6342, it is determined whether a type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6342). At this time, when the type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6342: No), the process proceeds to S6343.

  On the other hand, when the type command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the processing of S6342 (S6342: Yes), the display pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command (S6351), and the process proceeds to S6343. Do. The display pattern of the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6351 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223. Then, in the decorative symbol variation setting process (S6116; FIG. 69), the stop symbol is set based on the stop pattern of the stop symbol extracted from the type command, and the display stop symbol command corresponding to the set stop symbol is displayed control It is output to the device 114.

  In S6343, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6343). At this time, when the stop command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6343: No), the process proceeds to S6344.

  On the other hand, when the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S6343 (S6343: Yes), the stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S6352), and the process proceeds to S6344. .

  In S6344, it is determined whether a customer waiting rendering command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6344). At this time, when the customer waiting effect command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S 6344: No), the process proceeds to S 6345.

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the processing of S3344, when the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control unit 110 (S6344: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is outputted to the display control device 114 (S6353). Transfer to processing.

  In S6345, it is determined whether or not the start winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S6345). At this time, when the start winning combination command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6345: No), the process proceeds to S6346.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6345, when the start winning command is received (S6345: Yes), the start opening LED lighting control process for controlling the lighting of the start opening LED 347 is executed (S6354), and the process of S6346 Transition to In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the starting opening LED lighting control processing (S6354) of this embodiment, the process similar to the starting opening LED lighting control processing (refer FIG. 40) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above is performed.

  In the process of S6346, it is determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6346). If it is determined in the process of S6346 that no error command has been received (S6346: No), the process proceeds to S6347.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6346, when an error command is received (S6346: Yes), a lighting pattern according to the received error command is given to the fourth LED control unit 294 (that is, Lighting patterns are set and light emission based on normal luminance is set (S6355, S6356), and the process proceeds to the processing of S6347.

  In the process of S6347, it is determined whether a launch command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6347). At this time, when the launch command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6347: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6347, when a launch command is received (S6347: Yes), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6357). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6357: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6357, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6357: Yes), a customer waiting effect cancellation command is output to the display control device 114 (S6358), and the process proceeds to S6348. When the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect canceling command output in the process of S6358, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting in effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  In the process of S6348, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6348). At this time, if another command has not been received (S6348: No), the command determination process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6348 (S6348: Yes), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S6359), the command determination process is ended, and the main process (FIG. Return to 69). In addition, as processing (S6359) according to other commands, for example, when the pending number command is received from the main control device 110, the pending command is output to the display control device 114, and the like.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. The processes of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power on and an external interrupt process that is executed when a command is received.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt processing is executed in response to the reception of the command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether the received command is a rendering permission command (S6401). At this time, if the received command is not a rendering permission command (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6402.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the effect permission command (S6401: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6401, the effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S6401) ) And the process of S6402. The effect permission flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the initial setting of the main control device 110 is performed, and the effect permission command transmitted after the processing of the initial setting of the main control device 110 is an audio lamp control device It is set to on (i.e., "1") when it is received via 113, and is set to off (i.e., "0") upon occurrence of a power-off.

  In the process of S6402, it is determined whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S6402). At this time, if the received command is not the display variation pattern command (S6402: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the display variation pattern command (S6402: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6402 (S6402: Yes), the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set on ( S6412). Note that the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is a flag (not shown) indicating whether or not to start fluctuation display, and is turned on (ie, “1” when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113). When the variable display is started in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is set to off (that is, "0").

  Subsequently, the variation mode indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S6413), and the process proceeds to S6403. Although the fluctuation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception of the display fluctuation pattern command, this fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation mode extracted in the process of S6413.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not the received command is a display stop symbol command (S6403). At this time, if the received command is not the display stop symbol command (S6403: No), the process proceeds to S6404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the display stop symbol command (S6403: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is extracted (S6414), and the process proceeds to S6404. Do. The fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped at the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6414.

  In the process of S6404, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect command (S6404). At this time, if the received command is not the customer waiting effect command (S6404: No), the process proceeds to S6405.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the customer waiting effect command (S6404: Yes), the customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is set to ON (S6415), and the process of S6405 is performed. Transition to The customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, and is on (ie, “1”) when a customer waiting effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 When the customer waiting effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, it is set to off (that is, "0").

  In the process of S6405, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405). At this time, if the received command is not the customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405: No), the process proceeds to S6406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the customer waiting effect cancellation command as a result of the determination in the process of S6405 (S6405: Yes), the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off (S6416), and the process proceeds to S6406 .

  In the process of S6406, it is determined whether the received command is a turn-off command (S6406). At this time, if the received command is not the turn-off command (S6406: No), the process proceeds to S6407.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the turn-off command as a result of the determination in the process of S6406 (S6406: Yes), the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP is turned off (S6417) and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (Not shown) is turned off (S6418), and the process proceeds to the process of S6407. As described above, the turn-off command is a command output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the power supply of the image controller 236 is turned off and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 whose power consumption is lower than that of the third symbol display device 81 is started. Therefore, the power consumption can be suppressed (power saving) while the player can confirm the visual recognition of the stop symbol.

  In the process of S6407, it is determined whether the received command is a lighting restart command (S6407). At this time, if the received command is not the lighting restart command (S6407: No), the process proceeds to S6408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the lighting restart command (S6407: Yes), the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP is turned on (S6419), and the third symbol display device 81 is back A light (not shown) is turned on (S6420), and the process proceeds to the process of S6408. As described above, the lighting restart command is a command output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the image controller 236 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on again) and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. By relighting, the display by the third symbol display device 81 is restored.

  In the process of S6408, it is determined whether the received command is a fluctuating mode command (S6408). At this time, if the received command is not the fluctuating mode command (S6408: No), the process proceeds to S6409. On the other hand, if the received command is the in-fluctuating mode command (S6408: Yes), the in-fluctuating mode change flag 233g is set to ON (S6421), and the process proceeds to S6409.

  In the process of S6409, it is determined whether the received command is a rendering mode command (S6409). At this time, if the received command is not a rendering mode command (S6409: No), the process proceeds to S6410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the effect mode command (S6409: Yes), the effect mode indicated by the received effect mode command (general effect mode, preview effect mode, and feature effect effect). A value corresponding to the mode) is set in the effect mode counter 233b (S6422), and the process proceeds to S6410.

  In the process of S6410, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6410). At this time, when another command has not been received (S6410: No), the external interrupt processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6410 (S6410: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6423), and the external interrupt process is ended. In addition, as processing (S6423) according to other commands, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure-held ball number N indicated by the number-of-holds command is displayed as the third symbol Displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when displaying on the special drawing reserve number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d) displayed on the device 81 or when a display area reduction command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 The image to be reduced may be formed at a predetermined reduction rate, and the reduced image may be displayed in the display area 81a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, main processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  The main processing shown in FIG. 78 is processing to be activated when the power is turned on, and when activated, first, an initial setting processing associated with the power on is executed (S6501). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S6501), in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 235, and the video RAM 234 is displayed. Are stored in the predetermined area of the (S6502). Then, using the effect data, the initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6503).

  Next, it is checked whether the effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S6504). As a result of confirmation by the process of S6504, if the effect permission flag is off (S6504: No), since the effect permission command has not been received from the sound lamp control device 113 yet, in such a case, from the sound lamp control device 113 The process from S6505 is on standby until the effect permission command is received, that is, until the effect permission flag is turned on.

  As a result of confirmation by the process of S6504, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S6504: Yes), the third pattern display device (LCD) displays the moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect or the moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect ) The display effect process which is a process for displaying on 81) is executed (S6505). The details of the display effect process (S6505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the display effect process (S6505) is performed to execute the display effect process (S6505) every 20 milliseconds (20 ms) after the display effect process (S6505) is performed (S6506).

  As a result of confirmation by the process of S6506, if 20 ms has not passed yet (S6506: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more passes, and if 20 ms or more has passed (S6506: Yes) , Display effect processing (S6505) is executed. Thus, the display effect process (S6505) is repeatedly performed every 20 ms until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the above-described display effect process (S6505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing display effect processing (S6505) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 78) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S6505), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for a big hit (that is, whether it is a big hit) (S6601), If it is inside (S6601: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S6609). In this jackpot effect processing, effect data according to the jackpot effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276, thereby updating the jackpot effect image. After the end of the jackpot effect process (S6609), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, in the process of S6601, if it is not a big hit (S6601: No), it is determined whether the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fluctuation display of the third symbol (that is, whether it is in fluctuation). (S6602). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S6602: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S6603).

  If it is determined in the process of S6603 that the fluctuation start flag is on (S6603: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S6604), and the customer waiting effect flag 233e is turned off (S6605). Next, an initial value is set to a fluctuation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6606). In addition, the fluctuation time counter which is not shown in figure is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the fluctuation display of the 3rd symbol is started. The initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S6605 is determined according to the fluctuation mode indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command.

  After the process of S6606, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is larger than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S6607). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S6602, when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed (during fluctuation) (S6602: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S6610) and the processing of S6607 Then, it is judged whether or not it is within the fluctuation time.

  If it is within the fluctuation time (S6607: Yes), the fluctuation display processing is executed (S6608), the display effect processing (S6505) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 78). . The fluctuation display process (S6608) is a process for executing fluctuation display (that is, fluctuation effect) of a symbol (the third symbol), and although not shown, the fluctuation display process of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 27), it is comprised as a process which abbreviate | omitted S1303, S1304, S1306.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment by the processing of S6607, when the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S6607: No), the display stop symbol command received from the audio lamp control device 113 The stop symbol extracted from is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6612). After the process of S6612, the during-variation mode change flag 233g is turned off (S6613), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  Also, as a result of the judgment in the process of S6603, if the fluctuation start flag is off (S6603: No), each display process is executed (S6611), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the main process (FIG. 28) Return to In addition, each display process (S1275) is a process of executing display process such as a customer waiting effect to be executed when a predetermined time has not been played by the player for the pachinko machine 10, and the illustration is omitted. The same processing as each display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment described above is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the symbol display device 181 for power saving in the power saving mode. Is configured as. The seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol according to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to, and the player is the jackpot lottery There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern which is easy to determine the result of. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished and the stop symbol by the third symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and thereby the tempo of the game becomes worse, or If the deviation continues, it may cause inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery has been truly or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery is represented by a combination of numerals using the symbol display device for power saving 181 As configured as described above, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, and the power supply of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off. Power saving can be achieved. However, on the other hand, even if the VDP is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode and the VDP is turned on again due to the power supply of the VDP being turned off, it takes time to start (return) the VDP. A problem arises in that it is not possible to display the image properly on the symbol display device 81 immediately. To solve this problem, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is maintained on for the return standby time, and the symbol display for power saving is displayed. Since the device 181 is configured not to be turned off, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, and the player can change the symbol display or It is possible to prevent the display of a stop symbol or the like from becoming invisible. Therefore, by turning off the power supply of the VDP, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the interest is lost due to the power saving. As a result, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the first to fifth embodiments, one control device (i.e., the effect control device) controls audio output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LEDs and lamps) and controls the third symbol display device 81. However, the control of the sound output and the lighting of various light emitting means and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be performed by different control devices.

  For example, a control device (voice lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is connected to the main control device 110, and a control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is a voice lamp It may be configured to be connected to the control device, transmit each command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device, and to give a display instruction to the display control device from the audio lamp control device. Alternatively, the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (audio lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is displayed and controlled Connected to the device, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit, and the display control unit instructs the audio lamp control unit to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. It is also good. Also, the command may be transmitted directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit.

  In the sixth embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 controls sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LEDs and lamps) and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81. However, as in the first to fifth embodiments, one control device (that is, control of sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LED and lamp) and control of the third symbol display device 81) It may be configured to be performed by the effect control device 117). At this time, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the image controller 274 which is VDP is turned off. do it.

  Alternatively, the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (audio lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is displayed and controlled Connected to the device, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit, and the display control unit instructs the audio lamp control unit to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. It is also good. Also, the command may be transmitted directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit.

  In the first embodiment, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIG. 21) for updating the power saving counter 273a when the power saving button 23 is operated is one of the main processes (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117. However, the power consumption mode setting process may be performed in a timer interrupt process that is performed periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Similarly, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIGS. 36 and 46) according to the second to fourth embodiments may be executed during timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Good.

  In each of the above embodiments, the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117. However, the power saving button 23 is connected to the main control device 110, and the setting is read by the main control device 110. A setting command corresponding to the above may be output to the effect control device 117, and the power saving counter 273a or the power saving flag 273h may be set by the setting command. In such a case, the light emission (lighting or blinking) of the light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) controlled by the effect control device 117, the light emission controlled by the main control device 110 as well as the operation by the effect movable body 361 The power consumption of the light emission of the means and the operation of the effect movable body can also be changed according to the power consumption mode. For example, as in the first embodiment, the brightness of the special view holding lamp 37c, which is an LED, and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and the small power saving mode is set. When set, the brightness can be medium brightness, and when the large power saving mode is set, it can be zero (ie, turned off).

  When the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the first embodiment, a setting command corresponding to the value of the power saving counter 273a is output to the main control device 110, and the setting command is output. The value of the power saving counter similar to the power saving counter 273a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 may be set by the above. Similarly, when the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the second to fourth embodiments, a setting command corresponding to the state of the power saving flag 273 h is output to the main control device 110. The power saving flag similar to the power saving flag 273 h provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 may be set by the setting command.

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, the power consumption is saved by lowering (reducing) the luminance of the light emitting means (LED). However, power consumption may be reduced by thinning out the LEDs to be emitted. Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption may be reduced by thinning out the LEDs to be emitted. For example, when the small power saving mode is set, power saving can be achieved by alternately turning on each of the target LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346. It is also good. In this case, in each of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346, it is preferable to preferentially light the LEDs at both ends and the LEDs corresponding to the corner portions so that their shapes do not change as much as possible.

  Also, when flashing light emitting means such as LEDs as effects, by reducing the number of times of lighting or lighting time in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) as compared to the normal consumption mode (ie, turn off time) Power consumption may be saved by increasing the power consumption. Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of times of lighting or the lighting time as compared with the normal consumption mode. .

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, power consumption is saved by reducing the operation amount of the effect movable body 361. Power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of effect movable bodies 361 to be operated. Alternatively, in the power saving mode, all of the effect movable bodies 361 may not be operated (stopped). Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption can be saved by reducing the number of effect movable bodies 361 to be operated, or all of the effect movable Power consumption may be saved by not operating the body 361.

  In each of the above embodiments, power consumption is saved by reducing the luminance of the light emitting means (LED) or reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361. Power consumption may be saved by reducing the volume of the sound). In addition, power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of speaker devices 226 used for sound emission.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the feature effect mode can not be set when the large power saving mode is set. However, instead of or in addition to the feature effect mode, the advance effect mode can not be set. It is also good. Further, in the mode in which the power consumption is suppressed as compared with the normal consumption mode, only the general effect mode may be configured to be selectable.

  In the first embodiment, when the large power saving mode is set, the feature effect mode can not be set by the subsequent operation of the mode change button 22, but when the effect mode is the feature effect mode When the large power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23, the feature rendering mode set at that time is forcibly changed to another rendering mode (for example, a general rendering mode). It is also good. Alternatively, when the large power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23 when the effect mode is the feature effect mode, the player is informed that the current effect mode is the feature effect mode ( For example, it may be configured to display that effect on the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, in the first and fifth embodiments, the power consumption mode is configured of three types of the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, but the second to fourth and sixth embodiments and Similarly, the mode in which power consumption is suppressed as compared to the normal consumption mode may be only the power saving mode, and the power consumption mode may be configured from two types, the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode. Further, the power saving mode may be divided into three or more types of modes according to the degree of suppression of power consumption, and the power consumption mode may be configured from a normal power consumption mode and three or more types of power saving modes.

  In the second to fourth and sixth embodiments, the power consumption mode is configured of two types, the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode, but the power saving mode is a plurality of modes according to the degree of suppression of the power consumption. It may be divided into For example, as in the first embodiment, the power consumption mode may be configured of three types: a normal consumption mode, a small power saving mode, and a large power saving mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the notification LED 311 always has normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode, but in the case of light emitting means for notifying various notification events as in the notification LED 311, in the power saving mode May be configured to reduce the luminance according to the content. For example, when the notification LED 311 gives notification of the occurrence of an error, the normal brightness is always kept regardless of the power consumption mode, and when the notification LED 311 gives notification during payout, the brightness is lowered in the power saving mode. It is also good.

  In the first and second embodiments, the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is either the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). However, when the power saving mode is set, power saving may be achieved by narrowing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as compared with the normal consumption mode. For example, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, display is performed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, when the small power saving mode is set, the third symbol display device 81 is selected. For example, an area of 80% of the screen may be used to reduce the effect, and the remaining area (e.g., an area around the screen corresponding to 20% of the entire area) may be extinguished. On the other hand, when the large power saving mode is set, the effect is reduced and displayed using a smaller area (for example, 60% of the screen of the third symbol display device 81) than when the small power saving mode is set. The remaining area may be turned off. In addition, a shutter member which can be stopped at a position which is accommodated in the center frame 86 at normal times and which appears from the vertical direction at the time of effect and covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD is provided If so, an area of a predetermined size that can be covered by the shutter member in the third symbol display device 81 may be extinguished, and reduction display of effects may be performed in the remaining area.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is not changed. However, when the power saving mode is set, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to a moving image or a still image with less movement than the moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode. It may be configured to save power. In such a case, special effect data for the power saving mode may be provided, or effect data of a moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode may be thinned out and used.

  In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is not changed even if the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). In the configuration, when the power saving mode is set, three seven-segment LEDs corresponding to three symbol rows may be provided, and the variation display of symbols may be performed by these seven-segment LEDs. In addition, a shutter member which can be stopped at a position which is accommodated in the center frame 86 at normal times and which appears from the vertical direction at the time of effect and covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD is provided If so, three 7-segment LEDs may be provided on the front of the shutter member (the surface viewed by the player).

  In the first embodiment, the LED as the light emitting means is installed to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10), but for the power saving mode, A light emitting means (for example, an LED) may be provided with the irradiation direction directed in the direction along the surface of the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15 or the game board 13. The light emitting means whose radiation direction is directed in the direction along the surface of the game board 13 or the like can illuminate a wide range of area and thus can provide sufficient color even with a small number of light emitting means. The light emitting means for the power saving mode (i.e., the light emitting means whose irradiation direction is directed along the surface of the game board 13 or the like) is composed of main components (e.g. ) May be provided. Further, by providing the light emitting means for the power saving mode along the periphery of the game board 13, even in the power saving mode, sufficient color can be provided during the rendering. Further, by setting the irradiation direction of the light emitting means for the power saving mode to a direction along the arrangement direction of the LEDs used in the normal consumption mode (that is, the issuing means whose irradiation direction is irradiated toward the player), With a reduced number of light emitting means, it is possible to mimic a shape similar to that of the LEDs formed in normal consumption mode.

  In the first embodiment, for example, among the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) In the power saving mode, the brightness of the inner LEDs 301 to 304 is kept as normal and the brightness of the outer LEDs 305 to 310 is lowered or extinguished in the power saving mode. Good. That is, the luminance of the light emitting means closer to the game area (in this case, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304) is given priority as the normal luminance, and the light emission means on the side away from the game area (the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 in this case) It may be configured to decrease the brightness or to turn off the brightness. Since the player plays while watching the game area, the awareness of the light emitting means far from the game area is relatively thin. Therefore, even if the luminance of the peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, which are the light emitting means on the side away from the game area, is lowered or extinguished, the player is not particularly concerned about that and the possibility of the game may be reduced. Low. On the other hand, since the player is more aware of the light emission mode as the light emitting means is closer to the game area, when the luminance of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 which are light emitting means close to the game area is lowered, the player feels discomfort in the effect This is likely to reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, the brightness of the light emitting means closer to the game area is given priority as the normal brightness, and the brightness of the light emitting means away from the game area is lowered or extinguished, so that the player feels entertaining in the power saving mode. It is possible to suppress the decline.

  In the first embodiment, power saving is achieved by lowering the luminance of the light emitting means (LED). However, all the light emitting means for effect are turned off, and the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The light emission mode of the center frame 86 and the notification lamp 85 may be displayed in a pseudo manner.

  In the first embodiment, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361. However, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is operated without operating the effect movable body 361. Alternatively, a display imitating the effect movable body 361 may be made to appear, and the movement of the effect movable body 361 may be displayed in a pseudo manner by making the display appear.

  Further, in the first embodiment, power saving during the customer waiting effect is not considered, but even during the customer waiting effect, for example, as in the first embodiment, the light emitting means (LED) Power consumption may be saved by performing control such as lowering the brightness of the image. Alternatively, as in the second embodiment, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means may be displayed on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 during the customer waiting effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the power consumption mode is changed based on the operation (depression) of the power saving button 23 by the player. However, the employee of the hall operates the power saving button 23 for a specific operation (for example, 5 seconds) If the button is pressed, or if the power saving button is composed of a plurality of buttons, it is operated in a specific order of pressing, etc.) until a predetermined release operation (for example, power on / off etc.) is performed. The power consumption mode set in may be fixed. In addition, a dedicated switch or button that can fix the power consumption mode may be provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the effect control device 117).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the switch can be operated by only the hall employee instead of the player without providing the power saving button 23 It is also possible to provide a button or a button so that not the player but the employee of the hall can change the power consumption mode. In this case, for example, by providing a switch or button on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 such as the effect control device 117, only the employee of the hall can operate. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned switch or button to the effect control device 117, if it is also used as a volume operation unit for adjusting the volume of the speaker device 26, consumption can be achieved without additionally mounting the operation unit. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the power mode can be changed only by the employee.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the power saving button 23 is not provided, or in addition to providing the power saving button 23, the predetermined power saving button 23 is provided. The power consumption mode can be automatically switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode at a timing (for example, the start timing of customer waiting effect) or a timing that can be regarded as a predetermined timing (for example, a game start timing) Also, the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the detection of the winning of a predetermined winning opening, the operation of the operation handle 51, the detection of the mode change button 22 or the effect button 53). Good.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the player is provided with the power saving button 23 operable by the player. However, in addition to the power saving button 23, only the hall employee can operate. A switch or button may be provided, and the staff in the hall may operate the switch or button to change the state in which the player can switch between the power consumption modes and the state in which the player can not switch.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the player is not provided with the power saving button 23 or in addition to the power saving button 23. Instead of providing a switch or button that can be operated only by the employee of the hall, the employee of the hall operates this switch or button to obtain the above-mentioned predetermined timing (for example, winning or operation to a predetermined winning opening) It may be configured to be able to change between a state in which switching of the power consumption mode by detection of the operation of the handle 51, detection of the mode change button 22 and the effect button 53, etc. is permitted and a state not permitted.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control unit 110 sets a stop command instructing the end of the fluctuation display of the third symbol at the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first symbol and outputs it to the effect control device 117, Although the effect control device 117 is configured to end the fluctuation display of the third symbol based on the reception of the stop command, the effect control device 117 uses the fluctuation time counter (not shown) to display the third symbol It is good also as composition which manages an execution period of change display of the 3rd pattern by measuring change time.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the value of the special figure holding ball number N (that is, the number of holding times for winning to the first ball entrance 64) is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display control device 81 (the special figure holding number display section 87 However, it is also possible to provide a special view holding lamp which is an LED controlled by the effect control device 117, and to turn on a number of LEDs according to the value of the special view holding ball number N. In addition, special figure reservation number indicatory department 87 indicates the value of special figure reservation sphere number N with the number, or the aspect which differs the territory divided into 4 by the number of times of retention (for example, color and lighting It may be displayed as a pattern). In addition, the number of suspension of winnings to the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, it is also possible not to display the special figure holding number display section 87 or the special figure holding lamp.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the winning to the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times is limited to 4 times. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of times of suspension of variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64 is different by a number or number of areas divided by four even in part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of times of suspension A light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and the number of reservations is notified by the light emitting member. You may.

  In the second embodiment, the fourth image layer on which the pseudo image is formed is superimposed on the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying variations and effects of the symbol. Although the display unit 81 is configured to display, the display contents (variation of the symbol, effects, etc.) formed on the first to third image layers can be displayed inside the display area of each of the display portions 441 to 445. It may be reduced.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the fifth image layer on which the pseudo image (pseudo image 451) is formed is superimposed on the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying the variation and effects of the design. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be displayed, but dedicated variable display data and effect data including a pseudo image are prepared, and the pseudo image is displayed on any of the first to third image layers. By forming an image including an image, the pseudo image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using the fifth image layer.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure reserve number display unit 87 causes the special image reserve number display unit 87 to be displayed at a position not overlapping the display units 441 to 445, thereby displaying the pseudo image. Although the display position of is not changed, the display position of the number-of-special-views reserve display portion 87 may be changed when displaying the pseudo image.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, although each display part 441-445 was arrange | positioned so that the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may be enclosed in 1 row, the display part which can display a pseudo image is 2 It may be arranged side by side in columns or more.

  In the second embodiment, the pseudo decoration lamp display 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, and the pseudo side lamp display 442 is a pseudo corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345. Among the LEDs that are turned off in the power saving mode, such as the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, there are also LEDs that do not consider pseudo images (alternative images), which are areas for displaying images. Instead of this, the displayed pseudo image such as the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 or the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 may be displayed in a display mode in consideration of all the LEDs turned off in the power saving mode.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the shutter member 180 is exposed from the left side of the opening 86 a of the center frame 86 to cover the left side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 and Although the right shutter member 180R appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81, the shutter member 180 is formed of the opening 86a of the center frame 86. It may be composed of two shutter members that emerge from the upper side and the lower side, respectively. Alternatively, the shutter member may be a single shutter member emerging from one side of the opening 86 a of the center frame 86.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180 used exclusively in the power saving mode. When a member is provided, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be arranged on the shutter member for effect. In addition, the shutter member 180 provided with the symbol display device 181 for power saving may be a shutter member exclusively used in the power saving mode, and a shutter member for effect may be provided on the front side or the back side.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180, and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode and is exposed only in the power saving mode. However, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be disposed at a position where it can be constantly exposed on the game board 13. Also in the case of adopting such a configuration, in the power saving mode, a shutter member such as the shutter member 180 may be provided to cover the extinguished third symbol display device 81.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180, and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode and is exposed only in the power saving mode. However, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed at a predetermined position (for example, a predetermined position near the operation handle 51) on the front side of the front frame 14 (the side viewed by the player when playing a game). It may be set up. In such a case, in the normal consumption mode, a seven-segment LED that performs other functions such as a rendering function may be diverted as the symbol display device 181 for power saving.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is continued with the shutter member 180 in the closed state until the return standby time elapses. In the configuration, when the game board 13 or the front frame 14 is provided with a 7-segment LED provided so as to be always visible, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the wait for the return standby time is waited Instead, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be turned off, and the shutter member 180 may be opened to perform display using a 7-segment LED provided on the game board 13 or the front frame 14 so as to be always visible. .

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is configured of three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c arranged in the vertical direction, but when the variable display of symbols is vertical scroll Alternatively, three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c may be arranged in the left-right direction. Further, nine seven-segment LEDs may be provided in three rows and three stages.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are respectively provided with the notches 180La and 180Ra. However, the notches such as the notches 180La and 180Ra are left and right shutters. It is sufficient if at least one of the members 180L and 180R is provided.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the notches 180La and 180Ra are provided at the end of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R in the closing movement direction, but the third symbol display device The position at which the notch is provided is not particularly limited as long as the screen 81 can be viewed. Further, the notch may be formed by notching the end portions of the shutter members 180L and 180R like the notch portions 180La and 180Ra, or may be notched as holes in the shutter members 180L and 180R. May be Further, the number of notches is not particularly limited, and, for example, four holes may be formed as notches in the vicinity of the four corners of the opening 86a.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) is executed every 20 ms in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117. As in the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), the process may be performed every 1 ms.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are set to middle brightness and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are turned off in the power saving mode, but the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and The luminance of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 may be smaller than that of the normal consumption mode, and the luminance of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 may be larger than the luminance of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310.

  In the fourth embodiment, the power saving symbol display device 181 starts to be used at the timing when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size, but the power saving symbol display device 181 is used The timing to start is not particularly limited as long as it is a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by the power saving button 23 being operated.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the area 81b outside the display area 81a is expanded as an area lit in a predetermined color. did. Instead of this, the third symbol display device 81 is not an LCD but an electroluminescent display (hereinafter referred to as "ELD"), and the display region 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced and a display region The area 81b outside the area 81a may be enlarged as the extinguished area. The ELD may be an organic ELD or an inorganic ELD. Since the area 81 b is an extinguished area, power consumption can be further suppressed.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power, while the image controller (VDP) is used. By configuring so that the power supply to 274 is not cut off, when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode thereafter, it is possible to return to the display state in the third symbol display device 81 early. did. Instead, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power supply to the image controller (VDP) 274 is also cut off (turned off). ) To further save power. In this case, it is preferable to switch from the symbol display device for power saving 181 to the third symbol display device 81 after waiting for the display state of the third symbol display device 81 to be normally operated. .

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device for power saving 181, but it is transparent when not emitting light. A light guide plate display device on top of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that information such as "during power saving" is fixedly displayed on the light guide plate display device during customer waiting effects It may be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a lateral direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the main control unit 110 is configured to output a firing command indicating that a ball is to be fired (a firing instruction for the ball has been issued) from the main control unit 110 to the effect control unit 117. When the operation handle 51 is operated for emission, a signal is output from the operation handle 51 to the effect control device 117, and the effect control device 117 recognizes that the ball is emitted by this signal. It is good also as composition. Alternatively, the emission control device 112 outputs to the effect control device 117 a signal or command indicating that the control for emitting the ball has been performed, and the effect control device 117 causes the ball to be emitted by this signal or command. It may be configured to be recognized.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the power saving mode in the game can be set by the power saving button 23 which can be operated by the player, and the customer waiting effect is produced by the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to switch the specification of power saving (presence or absence of power saving) in the middle. Instead of this, the volume adjustment switch 227 may be configured to be able to set not only the specification of power saving during the customer waiting effect but also the power consumption mode during the game. That is, the power consumption mode may be set by the volume adjustment switch 227, and the specification of power saving during the waiting for customer effect may be determined according to the set power consumption mode. For example, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) is divided into three, and each is assigned to the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, and included in the normal consumption mode by the volume adjustment switch 227 When an output value to be set is set, power saving is not performed during the customer waiting effect, while when an output value included in the small power saving mode or the large power saving mode is set, Configure to save power. As described above, in the case where the power consumption mode in the game can be set by both the power saving button 23 and the volume adjustment switch 227, the setting by the power saving button 23 or the volume adjustment switch 227 may be prioritized. .

  Alternatively, the player can omit the power saving button 23 which can be operated, and the power adjustment mode during the game is provided by the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and operated by an employee of the hall instead of the player. Alternatively, it may be configured to set both the specification of power saving during the customer waiting effect.

  In the fifth embodiment, switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification is performed using the volume adjustment switch 227 which is an operation element for adjusting the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226. However, switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification is performed using a switch for adjusting the luminance of various light emitting means such as an LED or a switch for adjusting the operation amount of a movable body for presentation (for example, the movable body for presentation 361). It may be a configuration to be performed. Also in this case, only by operating 1 switch (a switch for adjusting the luminance of the light emitting means, a switch for adjusting the operation amount of the movable body for effect, etc.), the luminance of the light emitting means and the operation of the movable body for effect Both the adjustment of the amount and the like and the switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be performed, and the player can play a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing the power saving as in the fifth embodiment. Can be provided.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, when it switches to the power-saving specification, the structure which light-extinguishes the light emission means (LED301-310, 321-323, 341-346) for presentation with the start of customer waiting production. However, it may be configured to wait for the light emitting means for effecting to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, until one demonstration display in the customer waiting effect ends) after the customer waiting effect is started. When the light emitting means is turned off with the start of the customer waiting effect, there is a possibility that the dark atmosphere is rapidly given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a sudden dark atmosphere.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitting unit (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) for effect is turned off during the customer waiting effect when the power saving specification is switched to the power saving specification. In addition to this, the luminance of the third symbol display device 81 may be reduced to a value of zero or more during the customer waiting effect.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the output value from the volume control switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) to be rotationally operated is divided into two, and each is allocated to the normal specification and the power saving specification. Instead of the switch 227 (rotary switch 227 b), a slider type switch capable of outputting a plurality of output values may be used. Alternatively, using a push-on type rotary encoder provided with a push button in the operation knob portion, assuming that the output value when operated without pressing the push button is the output value of the normal specification and operated while pressing the push button The output value of may be set as the output value of the power saving specification.

  In the sixth embodiment, the display control device 114 turns on the power of the image controller 236, which is a VDP, when receiving the lighting restart command, and lights the backlight of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to perform both of That is, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the image controller 236 is turned on and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on by the command 1 (lighting restart command). Both are configured to be executed. Instead, the display control device 114 only turns on the power of the image controller 236, which is VDP, when the lighting resumption command is received, and the voice lamp control device 113 takes another command after the recovery waiting time has elapsed. The display control device 114 may be configured to turn on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 when the command is received. The lighting of the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 can be delayed, and power consumption can be reduced accordingly.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 in a closed state until return waiting time passes, but it changes to this or In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal. The fluctuation display data of fluctuation time (for example, fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more) in consideration of time required for (for example, 20 seconds) may be forcibly selected. By adopting this configuration, before the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, the variable display (and the effect included in the variable display) of the symbol is finished, and the player can display the symbol It is not possible to enjoy the variable display and presentation of the game, and it is possible to suppress lowering the interest of the game. The fluctuation display data of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) in consideration of the time required for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal may be stored in the character ROM 235 as dedicated data.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 in a closed state until return waiting time passes, but it changes to this or In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display should be performed at the timing when the fluctuation display is stopped. The stop symbol may be cut in and displayed. When the power is turned on again to the image controller 236, the timing at which the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal is not constant, so it is difficult to slow down the fluctuation speed of the symbol and stop it at an appropriate position. However, by adopting the above configuration, the symbol can be stopped at an appropriate position at an appropriate timing by easy control.

  In the sixth embodiment, although the third symbol display device 81 is an LCD, the third symbol display device 81 may be an ELD, and in such a case, not only the ELD is turned off, but also an image that is VDP. Further power saving may be achieved by turning off (off) the power supply to the controller 274 as well.

  Further, the configurations of the first to sixth embodiments and the respective modifications can be combined as appropriate. For example, in the above-described third and fourth embodiments, even in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a configuration in which the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 have middle brightness and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are extinguished in the power saving mode. Good.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as V zone. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an allearch or a ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area after the jackpot symbol is displayed. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of the gaming machine of the present invention and various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts A game machine A1 comprising: power saving means for reducing the power to be used for an electrical component other than a specific one of the plurality of electrical components at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the power saving unit reduces the power used for the electrical components excluding the specific electrical components at a predetermined timing, it is possible to suppress the power consumption (power saving). In addition, since certain electric parts are excluded from the target of power saving, it is possible to save the power by excluding electric parts that may cause an inappropriate situation due to the power saving, thereby making it possible for the player to play a suitable game. Can be provided.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the gaming machine A1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117, the movable object control process for effect ((1) S1107) is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine A1, S1257 and S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment and the starting aperture LED lighting control of the first embodiment S1345 and S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 30) are illustrated.

  The gaming machine A1 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means reduces the power used for the electric parts other than the specific electric parts at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine A2 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine A2.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the power saving unit is configured to reduce the luminance of at least a part of the electrical components other than the specific electrical component to reduce the electrical components other than the specific electrical component. A game machine A3 characterized by reducing power consumption.

  According to the gaming machine A3, since the power is reduced (i.e., power saving is intended) due to the decrease in the brightness of the electric parts, the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by lowering the luminance of the electric component, the player can realize that power is saved even by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the power saving means removes the specific electrical component by thinning out and emitting light of at least a part of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A4 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the power saving is achieved by thinning out the electric parts to emit light, so that the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by thinning out the electric parts and emitting light, the player can realize that power is saved even by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the power saving means excludes the specific electrical component by reducing the number of light emissions of at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A5 characterized by reducing power used for electrical components.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electric component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A5, the power saving means removes the specific electrical component by reducing the operation amount of at least a part of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A6 characterized by reducing the power used for the electric parts.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the operation amount of the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the operation amount of the electrical component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the power saving means removes the specific electric component by operating at least a part of the electric components except the specific electric component. A game machine A7 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A7, power saving is achieved by thinning and operating the electric components. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by thinning and operating the electric parts, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the electricity saving means excludes the specific electric component by not operating the electric component operated by electric power among the electric components excluding the specific electric component. A game machine A8 characterized by reducing power used for parts.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the power saving is achieved by not operating the electric parts operated by the power, so that the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by not operating the electric component operated by the power, the player can also realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the power saving unit reduces the volume of the sound emitted from at least a part of the electric components excluding the specific electric component, thereby reducing the specific power. A game machine A9 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical components excluding the electrical components.

  According to the gaming machine A9, power saving is achieved by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electrical component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A9, the power saving means removes the specific electric component by thinning out the electric component that emits a sound by electric power among the electric components excluding the specific electric component. A game machine A10 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A10, power saving is achieved by thinning out electric components that emit sound by power. Since the sound emitted is reduced by thinning out the electric parts emitting the sound by the power, and the sound image localization changes and the atmosphere of the effect is switched, the player saves power by the switching. You can feel the

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a rendering mode setting unit configured to set one rendering mode out of a plurality of rendering modes, the rendering execution unit including the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting unit The effect corresponding to the gaming state is executed, and the power saving means includes mode setting control means for preventing the predetermined effect mode from being set by the effect mode setting means among the plurality of effect modes. The power saving unit is configured to cause the mode setting control unit not to set a predetermined effect mode by the effect mode setting unit, thereby reducing the power used for the electric component other than the specific electric component. A game machine A11 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A11, power saving is achieved by not setting a predetermined rendering mode, so that power saving is effectively achieved by not setting a rendering mode that uses a large amount of power (that is, a large amount of power consumption). be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the effect mode setting process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) is exemplified as the effect mode setting device of the game machine A11, and the first embodiment is the mode setting control device of the game machine A11. Steps S1232 and S1233 executed in the effect mode counter updating process (see FIG. 23) of the embodiment are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, it is possible to pass the game medium to the predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means for performing the lottery when the starting condition is satisfied and the lottery means By setting the special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state, and the specific electric component is provided at a position where the predetermined part can be suggested A game machine A12 which is a component and is an electric component which emits light or is operated in a predetermined pattern when a special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the specific electric component excluded from the power saving target is an electric component capable of suggesting a part that provides the player with an advantageous state in the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is generated. In this case, it is an electrical component that emits or operates in a predetermined pattern. By making such electric parts out of the target of power saving, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the special gaming state is in progress, and the player feels pleasure or enjoyment that the special gaming state is in progress. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine A12, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine A12, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, it is possible to pass the game medium to the predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means for performing the lottery when the starting condition is satisfied and the lottery means By setting a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state, and the specific electric component reports the result selected by the lottery means to the player A game machine A13 characterized by being an electric component for causing

  According to the gaming machine A13, the specific electric component which is not the target of the power saving is the electric component for notifying the player of the result selected by the lottery means. By excluding such electric parts from power saving targets, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery. .

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine A13, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine A13, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  A game machine A14 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A13, wherein the specific electric part is an electric part for reporting an error that has occurred in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A14, a specific electrical component that is not targeted for power saving is regarded as an electrical component for reporting an error. By excluding such electric parts from power saving targets, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the employee of the hall of various errors that occur in the gaming machine. Can quickly return to the game.

  The game machine A15 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A14, wherein the specific electric component is an electric component for displaying a moving image constituting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine A15, the specific electric component which is not the target of the power saving is the electric component for displaying the moving image which constitutes the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. The moving image constituting the effect to be executed by the effect executing means can cause the player to most effectively recognize the effect. Therefore, by excluding the electric parts for displaying the moving image from the power saving target, Even if the power used for some of the electrical components is reduced, the fun of the effect can be maintained.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the power saving unit is provided with a notification unit for notifying that effect when the electric power used for the electric components excluding the specific electric component is reduced by the power saving unit. A game machine A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, when the power saving unit reduces the power used for the electric component excluding the specific electric component, the notification unit notifies that effect, so that the player is saving power. Can make you realize.

  A gaming machine A17 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine A18 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine A19 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts Power saving means for reducing the power used for a predetermined one of the plurality of electric components at a predetermined timing, and the plurality of electric components are used for effect performed by the effect executing means A first electric component having a display screen capable of displaying a moving image or a still image, and a second electric component which is an electric component different from the first electric component and which is the predetermined electric component The power saving means includes a power reduction means for reducing the power used for the second electrical component, and the second electrical component for which the power used is reduced by the power reduction means. And an alternative image display means for displaying an alternative image as a substitute for the game member on the display screen of the first electric component together with a moving image or a still image for effect in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the game member A game machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the substitute image to be substituted for the gaming member having the second electric component in which the power used is reduced by the power reduction means is displayed by the alternative image display means according to the effect by the effect execution means The information is displayed on the first electric component together with the moving image or the still image for effect in an aspect, so that information (regarding information concerning expectation and changes in the gaming state) that the player can enjoy along with the reduction of the power used It is possible to suppress the reduction of information) and the reduction of visual effects (for example, the reduction of rendering effects). At this time, since the first electrical component for displaying a moving image or a still image for effect is used as an electrical component for displaying a substitute image, the power reduction means for the power used for the second electrical component is used. As a result, power consumption can be reduced (power saving) by the amount of reduction. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  Note that "the operation of the second electric component" in the gaming machine B1 is intended to include various operations such as light emission, movement or rotation in a predetermined direction, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the game machine B1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the effect control device 117, and the movable object control process for effect (S1107) Is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first electric component of the game machine B1, and the LEDs 341 to 348 and the movable body for effect are exemplified as the second electric component of the game machine B1. 361 is illustrated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the game machine B1, S2253, S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 38) of the second embodiment and the starting aperture LED lighting control of the second embodiment. S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 40) and the pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39) are exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, S2253 and S1258 executed in the lamp output processing (see FIG. 38) of the second embodiment and the starting aperture LED of the second embodiment are used as means for reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine B1. S1346 executed in the lighting control process (see FIG. 40) is exemplified, and a pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39) is exemplified as the substitute image display means of the gaming machine B1.

  In the gaming machine B1, the alternative image display means operates the alternative image as a substitute image for replacing the gaming member having the second electric component whose power consumption is reduced by the power consumption reduction means as the alternative image. It is displayed on the said display screen in the display mode which imitated, The game machine B2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the substitute image for replacing the gaming member having the second electric component driven and operated by the electric power is displayed on the display screen in a display mode imitating the operation by the substitute image display means (first Is displayed on the display screen of the electric component), it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction of visual effects such as the rendering effect accompanying the reduction of the power used for the second electric component.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, the substitute image display means displays the substitute image on an outer peripheral side of a visual recognition area visible to a player on a display screen of the first electric component. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, since the substitute image is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area visible to the player on the display screen of the first electric component, the effect displayed on the display screen of the first electric component It is possible to prevent the visibility of a moving image or a still image from being degraded by the display of a substitute image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of various inconveniences such as a decrease in visual effect (for example, a decrease in the effect of rendering) due to a decrease in the visibility of the moving image or the still image for effect.

  In the gaming machine B3, the substitute image display means is the second electric component whose power consumption is reduced by the use power reduction means, and is disposed around the display screen of the first electric component. Displaying a substitute image as a substitute for the game member having the second electric component driven by the electric power and emitting light as the substitute image at a position according to the arrangement of the game components to be the target of the substitute image A game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in the alternative image displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen (the display screen of the first electric component) by the alternative image display means, the power used is reduced by the power consumption reduction means A second electric component, an alternative image as a substitute for a game member having a second electric component disposed around the display screen and illuminated by electric power, the game serving as a target of the substitute image It is displayed at the position according to the arrangement of the members. Therefore, since the visual effect (for example, the rendering effect) by the light emission of the second electric component included in the game member targeted for the alternative image can be effectively simulated by the alternative image, the power used for the second electric component Can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second electric component disposed around the display screen of the first electric component emits light in a light emission mode according to the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. Feature game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the second electric component emits light in the light emission mode according to the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the second electric component arranged around the display screen of the first electric component An alternative image as a substitute for a game member having an electrical component is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen by the alternative image display means in an arrangement according to the arrangement of the game members targeted for the alternative image. Therefore, it is possible to effectively simulate the effect by the light emission of the second electric component included in the game member as the target of the alternative image by the alternative image, and it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a special result that is more advantageous for the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means. A special game state generation means for generating a game state, and the second electric component emits light during a special game state period generated by the special game state generation means Machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the substitute image for the gaming member having the second electric component emitting light during the special gaming state period generated by the special gaming state generation means is the display screen of the first electric component Displayed to the player, even if the power used for the second electric component is reduced by the power reduction means, it is ensured to the player that the player is in the special gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state. Can be transmitted to Therefore, since the player can enjoy the pleasure and enjoyment of being in the special gaming state without changing before and after the power saving by the power saving means, it is possible to prevent lowering the interest of the game by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine B6, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. In the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B6, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a special result that is more advantageous for the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means. A game machine B7, comprising: special game state generation means for generating a game state, wherein the second electric component emits light when the start condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B7, since the substitute image to be used as a substitute for the gaming member having the second electric component that emits light when the start condition is satisfied is displayed on the display screen of the first electric component, the second image Even if the power used for the electric component of the above is reduced by the power reduction means, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player enjoys the expectation that the predetermined result (the special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means) may be selected by the lottery by the lottery means before and after the power saving by the power saving means. Since it is possible to save the interest of the game by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine B7, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. In the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B7, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B7, the alternative image display means is the second electric component included in the game member corresponding to the alternative image, the alternative image being driven by electric power in a predetermined direction A game machine B8 characterized by displaying on the display screen as a moving image of movement according to movement of a moving or rotating game member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the moving image of the movement according to the movement of the gaming member driven by the power and moving or rotating in the predetermined direction is displayed as the substitute image by the substitute image display means. Therefore, since the feature of the operation of the game member can be suitably represented by the substitute image, it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction of the visual effect (for example, the rendering effect) accompanying the reduction of the power used for the second electric component. it can.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the alternative image display means is formed as an image layer different from an image layer including the alternative image, and an image layer including the moving image or still image for effect. And display control means for displaying an image layer including the alternative image formed by the alternative image layer forming means on an image layer including the moving image or still image for presentation. A game machine B9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the alternative image is displayed by superimposing the image layer including the alternative image formed by the alternative image layer forming means and the image layer including the moving image or the still image for presentation by the display control means By doing this, it is displayed on the display screen of the first electric component. Therefore, for example, in order to display the substitute image on the outer peripheral side of the display screen of the first electric component, there is no need to reduce the moving image or the still image for presentation, and the control load increases with the increase of the substitute image. It can be suitably suppressed. In addition, it is not necessary to separately prepare an image for presentation (moving image, still image) including a substitute image from an image for presentation used when power saving is not performed by the power saving means, and the consumption of storage capacity is suppressed. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the display device has notification image display means for displaying a notification image for notifying predetermined information at a position not overlapping the substitute image on the display screen of the first electric component. Game machine B10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B10, the substitute image is displayed by the substitute image display means at a position where the notification image for notifying the predetermined information does not overlap with the substitute image on the display screen of the first electric component. Therefore, control of the notification image can be diverted regardless of whether or not power saving is performed, visibility of necessary information (predetermined information) can be secured, and predetermined information indicated by the notification image can be used. It can be reliably transmitted to the player.

  The "predetermined information" in the gaming machine B10 is intended to include, for example, the value of the special figure holding ball number N, the stop symbol, and the notice character display.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B10, an operation means operable by the player is provided, and the power saving means reduces the power used for the predetermined electric component at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine B11 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B11, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine B11.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the alternative image display means displays the alternative image on the display screen in correspondence with the arrangement position of the game member based on the first electric component. A game machine B12 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B12, the substitute image is displayed on the display screen in correspondence with the arrangement position of the gaming member based on the first electric component, so that the correspondence relationship between the gaming member and the substitute image is a player However, the player can surely obtain the information given from the second electrical component from the substitute image.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the gaming member moves so as to overlap the display screen of the first electric component, and the substitute image display means sets the substitute image on the display screen. A game machine B13 displaying on the display screen as a moving image representing the game members moving so as to overlap.

  According to the gaming machine B13, the power saving effect can be enhanced by not operating the gaming member, and the amount of information regarding the feeling of expectation given by the operation of the gaming member is not reduced, and the visual effect as a presentation is not reduced. .

  In any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, a gaming machine B14 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, a gaming machine B15 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine B16 according to any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  Lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, In the gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol suggesting a result selected by the lottery means, the display means has a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. And 2 display means, and the game machine uses the display means to display the stop symbol at a predetermined timing from the first display means to the second display means. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising power saving means for switching.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is a power saving means, at a predetermined timing, from the first display means to the second display means consuming less power than the first display means. It is switched to the display means. Therefore, suppression (power saving) of power consumption can be aimed at by using a 2nd display means in order to display a stop symbol.

  Further, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol which the player particularly pays attention to. Therefore, when such a stop symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and it is felt that the tempo of the game is thereby deteriorated, or the lottery by the lottery means is really lost. There may be inconveniences such as doubting whether it has been done or not. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game in which the problems exemplified above are suitably prevented while performing power saving.

  In the above embodiment, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified as the lottery means of the gaming machine C1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine C1, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. . Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first display means of the gaming machine C1, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is exemplified as the second display means of the gaming machine C1. Ru. In the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine C1, the power saving symbol display control process of the third and fourth embodiments (refer to FIG. 48 and FIG. 42) and the power saving mode transition process of the third and fourth embodiments The process of S3432 executed in FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first display means has a display screen for displaying the stop symbol as an image, and the display means is the first display means used to display the stop symbol. When the display means is stored, the display screen is stored so as to be visible, and when the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched by the power saving means, the front side of the display screen In a state in which the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and the front side member is disposed on the front side of the display screen. A game machine C2 characterized by being exposed so as to be visible.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and is exposed so as to be visible in a state in which the front side member is overlapped on the front side of the display screen. On the other hand, when the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by the power saving means, the stored front side member is on the front side of the display screen. Because the display screen of the first display means is hidden by the front side member, the stop symbol can be displayed on the second display means because the display screen of the first display means is hidden. Therefore, power consumption is smaller while suppressing deterioration of the impression (for example, deterioration of the impression due to the display screen becoming dark) due to the stop symbol being not displayed on the display screen of the first display means. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on the second display means, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game while performing the power saving.

  In the embodiment, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is exemplified as the front side member of the gaming machine C2.

  In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the front side member has a cutout portion or a hole portion in which the display screen can be viewed when the display side is overlapped with the front side of the display screen. C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the front side member is disposed on the front side of the display screen (the display screen of the first display means), the front side member has a cutout portion or a hole portion that allows the display screen to be viewed As a result, the player can confirm that the stop symbol is not displayed on the display screen (for example, that the display screen is dark) through the cutout portion or the hole portion. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that power saving is being performed from the state of the display screen confirmed through the cutout portion or the hole portion.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the power saving means is displayed on the first display means when the first display means is used as a display means for displaying the stop symbol. After the first means for displaying the display corresponding to the display content on the second display means and the display by the first means, the stop symbol is displayed on the first display means And a second means for erasing the display content displayed on the first display means in an impossible state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, after the display corresponding to the display content displayed on the first display means is also displayed on the second display means by the first means, the second means The display content displayed on the first display means is erased. That is, after displaying the same content on both the first display means and the second display means, the display means used to display the stop symbol is the first display means to the second display means. Switch to means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display contents such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means are justified without doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving symbol display control process (see FIGS. 48 and 52) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the first means of the gaming machine C1, and the second means of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified. As means, the process of S3432 executed in the power saving mode transition process (refer to FIG. 49, FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C4, a display area reducing means for gradually reducing the display area in the first display means, and an area other than the display area on the display screen in accordance with the reduction of the display area by the display area reducing means. And front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side side member so as to increase the overlap with the front side side member, and the display means is provided with the predetermined display area by the display area reduction means. Or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member reaches a predetermined size by the front side member control means. A game machine C5 characterized in that a display corresponding to the display content displayed on the display means is also displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and according to the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Since the overlap of the front side member control means is increased by the front side member control means, it is possible to impress the player on the switching of the display means by the power saving means, and it is possible to make the player realize that the power saving is being performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition processing (refer to FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the display area reducing means of the gaming machine C5. As the front side member control means of the gaming machine C5, the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, according to the display area reduction means for gradually reducing the display area in the first display means and the reduction of the display area by the display area reduction means, other than the display area in the display screen The front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side member so as to increase the overlap between the front side member and the region of the front side member, and the variable display of the symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. And / or symbol display control means for causing the display means to display a stop symbol suggesting the result selected by the lottery means after having been displayed on the second display means, and the second means The display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member is the front surface. When the symbol display control means displays the variable display of the symbol on the first display means and / or the second display means when the member control means reaches a predetermined size, After the stop symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means by the symbol display control means after the variable display of the symbols, the stop symbol displayed on the first display means is erased. A game machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and according to the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Since the overlap of the front side member control means is increased by the front side member control means, it is possible to impress the player on the switching of the display means by the power saving means, and it is possible to make the player realize that he is cooperating in the power saving.

  In addition, the display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member reaches a predetermined size by the front side member control means. In the case where the variable display of the symbol is displayed on the first display means and / or the second display unit by the symbol display control means, the stop symbol is displayed by the symbol display control means after the variable display of the symbol. After being displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the stop symbol displayed on the first display means is erased by the second means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display contents such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means are justified without doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition processing (refer to FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the display area reduction means of the gaming machine C6. As the front side member control means of the game machine C6, the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a first electric component provided around the gaming area where the first display means is disposed, and driven by electric power to emit light, and the first electric component And a second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side and driven by electric power to emit light, and the power saving means reduces the electric power used for the first electric component by a predetermined level at the predetermined timing. At the same time, the electric power used for the second electric component is lowered by a level larger than the predetermined level.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the first electric component provided around the game area in which the first display means is provided, and the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component Since the power to be used is reduced by the power saving means, it is possible to suppress power consumption (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level larger than the predetermined level, so the first display means is provided. The brightness and operation amount of the first electric component provided around the game area can be made larger than the brightness and operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Since the first display means on which the stop symbol is displayed is the area to which the player pays attention, the brightness and the operation amount of the first electric component arranged at a position closer to the game area are the second electric component By making the power consumption smaller (power saving) (eg, switching from the first display means to the second display means with lower power consumption). Can be suppressed, and thereby, the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are illustrated as a first electric component of the gaming machine C7, and outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are illustrated as a second electric component of the gaming machine C7. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3252 and S3253 executed in the lamp output processing (see FIG. 47) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the power saving means of the gaming machine C7.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means is a display means used to display the stop symbol at the timing when the operation means is operated, A game machine C8 characterized by switching from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C8.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C9 characterized in that the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state of being arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the first display means. .

  According to the gaming machine C9, since the position where the stop symbol is displayed does not change, the player can easily shift the viewing position even if the display means is switched by the power saving means.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a front side member operable to switch between a state of overlapping with the first display means and a state of exposing the first display means, the second display means being the front side The second display means is accommodated in a state where the display means provided on the side member and displaying the stop symbol is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the second display means in the unused state is stored and hidden. People are not concerned about unnecessary things.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the first display unit includes an image forming light emitting unit for forming an image on a screen, and the power saving unit turns off the image forming light emitting unit, A game machine characterized by switching display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means by executing display by the second display means. C11.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the power saving means turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means, and executes the display by the second display means to display the stop symbol. Is switched from the first display means to the second display means. Therefore, the first display means can be returned by turning on the light emitting means for image formation again, so that the display means used to display the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means If it switches back to, it can be completed early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inability to display the effect portion that gives interest to the game at the timing of switching, so it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest of the game without being able to see such a effect portion.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine further comprises display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means, the first display means forming an image for forming an image on a screen A light emitting means, the power saving means interrupting the power to the display control means, turning off the image forming light emitting means, and executing the display by the second display means A game machine C12 characterized by switching display means used to display a symbol from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C12, the power saving means not only turns off the light emitting means for image formation of the first display means, but also power to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means. As a result, power can be saved even more as the power to the display control means is shut off.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, a gaming machine C13 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine C14. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine C15 characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts In the game machine, the plurality of electric components include a first electric component provided around the game area and a second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component, and the game machine Among the plurality of electrical components, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level at a predetermined timing, and the power used for the second electrical component is higher than the predetermined level A game machine D1 characterized in that it comprises power saving means for reducing the power consumption.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the power saving means reduces the power used for the first electric component provided around the game area and the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Therefore, it is possible to suppress power consumption (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level greater than the predetermined level. The brightness and operation amount of the electric component can be made larger than the brightness and operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Since the game area is an area for the player to pay attention to, the power saving and the operation amount of the first electric component arranged at a position closer to the game area can be saved by making it larger than that of the second electric component. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression (for example, the absence of a bright impression in the game area) accompanying the suppression (power saving) of the power consumption by the means, thereby suppressing the decrease in the amusement of the game. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the game machine D1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117, the movable object control process for effect ((1) S1107) is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are illustrated as a first electric component of the gaming machine D1, and outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are illustrated as a second electric component of the gaming machine D1. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3252 and S3253 executed in the lamp output processing (refer to FIG. 47) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the power saving means of the gaming machine D1.

  In the game machine D1, the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components driven by electric power to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the power saving unit reduces the power used for the first electrical component by a predetermined level and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level higher than the predetermined level. The luminance of the first electrical component provided around the region is higher than the luminance of the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electrical component. Therefore, it is possible to relatively brighten the periphery of the game area to be watched by the player, and it is possible to suppress that the game area loses a bright impression due to the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the game machine D2, the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components that emit light in a light emission mode according to the effect executed by the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, since the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components that emit light in the light emission mode according to the effect performed by the effect execution means, they are provided around the game area Since the luminance of the first electrical component to which the player's awareness tends to be high is higher than the luminance of the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side than the first electrical component, the rendering effect associated with the power saving by the power saving means Can be effectively suppressed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means is the first electric component of the plurality of electric components at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine D4, characterized in that the electric power used for the second electric component is reduced by a level higher than the predetermined level while the electric power used for the second electric component is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine D4, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine D4.

  A gaming machine D5 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A game machine D6 according to any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A game machine D7 according to any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  In a gaming machine provided with electric components for presentation driven by electric power, the game machine is manually operated to be in a normal mode and a power saving mode in which power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode when a game is not executed by a player. The power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting the mode to any of the modes, the judgment means for judging whether or not the player is playing a game, and the game judgment means sets the power saving mode. Power saving means for reducing the power used for at least a part of the electric component for effect when it is determined that the mode setting means determines that the normal mode and the power saving mode are not performed. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the output amount of a predetermined one of the electric parts for effecting can be adjusted in a plurality of stages.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting either the normal mode or the power saving mode, and the judgment means judges that the game is not executed, the effect is produced. Since the power used for at least a part of the electric components for the purpose is reduced by the power saving means, it is possible to suppress the power consumption (power saving) when the game is not performed. Further, since the power saving by the power saving means is limited to the case where the power saving mode is set by the manually operated mode setting means, it is switched as necessary whether or not to save the power when the game is not executed. be able to.

  Furthermore, the mode setting means is configured to be able to adjust the output amount by a predetermined electrical component of the electrical components for presentation in a plurality of stages for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode. In addition, as an output amount by the electrical component for a predetermined | prescribed effect, the volume which is an output amount from the electrical component for presentation which can output a sound (for example, speaker apparatus), for example, the electrical component for a light emission possible effect The luminance is an output amount of (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED), and the operation amount is an output amount of an electrical part for presentation (for example, a movable body for presentation) which performs a predetermined operation. That is, the amount of output by the predetermined electric component can be adjusted to the amount suitable for the game by the mode setting means. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In addition, since the amount of power consumed by the electric component can be reduced when the output amount of the predetermined electric component is lowered, switching of whether or not to save power when the game is not executed, and the predetermined The adjustment of the power consumption of the electric parts for presentation can be realized by the mode setting unit 1. The setting operation can be facilitated and the operation load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is exemplified as the mode setting means of the gaming machine E1. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S314 executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13) is exemplified as the judging means of the gaming machine E1, and the power saving means of the gaming machine E1 is the fifth embodiment. The processes of S5252 and S5253 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 62) are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1, the mode setting unit is configured to be able to rotate, and a plurality of output values can be sequentially changed in accordance with the rotation operation, and the output value is rotated in a predetermined direction. Are sequentially increased, and the maximum value is reached, then the minimum value is reached, and if it is rotated in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially decreased, and the minimum value is reached, then the maximum value is shifted The normal mode is assigned to a plurality of continuous output values among the plurality of output values, and the power saving mode is assigned to the remaining plurality of output values. The gaming machine includes conversion means for converting an output value from the mode setting means into an output amount by the predetermined electric component, and the conversion means has a plurality of output values which can be output from the mode setting means. People The amount of output by the predetermined electrical component is configured to convert so as to increase after reaching the maximum value and to increase toward the maximum value after reaching the minimum value, A maximum value is assigned to at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. And a third output value different from the first output value, and a power saving mode adjacent to the third output value, wherein the minimum value of the output amount is an output value assigned to the normal mode. A game machine E2 assigned to at least one output value of the fourth output different from the second output value.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the output value from the mode setting unit is converted by the conversion unit into an output amount by a predetermined electric component. In the conversion by the conversion means, as the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means change in one direction, the amount of output by a given electrical component increases after reaching the maximum value and decreases to the minimum value Converted to increase towards the post maximum. At this time, at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value is the maximum value of the output amount. A third output value assigned to the value, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and being different from the first output value, and adjacent to the third output value The output value assigned to the power saving mode is assigned to at least one output value of a fourth output different from the second output value. Therefore, even when the mode setting means is operated to rotate, it is prevented that the amount of output (for example, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device) by a predetermined electrical component is rapidly increased or decreased. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the conversion means of the game machine E2 is executed in the volume setting value table (see FIG. 55 (b)) (not shown) stored in the ROM 272 and in the volume setting process (see FIG. 60). The processing of step S5204 is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A game machine E5 according to any one of the game machines E1 and E2, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  Lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, In the gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol suggesting a result selected by the lottery means, the display means has a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. The first display unit includes an image forming light emitting unit for forming an image on a screen, and the game machine is configured to display an image on the first display unit. Display control means for generating the image data of the image data, cutting off the power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, turning off the light emitting means for image formation, and executing the display by the second display means By Serial display means used to display the stop symbols, from said first display means, said game machine F1, characterized in that it comprises a power saving means for switching to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is a power saving means, at a predetermined timing, from the first display means to the second display means consuming less power than the first display means. It is switched to the display means. Therefore, suppression (power saving) of power consumption can be aimed at by using a 2nd display means in order to display a stop symbol. Further, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol which the player particularly pays attention to. Therefore, when such a stop symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and it is felt that the tempo of the game is thereby deteriorated, or the lottery by the lottery means is really lost. There may be inconveniences such as doubting whether it has been done or not. However, according to the gaming machine F1, the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the light emitting means for image formation of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating the image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, power can be saved even more as the power to the display control means is cut off.

  In the above embodiment, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified as the lottery means of the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the game machine F1, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. . Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first display means of the game machine F1, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is exemplified as the second display means of the game machine F1. Ru. Further, in the above embodiment, a backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as a light emitting means for image formation of the gaming machine F1, and an image controller 236 is exemplified as a display control means of the gaming machine F1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine F1, the processing of S6313 and the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) which are executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIG. 74) of the sixth embodiment. The processing of S6417 and S6418 executed in FIG.

  In the gaming machine F1, the electric power is supplied to the display control means at a predetermined timing, the light emitting means for image formation is turned on, and the display by the second display means is stopped by the stop. Display used to display the stop symbol by the power saving cancellation means that switches the display means used to display the symbol from the second display means to the first display means, and the power saving cancellation means And standby means for waiting for the display by the second display means to be not performed for a predetermined period when the means is switched from the second display means to the first display means. A game machine F2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F2, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving cancellation means In that case, for a predetermined period, the standby unit waits for the display by the second display unit not to be executed. Normally, it takes some time for the display control means to operate normally (return) after power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means. It is difficult to return early (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine F2, since the standby unit is configured to stand by for the non-execution of the display by the second display unit for a predetermined period, the player changes the symbol It is possible to prevent the display or the stop symbol from becoming invisible and to save power (that is, display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which interest is lost due to switching to the means). Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the power saving cancellation means of the gaming machine F2, the processing of S6211 and the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) executed in the power consumption mode setting process (see FIG. 70) of the sixth embodiment. The processes of S6419 and S6420 executed in the inside are exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S6267 to S6269 and S6270 executed in the power saving symbol display control processing (see FIG. 73) of the sixth embodiment is exemplified as the standby means of the gaming machine F2.

  In the gaming machine F2, the power saving termination means supplies power to the display control means by the first power saving termination means for supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, and the first power saving termination means. And second power saving canceling means for lighting the image forming light emitting means, and the standby means supplies power to the display control means by the first power saving canceling means. A game machine F3 which waits for non-execution of display by the second display means for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F3, switching of the display means by the power saving canceling means is performed by supplying power to the display control means by the first power saving canceling means, and then the light emitting means for image formation is lit by the second power saving canceling means. Be done. Normally, it takes some time for the display control means to start up after the power is supplied to the display control means, but since it does not take time to light the image forming light emitting means, the image forming light emitting means By performing the lighting of the light source after the supply of the power to the display control means, the power consumption can be suppressed accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state where the second display means is arranged in a superimposed manner on the front side of the first display means. A gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, since the position where the stop symbol is displayed does not change, the player can easily shift the viewing position even if the display means is switched by the power saving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second display includes a front side member operable to switch between a state of overlapping the first display means and a state of exposing the first display means. The means is provided on the front side member, and the second display means is accommodated in a state where the display means for displaying the stop symbol is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A game machine F5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the second display means in the unused state is stored and hidden. People are not concerned about unnecessary things.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F5 includes an operating means operable by the player, and the predetermined timing is a timing when the operating means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine F6.

  A gaming machine F7 according to any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A game machine F9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
37 first symbol display device 81 third symbol display device 83 second symbol display device 110 main controller 117 effect control device 180 shutter member 181 symbol display device for power saving 226 speaker device 227 volume control switch (mode setting means)
301 to 304 first to fourth inner circumference LEDs (electrical components for effect)
305 to 310 1st to 6th perimeter LED (electrical component for effect)
311 Notification LED
321.322 1st and 2nd lower plate LED (electrical part for presentation)
323 production button LED (electrical component for production)
341, 342 1st and 2nd decoration LED (electrical part for presentation)
343-345 1st-3rd side LED (electrical component for presentation)
346 Notification LED (electrical component for presentation)
347 Start-up LED
348 Special winning opening LED
361 Mobile for production

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine or the like.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example. In a gaming machine provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, a symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display screen triggered by the establishment of a start condition (for example, winning of a ball to the start opening), and the fluctuation display is stopped. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of predetermined symbols, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and a large amount of award balls can be paid out. In such gaming machines, various effects (for example, advance effects, reach effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are performed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In recent years, various effects have been performed by making full use of a large number of electrical components (for example, liquid crystal display screens, light emitters such as LEDs, movable bodies operated by motors or solenoids, speaker devices, etc.).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-174956

Nevertheless, if the reduced simply electrical device in order to reduce the power used, for example, becomes difficult differentiation through the diversification of the effect, interest of the game by directing is disadvantageously lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the power consumption is suitably controlled .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a player who is more than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. Game using special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the game, a plurality of electric devices provided at positions visible to the player and driven by electric power, and at least a part of the plurality of electric devices And a display performing means for performing an effect corresponding to the state , wherein the plurality of electric devices are capable of displaying a moving image or a still image for effect to be executed by the effect executing means. A second electric device different from the first electric device and driven by the driving means, the game machine comprising the second electric device; To electrical equipment Power switching means for reducing the power to be used from the first power to the second power lower than the first power, and the second electric device being switched to the second power by the power switching means Means for displaying on the display screen of the first electric device a moving image or a still image for effect, and a moving image when the second electric device is driven by the driving means in the state; Means for performing display indicating the result of the lottery of the lottery means on the display screen of the first electric device, and an electric device which consumes less power than the display screen of the first electric device, and has a predetermined display surface And the third electric device is used to display an indication indicating the result of the lottery of the lottery means using the third electric device when a predetermined trigger is established .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , when the predetermined condition is selected by the lottery means for performing the lottery when the starting condition is satisfied, the special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. Perform an effect according to the game state using at least a part of the special game state generation means, the plurality of electric devices provided at positions visible to the player and driven by electric power, and at least a part of the plurality of electric devices And a first electric device having a display screen capable of displaying a moving image or a still image for effect to be executed by the effect executing means. And a second electric device which is different from the first electric device and driven by the driving means, and the gaming machine uses electric power used for the second electric device. First power Power switching means for reducing the power to a second power lower than the first power, and the first electrical device in a state where the second electrical device is switched to the second power by the power switching means Means for displaying moving image or still image for effect, moving image when said second electric device is driven by said driving means on said display screen, and said display screen of said first electric device A means for performing a display indicating the result of the lottery of the lottery means; and an electric device having a smaller power consumption than the display screen of the first electric device, the third electric device having a predetermined display surface; Since the display indicating the result of the lottery of the lottery means is performed using the third electric device when a predetermined opportunity is established, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the power consumption is suitably controlled. .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a front frame and a lower tray unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a game board. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram showing composition of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a production control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list of the operation | movement according to power consumption mode about the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area order sending process performed in the fluctuation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by a presentation control apparatus. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a power consumption mode setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode counter update process performed in the presentation mode setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp presentation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process performed in the audio | voice lamp production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display production process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display process performed in the display production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each display process performed in the display production process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by the inside of a production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening LED lighting control processing performed in command reception interruption processing of FIG. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation image corresponding to a light emission means. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation image corresponding to the movable body for presentation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp production process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation lamp display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening LED lighting control processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the symbol display apparatus for power saving, (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line | wire of (a). It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the process in which the symbol display apparatus for power saving transfers to a closing state. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-saving mode transfer process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transfer process of 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a sound volume adjustment switch, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the output value from a sound volume adjustment switch, and a sound volume setting value. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement in a normal specification or a power-saving specification about the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a production control device of a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sound volume setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting presentation cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp output process of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command reception interruption processing of a 5th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine 10 of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of work RAM of a display control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list of operation | movement of the main electric components according to power consumption mode in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting presentation cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control processing for power saving performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-saving mode transfer process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode cancellation | release process performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed in the main processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display production process performed in the main process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 (not shown for the lower side hinges) are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1). The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side provided with 19 as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14a having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top opened by projecting forward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed on the upper right side of the upper surface of the wall portion 17a of the upper plate 17 that protrudes forward. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a ball rental button 42, a return button 43, and a frequency display unit (not shown). When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit (not shown) is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in light emitting diode (hereinafter referred to as "LED") lights up and the remaining amount is numeric as remaining amount information. Is displayed. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In addition, a mode change button 22 is provided on the top surface of the wall 17a. The mode change button 22 is a button operated by the player and functions as a button for changing an effect mode of an effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with three types of effect modes: a general effect mode, a notice effect mode, and a feature effect mode, and the player can play a predetermined time (in this embodiment, These three types of effect modes can be switched by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation or during customer waiting effects). That is, the player can switch to the effect mode according to his / her preference by appropriately operating the mode change button 22 at an appropriate timing.

  Of the three types of effect modes that can be switched by the mode change button 22, the general effect mode is configured as the simplest effect mode. On the other hand, the notice effect mode is a mode in which the notice effect (notice effect) is a effect with a higher degree of impression, and in the notice effect, the light emitting means for effect such as the first peripheral LED 301 (see FIG. 4) is a general effect mode It is a mode designed to light up or blink more frequently than in. The feature effect mode is a mode in which the degree of impression of the effect by the movement of the effect movable body 361 (see FIG. 7) provided on the game board (see FIG. 2) is enhanced, and the effect movable body 361 is a general effect It is a mode designed to operate at a higher frequency than the mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when compared in the same power consumption mode, the power consumption in the feature presentation mode is the largest, and the details will be described later, but the operation of the power saving button 23 described below will be described. When the large power saving mode is set, the feature effect mode can not be set even if the mode change button 22 is operated.

  In addition, a power saving button 23 is provided on the top surface of the wall 17a. The power saving button 23 is a button operated by the player and functions as a button for switching the power consumption mode of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with three types of power consumption modes: a normal consumption mode, a small power saving mode, and a large power saving mode, each time the player operates the power saving button 23. These three power consumption modes can be sequentially switched. The normal consumption mode is a mode in which each electrical component provided in the pachinko machine 10 is normally used without power saving. On the other hand, the small power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than the power consumption in the normal consumption mode. The large power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is further reduced as compared to the power consumption in the small power saving mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to have different power consumption according to the power consumption mode, and the power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23. Therefore, the power consumption can be suppressed as needed ( Power saving). In addition, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player having high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty for power consumption. Can. Also, although the details will be described later, even in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), for a specific electric component, it is configured to operate or emit light as usual. It is possible to provide the player with a suitable game such as being maintained.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like at various places around the front frame 14 to allow the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means through the light transmitting cover. be able to. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a speaker device (audio output device) 226 is provided on the upper left and right of the front frame 14. From the speaker device 226, sound effects for enhancing the effects of various effects performed using the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the light emitting means described above, and for notifying various conditions such as error occurrence An alarm sound or the like is output (sound output).

  Also, on the lower right side of the window portion 14a, a transparent resin is attached from the back side to form a small window 35 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. The seal paper etc. affixed to the reference) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor (not shown), a push button stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a change in When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the operation is performed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the handle 51, whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Be When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  Further, on the left side of the lower plate 50, an effect button 53 is provided. The effect button 53 is for causing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to display an effect indicating an expectation of a jackpot and an expectation indicating an expansion to a reach while fluctuating display of symbol rows. It is a button. The effect button 53 is composed of a light transmitting cover (not shown) and an effect button LED 323 (see FIG. 4) covered by the cover, and the player performs effects during a period in which the effect button LED 323 lights or blinks. By operating the button 53, an effect corresponding to the operation can be displayed.

  In the lower tray unit 15, light emitting means are provided respectively on the left and right of the lower tray 50, and the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made visible to the player through the light transmissive cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the lower tray unit 15 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in this FIG. 2, in order to make code | symbols intelligible, illustration of a nail, a metal fitting, etc. is abbreviate | omitted. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14a (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is an area which is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 (an area in which a winning opening and the like are provided and a shot ball falls).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112 a to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done.

  A first symbol display device 37 mainly for displaying a first symbol is disposed on the left side (left side in FIG. 2) of the gaming area in a front view. The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a 7-segment LED 37a, an LED 37b, and a special view holding lamp 37c. The 7-segment LED 37a is for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game and an error display.

  On the other hand, the LED 37b is composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) having emission colors of red, green and blue, and displays the first pattern by the lighting color (lighting mode). Specifically, every time the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the color change display (variation display) of the LED 37b is performed, and the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37b) when the fluctuation display is stopped The winning result of the jackpot made by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 7) is triggered by the winning of the first entrance 64 and is displayed in a definite manner.

  More specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the LED 37b changes the color of the three-color LED at high speed in the order of red → green → blue → red → ... (variation display), and predetermined time When has passed, one of the colors is displayed. When the jackpot lottery is won, the LED 37b is displayed in red or green (for example, stop display for several seconds).

  In particular, the confirmation display in red indicates that the type of jackpot that has been won is "probable jackpot". When the LED 37b is displayed in red, the game mode after the end of the special game state (big hit game) is increased in the big hit probability of the big hit lottery than the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second symbol described later is usually It is a high probability mode that is higher than the probability. On the other hand, the confirmation display in green indicates that the type of jackpot that has been won is "normal jackpot". When the LED 37b is displayed in green, the game mode after the end of the special game state is the normal time probability that the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is the normal probability, but the time shortening mode in which the collision probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability It becomes.

  In the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time or time to open the electric role associated with the first ball entrance 64 The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in one hit.

  Further, if the jackpot lottery is not won, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "off", the LED 37b is displayed in blue in a definite manner. When the LED 37b is displayed in blue for confirmation, the game mode after the end of the special game state is a normal mode in which both the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the collision probability of the second symbol are normal probabilities.

  Further, the special view holding lamp 37c displays the number of times the ball winning (entering the ball) to the first ball entrance 64 has been held (entering the ball), and in the present embodiment, four single color LEDs (for example, red LEDs) It consists of. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the stop of the first symbol by the LED 37b in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball has hit the first entrance 64 and the lottery of the big hit is started. Until the display is made, ball winning (ball entry) to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is the special view retention lamp 37c. It is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which comprises. Hereinafter, the number of holding times for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as a special image holding ball number N. The special view holding lamp 37c may be configured of, for example, two three-color LEDs, and the number of holding times (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed by a combination of display colors of the LEDs.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that variably displays the third symbol by using a winning (entering ball) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A second symbol display section 83 configured of an LED that variably displays the second symbol by using the symbol display device 81 and the passage of the ball of the second ball inlet 67 (through gate) as a trigger; The second symbol hold lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held by the ball that has passed through the gate), and a notification that the result of the big hit lottery is "probably hit big hit" before the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) A notice lamp 85 is provided to give notice and notice.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the effect control device 117 (see FIG. 7) described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 7). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 7) and the lottery result of the big hit (lighting of the LED 37b) On the other hand, the decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the first symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the LCD.

  The second symbol display portion 83 alternates between a symbol of "o" as a display symbol (second symbol) and a symbol of "x" every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (a symbol of "o"), the motorized role 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined time It becomes an open state, and it is constituted so that it may be in the state where it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  The number of times of passage of the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) of the ball is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is lit and displayed in the second symbol hold lamp 84 which is an LED. In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display section 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol hold lamp 84 may be performed by part of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of times the ball is reserved for the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control unit 110, and the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 and the decoration according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 Display is shown by the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters the general winning opening 63 are the same. Although it comprised, it is good also as a different number. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be twenty.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of a big hit At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is generally given (non-special gaming state) as the provision of gaming value (game value). A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown in FIG. 7) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a part of the solenoid 209). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a, and the open state and normal time closed Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, a special gaming state is not limited to the form mentioned above. If the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 lights up in a mode corresponding to a big hit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  In addition, the game board 13 is provided with a movable body 361 for effect (see FIG. 7). The effect movable body 361 is composed of electric parts such as a solenoid and a motor and a character part made of resin, and operates by supplying power to the electric parts. By causing the effect movable body 361 to operate at the time of the effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. As the effect movable body 361, for example, an accessory component is normally stopped, and at the time of rendering, the accessory component performs a predetermined operation (for example, movement in a predetermined direction, forward and backward movement, rotation, etc.) Are illustrated. In addition, the electrically operated combination as the movable body 361 for presentation is not only the above-mentioned operation, but is usually stored in the center frame 86 and appears on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of presentation, It is also good. In addition, the electrically powered combination as the movable body 361 for presentation is usually housed in the center frame 86, and at the time of presentation, a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD and appears from the left and right or up and down directions. It may be a shutter member that can be stopped at the covering position.

  Also, in the game area of the game board 13, as in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 described above, light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like are provided at various places, and light emitted from the light emitting means is It can be made visible to the player through the light transmissive cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 has a main board (main controller 110) and an effect control board (effect control apparatus 117) mounted thereon as a unit. The control board unit 91 has a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (emission control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116, and is unitized. There is.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111, the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is shown as a thin line so that the arrangement of the light emitting means is clear.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front frame 14 includes, as light emitting means, eight first inner peripheral LEDs 301 arranged above the window 14a and ten tenths arranged on the right of the window 14a. 2 inner circumference LEDs 302, nine third inner circumference LEDs 303 disposed below the window 14a, 12 fourth inner circumference LEDs 304 disposed to the left of the window 14a, and the speaker device 226 at the upper left Of four first outer peripheral LEDs 305 arranged at the upper left of the upper left, five second outer peripheral LEDs 306 arranged at the side farther from the window portion 14a than the first inner peripheral LED 301, and upper right of the upper left speaker device 226 Four third outer peripheral LEDs 307 arranged, three fourth outer peripheral LEDs 308 arranged on the side farther from the window portion 14 a than the second inner peripheral LED 302, and five five arranged in the lower right of the front frame 14 5th outer periphery LED 309 , A five sixth outer peripheral LED310 disposed on the lower left side of the front frame 14, three of the notification LED311 and is provided to be disposed on the right upper side of the third outer peripheral LED 307. Note that all of the LEDs 301 to 311 are installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are light emitting means for effect used at the time of presentation. Each of these LEDs 301 to 310 is formed of a three-color LED, and in the case of various effects to be performed at the time of a jackpot or reach, a light emission mode (a light emission color, a color change mode, lighting or By lighting or blinking in the blinking mode), it plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, the notification LED 311 is a light emitting means used for notification applications. The notification LED 321 is formed of a three-color LED, and when a notification event occurs, such as when an error occurs or the payout of a prize ball occurs, the player lights or blinks in a light emission mode according to the notification event. It plays the role of informing the employees of the hall and the hall.

  On the other hand, the lower tray unit 15 includes seven lower right tray LEDs 321 disposed on the right of the lower tray 50 and seven lower left tray LEDs 322 disposed on the left of the lower tray 50 as light emitting means. Three effect button LEDs 323 disposed in the portion of the effect button 53 are provided. The LEDs 321 to 323 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). These LEDs 321 to 323 provided in the lower tray unit 15 are all light emitting means for effect, and all are constituted by three-color LEDs, and in the case of various effects as in the above-described LEDs 301 to 310, By lighting up or flashing in the light emission mode according to the contents of the effect, the effect of the effect is enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of light emitting means provided on the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is shown as a thin line so that arrangement | positioning of a light emission means may become clear.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game area of the game board 13, as a light emitting means, 13 first decoration LEDs 341 arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and a third design display from the first decoration LEDs 341 Ten second decoration LEDs 342 arranged on the side away from the device 81 to the right, three first side LEDs 343 arranged at the upper right of the game area, and three three arranged to the right of the game area A cover that covers the second side LED 344, the three third side LEDs 345 disposed to the lower right of the game area, the five notification lamps LED 346 disposed in the notification lamp 85, and the first ball entrance 64. Three starting opening LEDs 347 arranged inside the member and two specified winning opening LEDs 348 arranged inside the cover member covering the variable winning device 65 are provided. These LEDs 341 to 348 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means, the decorative LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 are all light emitting means for effect, and are configured by three-color LEDs. Similar to the above-described LEDs 301 to 310 and LEDs 321 to 323, these LEDs 341 to 346 play a role in enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing in a light emission mode according to the content of the rendering at the time of various renderings .

  The starting opening LED 347 is a light emitting means that lights or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode each time a ball hits (enters) the first ball entrance 64. The specific winning opening LED 348 is a light emitting means that lights up or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode during a big hit game. The starting opening LED 347 and the specific winning opening LED 348 are both configured by three-color LEDs.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can switch the power consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23, and can be configured to save power as necessary. Although the details will be described later, when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), a part of the light emitting means shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. With respect to the light emitting means, power saving (suppression of power consumption) is achieved by lowering the brightness as compared to the normal consumption mode or turning off the light.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 6 is a schematic view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows (virtual symbol reels) by arranging the main symbols in the ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same The jackpot is configured to generate a big hit after the main symbol of the is aligned and stopped. In the case of shifting to the high probability mode (probability variation mode) after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned and stopped. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the normal probability after the end of the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “normal symbols”) to which the even numbers are added are aligned and stopped.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbols is the lateral direction X, and in such lateral variation (horizontal scroll), each symbol row has three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 at the top, middle and bottom. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right upward line L4, and a left upward line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When the ball enters the ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 (winning) and the fluctuation display is performed to scroll in the predetermined fluctuation direction (in the present embodiment, in the horizontal direction X), the fluctuation display is performed after the predetermined fluctuation time , And stop in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned and stopped on any of the activated lines, a jackpot will occur, and a jackpot movie (jackpot effect during the jackpot game) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation direction (scroll direction) is the lateral direction X, but the variation direction may be the vertical direction (that is, a direction orthogonal to the lateral direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective line is the upper line (line of Z1 in FIG. 6), middle line (line of Z2 in FIG. 6), lower line (line of Z3 in FIG. 6). 5), the line L4 rising to the right, and the line L5 rising to the left. Then, in the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the fluctuation display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  Further, in the lower left area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a special figure reserve number display portion 87 is displayed. The special figure reservation number display unit 87 is a part that displays the number of times the ball winning (entering) of the ball to the first entrance 64 is reserved, that is, the special figure reserved ball number N.

  Specifically, the special figure reservation number display unit 87 is configured as four circular display units 87a to 87d arranged in a line in the horizontal direction, and the display unit according to the value of the special figure reservation ball number N, 87a to 87d are displayed only in the outer frame or are filled and displayed in a predetermined color (for example, red). In more detail, when the number of special figure reservation balls N is zero (that is, when there is no held ball), all the display parts 87a-87d are displayed only by the outer frame. On the other hand, when the number of special figure holding balls N is more than 1 (that is, when there are no holding balls), the number N of special figure holding balls is represented by the number of display portions 87a to 87d that are filled. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 6, three display parts 87a-87c are filled up, the display part 87d is displayed only with an outer frame, and it is shown that the number of special figure reservation balls N is three.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the prize-winning to 1st entrance 64 may be hold | held to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum frequency | count (maximum value of N in special figure reservation number of balls N) is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to three, and may be set three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In such a case, the number of display units constituting the special-image suspension number display unit 87 may be provided for the maximum number of suspension times.

  In the lower right area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a power saving mode display 88 of "in power saving mode" is displayed when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). . When the power consumption mode is the power saving mode, since the power saving mode display 88 is displayed, it is possible to make the player realize that power saving is in progress.

  The power saving mode display 88 displays different displays in the small power saving mode and the large power saving mode, for example, displays "in small power saving mode" in the small power saving mode, and in the large power saving mode. It may be displayed as "in large power saving mode". Alternatively, “in power saving mode” may be displayed in different colors in the small power saving mode and the large power saving mode. Also, the power saving mode display 88 is not a character “in power saving mode” as shown in FIG. 6, but it is possible to distinguish three types of power consumption modes by the length and size of the figure, the number of figures, etc. For example, any aspect may be adopted.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the above-described pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 controls the entire operation of the pachinko machine 10, transmits various commands to the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub control device It is The various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in only one direction. The sub controller may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub controller to the main controller 110.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 to be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the storage ball storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the buffer for counters, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 and the like will be described. . FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing an outline of each counter.

  The storage ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 etc. are the determination of the big hit, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37, the display of the second symbol display part 83 It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to draw a result or the like.

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for fluctuation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display portion 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of main processing (see FIG. 12) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to when executing various control programs, the values of each counter stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Be done.

  The holding ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (entries) to the first entrance 64. In this storage ball storage area, four storage areas (storage first area to storage fourth area) so that data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the winning timing of the ball can be stored up to four times. And one execution area referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 15).

  An area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are respectively stored in the four storage areas (storage first area to storage fourth area) in the storage ball storage area An area for setting and an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are provided. In the present embodiment, three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 are provided in each of the holding areas in one holding ball storage area, but a plurality of holding ball storage areas are provided These three areas may be divided and stored in a plurality of storage ball storage areas. For example, a part (one or two areas) of the three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two holding ball storage areas provided, and the remaining areas are It may be configured to be provided in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the holding ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 can be stored up to a maximum of four times. In the case of storing data of one cycle, data are sequentially arranged from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is stored. That is, as the reserved area with the smaller area number is stored, the data corresponding to the earlier winning in time is stored. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning combination in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  In the execution area in the storage ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first per-class counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 An area for storing is provided. In the variation process (see FIG. 13) to be described later, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the pending first area of the pending ball storage area are shifted to the execution area and referred to. Based on the jackpot lottery results are determined. Then, variable display and stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed by the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b) or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. For example, the first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 738, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed. It is updated once each time and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 12).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that will be the jackpots is the normal probability (when the jackpot probability is normal) in the normal mode or the time shortening mode, and the high probability (the jackpot probability is higher than the normal) in the high probability mode. There are two types of settings. There are two types of random numbers that will be the jackpot at the normal probability (the jackpot probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that can be a big hit at high probability (when the big hit probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523 , 631, 683, 733 ". A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the large hit is made from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, as the type of jackpot determined by the first collision type counter C2, a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) which is a high probability mode after the jackpot end and a jackpot (usually jackpot) which is a time shortening mode after the jackpot end Depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the first collision type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 4 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt process of FIG. 16 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , And more specifically, is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant storage area with the smallest area number in the storage ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number to be “big hit (probable variation big hit) to be“ high probability mode after big hit end ”” is “1, 2, 3”, “big hit to become time shortening mode after big hit (normal big hit) The value of the random number which becomes "" is "0, 4". A table storing a random number value that determines whether “the jackpot in high probability mode after the jackpot end” or “the jackpot in time reduction mode after the jackpot end” from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as "big hit" based on the value of the first random number counter C1. And, if it is determined that "the jackpot becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot end" based on the value of the first hit classification counter C2, then the jackpot becomes the "probably variable jackpot". On the other hand, when it is determined that "big hit" is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and determined to be "big hit in the time saving mode after the big hit ends" based on the value of the first type counter C2. Is usually a "big hit".

  Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first collision type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots (certainly variable jackpots or normal jackpots) and one type of display corresponding to deviation Among the three types of display modes in total, one of the display modes is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  In the “probable variation jackpot” in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is between the maximum round number of 16 rounds and the next round until it becomes the next jackpot (probably variable jackpot or normal jackpot) It is a jackpot (16 round probability variation jackpot) which shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  Moreover, after the "normal jackpot" in the present embodiment and the jackpot the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the normal state (the jackpot probability is the normal state), and It is a big hit (16 rounds usually a big hit) where only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by an interval (in the present embodiment, 100 variations). In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "usually big hit", it is comprised so that the probability of hitting of the 2nd symbol may be raised for a predetermined number of times of change, but it changes to this and the lottery of the next big hit It may be configured to continue to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol until the result is determined.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “permanent big hit” or “normal big hit” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, and various values (eg, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) Can be Further, in the present embodiment, both the maximum round number of “permanent variation jackpot” and the maximum round number of “ordinary jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum round number is made to differ between “permanently variation jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot” It is good. For example, the maximum number of rounds of “permanent variation jackpot” may be 16 and the maximum number of rounds of “normal jackpot” may be seven.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it becomes "a definite change big hit", it is comprised so that the hit probability of the 2nd symbol may be raised until the lottery result of the next big hit is determined, but it is instead The hit probability of the second symbol may be increased by a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the pattern of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol is shifted only one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Lear back and forth out of reach” (for example, range of 0 to 8) and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” (for example, range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop design stops other than the front and back of reach reach Three stop patterns (a form of display result of dynamic display) with "complete out" (for example, the range of 39-238) where reach does not occur are selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the vacant reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting the stop pattern from the value (random number value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of such tables are provided such that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 which can take one stop pattern is different. This is whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state) or a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) This is to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern according to the like.

  For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the range of random numbers corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is 10 so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. A wide table of ̃238 is selected, and “complete out” is likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" narrows to 0-5, and the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" also narrows to 6 to 9, "front and back out of reach" and "back and forth It becomes difficult to select "reach except out".

  Moreover, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the holding ball storage area in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal) A table with a narrow random value range of 51 to 238 corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out." In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" is 0 to 8, the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" is as wide as 9 to 50, and "reach other than back and forth out" is easily selected It has become. Therefore, since the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 can be secured in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. For example, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), and the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 may also be referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 may be referred to as "second variation type counter".

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used to select (select) a pattern (variation pattern) of variation display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, and super reach fluctuation are set as the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured such that the rendering time (variation time) is different.

  Among these fluctuation patterns, “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, out-of-order fluctuation) that produces a lost display result without reaching display. In the present embodiment, the “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 11 seconds.

  "Normal reach fluctuation" is a so-called normal reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach indication. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 20 seconds.

  "Super reach change" is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the time the reach occurs and the final symbol stops. In the present embodiment, the “super reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect which appears between the occurrence of the reach in "super reach change" and the stop of the final symbol, a specific character may be made to appear, or a specific background may be displayed, It is exemplified that the symbol is changed in a specific mode (for example, the symbol is enlarged or reduced, the symbol is shaken, or the like).

  When selecting a fluctuation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referred to. This first selection table is a stop symbol at the time of outfall determined by the value of the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first collision type counter C2 or the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 Alternatively, it is provided for each reach except for the back and forth deviation, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different in each first selection table. That is, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern is different for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in the present embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second change type counter CS2 is a change pattern until a final stop symbol stops after a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching may be simply referred to as "the number of fluctuation symbols". That is, in this embodiment, after the symbols (left symbol) of the left symbol row Z1 and the symbols (right symbol) of the right symbol row Z3 in the normal reach are stopped by the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the middle symbol row The number of fluctuating symbols until the symbol (middle symbol) of Z2 stops is determined.

  The second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 when determining the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching is reached Is selected and referenced. This second selection table is a stop symbol at the time of outfall determined by the first hit type counter C2 (probable variation big hit or normal big hit) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 Or, it is provided for each reach except for the back and forth deviation, and in each fluctuation pattern selection table, the allocation of the range of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 to the number of fluctuation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after reaching is different . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of fluctuation symbols after the reach occurrence until the final stop symbol stops varies.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the type of fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, until the final stop symbol is stopped after reaching. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, a rough symbol variation mode such as a reach type such as normal reach is determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and more detailed symbols such as normal reach A, normal reach B, etc. are determined by the second variation type counter CS2. The variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize various diversification of the fluctuation display.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a "third variation type counter".

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the advance effect effect. That is, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the changing symbol (so-called "slip effect") or returns the symbol (so-called "return effect") other than the change of the third symbol. Since it is possible to perform advance notice effects such as passing a notice character for giving notice of occurrence of reach effect, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the effect pattern that adds (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) the time required for the preliminary effect production to the fluctuation time, and the time during which the fluctuation display is performed contrary thereto. The effect pattern which subtracts fluctuation time to (for example, -1 second etc.) and the effect pattern which does not add or subtract fluctuation time are selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the addition / subtraction value of the rendering time is determined. The addition or subtraction value of the rendering time determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 is added to or subtracted from the variation time determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 to make the first symbol or the third symbol The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of (ie, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, by further combining the fluctuation type counter CS3, the fluctuation display can be further diversified.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, also in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the notice effect selected to the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different There are several tables provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal), a normal state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) Tables are provided in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different according to the like. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 in the same manner as the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). For example, in the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the ball is either the left or the right second ball entry port 67 (through gate) Acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) in which a random number value for determining whether or not the second random number counter C4 is determined from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

  In addition, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Again referring back to FIG. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counters and flags described above, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed, and power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 82, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the first ball entrance switch 208a. And various switches 208 consisting of switches or sensors not shown, and a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a and a solenoid for driving a motorized product. It is connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Further, the RAM 213 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which a value such as O is stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 213. The NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control device 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) executed by the main control unit 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected by a touch sensor (not shown) that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the hit stop switch for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets output of sound in the speaker device 226 as an audio output device, setting of lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, setting of an operation pattern of the movable body 361 for effect, The third symbol display device (LCD) 81 controls the variation display of the third symbol, the jackpot effect, the display of the special figure holding ball number N, and the like.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body drive device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic device via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the first to sixth LED controllers 291 to 296, the movable body drive device 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and the effect button 53 and a speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body drive device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic device via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the first to sixth LED controllers 291 to 296, the movable body drive device 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and the effect button 53 and a speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like.

  Here, the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 273 includes a power saving counter 273a, an effect mode counter 273b, a large power saving mode flag 273c, a changing flag 273d, a customer waiting effect flag 273e, a mode changeable flag 273f, and a change. And a mode change flag 273g.

  The power saving counter 273a is a counter for setting a mode selected or instructed by the power saving button 23 among three types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode, small power saving mode, large power saving mode). The power saving counter 273a is incremented by one each time the player operates the power saving button 23, and is returned to zero after reaching a value defined as the maximum value ("2" in this embodiment). The power saving counter 273a is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear).

  The effect mode counter 273 b is a counter for setting an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among three effect modes (general effect mode, advance notice effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 273b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear).

  The effect mode counter 273 b is incremented by one each time the mode change button 22 is operated at valid or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed variation or during customer waiting effect). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the conditions under which the rendering mode counter 273b is returned to zero differ depending on the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 0 or 1 (that is, in the case of the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode), the effect mode counter 273b is a value set as the maximum value (this embodiment) Then, after reaching "2", it is returned to zero. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (that is, in the case of the large power saving mode), the rendering mode counter 273b is forced to be zero along with the operation of the mode change button 22 after reaching 1. Will be returned to That is, when the power consumption mode is the large power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b can not obtain 2 and can not be set to the feature effect mode.

  The large power saving mode flag 273 c is a flag indicating whether the set power consumption mode is the large power saving mode. When the large power saving mode flag 273 c is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the large power saving mode is set, and when it is set to off (ie, “0”). , Indicates that the large power saving mode is not set, that is, the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode is set. The large power saving mode flag 273c is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then set to on when the value of the power saving counter 273a is set to "2", and the value of the power saving counter 273a is other than "2" When set to a value, it is set to off.

  The fluctuating flag 273 d is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuating display is being executed (that is, fluctuating) in the third symbol display device 81. If the flag 273d is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the flag is in motion, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"), the variable is suspended. Indicates that there is. The during-fluctuation flag 273 d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then turned on along with the start of the fluctuating display, and is turned off when the fluctuating display is ended.

  The waiting for customer effect flag 273 e is a flag indicating whether or not the waiting for customer effect is being performed by the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that "customer waiting effect" is a display unrelated to the gaming state displayed on the third symbol game apparatus 81 when the variable display or the movie display during the big hit game is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect (for example, a title display or a demonstration display). When the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and if it is set to OFF (ie, "0"), the customer is Indicates that no waiting effect is being performed (ie, it is fluctuating or jackpot). The customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on. Then, after the presentation control device 117 receives a customer waiting effect command from the main control device 110, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is a customer waiting effect image (customer waiting effect) in the customer waiting effect flag 273e. When switched, it is set to on, and is set to off with the start of the variable display (that is, the end of the customer waiting effect).

  The mode changeable flag 273f is a flag indicating whether it is time (in the present embodiment, high speed change) in which change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible during change (during change display). When the mode changeable flag 273f is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that it is a time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 (that is, during high speed fluctuation) during fluctuation. When it is off (ie, "0"), it indicates that it is time to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22 during the change. The mode changeable flag 273 f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is then set to on during high speed fluctuation and is set to off during high speed fluctuation.

  The fluctuating mode change flag 273g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the fluctuation display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation. If the changing mode change flag 273g is set to ON (that is, "1"), the effect mode in the change display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 273g is set to off (that is, "0") as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high speed change, and then the change display Will be turned off when the

  Again referring back to FIG. RAM 273 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by MPU 271 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, values of I / O, etc. Region). Furthermore, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like in addition to those described above.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of each of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 based on an internal command received from the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 to intervene in reading and writing of data. The data stored in the RAM 276 is read at a predetermined timing, and a variable display image in units of frames is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (third symbol or decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. In the character ROM 275, for example, various data for effect used for fluctuation display (variation effect) and jackpot effect are stored. Data for variation display (variation display data) stored in the character ROM 275 is composed of data of a character symbol of the third symbol, data for a background image, data for a notice character symbol, and the like. The variable display data stored in the character ROM 275 is prepared for each effect mode (i.e., the general effect mode, the advance effect mode, the feature effect mode), and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control means The variable display data corresponding to the value of the effect mode counter 273b is read out by the image controller 274.

  In the character ROM 275, the above-described effect data is stored in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the data for effect is configured by about 1024 M bytes, and the data of about 1024 M bytes is compressed to about 768 M bytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary data (rendering data) compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read, decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing data for effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (ready to be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). The variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (fluctuation effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 274 according to time to generate a variable display image in frame units.

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable display data storage area is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM. For example, when the effect data is read out from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, when the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read out and smooth display can not be performed or clear. It may be impossible to display. It is also because it is easier to process display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative pattern or changing the color of the background pattern) by storing in the RAM.

  The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 all control the lighting of the LED as the light emitting means by PWD (Pulse Width Modulation). The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are connected to the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start opening LED 347, and the specific winning opening LED 347, respectively. The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 respectively change the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start opening LED 347, and the specific winning opening LED 347 according to the game state. It controls based on the lighting pattern which MPU27 set and output.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment causes the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348 to emit light (turn on or blink), and the power consumption required to operate the movable body 36 for effect in three stages. It is configured to be able to change according to the power consumption mode. Here, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), mainly among the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), the rendering effect In the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 that play a role of enhancing the power consumption, power saving is achieved by lowering the luminance to a lower luminance than the luminance in the normal consumption mode or turning off the light.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346 Of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 by reducing the duty ratio (the ratio of the on time to the sum of the on time and the off time) of the current in the normal consumption mode. Decrease (decrease) the brightness. Hereinafter, the brightness in the normal mode is referred to as “normal brightness”, and the brightness in the small power saving mode is referred to as “middle brightness”. In addition, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, the duty ratio of the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 Are turned off (i.e., not turned on or kept off), the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 are turned off.

  The movable body drive device 297 is connected to the electric component (solenoid, motor, etc.) of the effect movable body 361, and drives and controls the electric component by the PWD based on the operation pattern set and output by the MPU 271 according to the game state. Thus, the effect movable body 361 is operated.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to change the required power consumption according to the set power consumption mode also for the electric component (solenoid, motor, etc.) for operating the movable body 36 for effect ing.

  Specifically, for the effect movable body 361 operated by a motor, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the duty ratio of the current supplied to the motor is normally consumed By setting the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 smaller or zero as compared to the normal consumption mode by making the ratio smaller or zero as compared with the duty ratio in the mode (ie, stopping the operation), Thus, power consumption can be saved.

  On the other hand, for the effect movable body 361 operated by a solenoid, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the number of times the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 excites the solenoid By setting an operation pattern smaller than the number of excitations in the normal consumption mode, the amount of operation of the movable body for effect 361 can be made smaller or zero compared to the normal consumption mode (that is, the operation) Can be used to save power consumption.

  In this embodiment, the control of the sound outputted from the speaker device 226, the control of lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, and the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. Although control such as variation display of symbols is collectively performed by the effect control device 117, various types of control may be shared and performed by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of LEDs and various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 The control may be performed by a dedicated control device (display control device).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are provided in the effect control device 117, but may be provided separately from the effect control device 117. In such a case, the effect control device 117 sets the lighting patterns of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348 and the luminance according to the power consumption mode, and the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 You may be comprised so that lighting and light extinction of LED301-311,321-323,341-348 may be controlled based on a setting. Similarly, the movable body drive device 297 is provided in the effect control device 117, and in the effect control device 117, setting of the operation amount according to the operation pattern and power consumption mode of the effect movable body 361 is performed. The driving device 297 may control the effect movable body 361 based on the setting.

  In addition, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are one LED control device, and the LEDs 301 to 311 and 321 to 323 are based on the lighting pattern and the luminance output from the effect control device 117 by this one LED control device. , 341-348 may be controlled.

  Further, the MPU 271 may be configured to have the functions of the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 and the movable body drive device 297. In such a case, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 and the movable body drive device 297 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 7 are omitted, and the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348, and the movable body for effect 361 are connected to the input / output port 277 respectively.

  The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase having a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). A switch circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110, 112, 117, and 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and the voltage of 12 volts, the voltage of 5 volts and the backup voltage are controlled by the respective control devices 110, 112, 117, 291 to 297, the speaker device 226 Supply the necessary voltage to the

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete the process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the backup data and clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A payout initialization command is sent to the payout control device 111.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the power saving button 23 operable by the player, and the player operates the power saving button 23 to set the power consumption mode (that is, the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be able to change the power consumption). Here, with reference to FIG. 10, it will be described how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of operations according to the power consumption mode for main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 10, inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, and notification LEDs 311 provided on the front frame 14, and lower tray LEDs 321 and 322 and effect button LEDs 323 provided on the lower tray unit 15 are provided as main electrical components. The first symbol display device 37 which is an LED, the second symbol display device 83 which is an LED, the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD, the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 provided on the game board 13 , The starting opening LED 347, the specified winning opening LED 348, and the effect movable body 361 are mentioned.

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, all the listed electric components emit light with normal luminance and are operated in normal operation. That is, in the normal consumption mode, the electric component operates with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the small power saving mode, among the listed electric components, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, the effect button LED 323, The brightness of the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, the notification LED 346, and the start opening LED 347 is reduced from the normal brightness to the medium brightness. On the other hand, the other LEDs or LCDs are usually left at the brightness. Further, the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 is dropped from the normal movement to the weak movement. Therefore, in the small power saving mode, the brightness and the operation amount of some of the electric components are reduced to the middle brightness and weak operation, so power saving can be achieved compared to the normal consumption mode.

  Furthermore, when the power consumption is set to the large power saving mode, each of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 whose brightness is set to the middle brightness in the small power saving mode described above is turned off. The other LEDs or LCDs remain at normal brightness as in the case of the small power saving mode. Also, the effect movable body 361 is stopped. Therefore, in the large power saving mode, some of the electric components are turned off or stopped, so that power can be saved more greatly than the small power saving mode.

  As described above, even when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (small power mode, large power saving mode), the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, maintains the normal brightness. The third symbol display device 81 is a device capable of causing the player to most effectively recognize various effects (for example, advance notice effect, reach effect, etc.) executed to enhance the interest of the game. Even if the luminance of some LEDs is lowered (or turned off) by maintaining the luminance of the third symbol display device 81 as normal luminance, maintaining the fun of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 Can.

  Also, the brightness of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always kept at the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Since the specific winning opening LED 348 is disposed in the portion of the variable winning device 65 which is the most important member for providing a benefit to the player in the jackpot game, the brightness of the specific winning opening LED 348 is left as normal brightness. Thus, the player can be made to recognize with certainty that it is in the jackpot game providing a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning opening 65a, and the jackpot game is in progress. It can prevent the player from reducing the pleasure and enjoyment felt.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 as a trigger, and the second symbol display device 83 Is a display of the result of the winning lottery performed with the winning of the ball to the second entrance 67 as a trigger. That is, each of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is a device for displaying the lottery result relating to the player's profit so that the player can visually recognize it. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the brightness of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is always kept the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode Therefore, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the notification LED 311 is also always kept at the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Therefore, the player or the employee of the hall can surely be notified of various errors generated in the pachinko machine 10, the error can be quickly eliminated, and the player can quickly return to the game, or the wrongdoing It is possible to find out early.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power saving mode can be changed not only by the power saving button 23 operable by the player, but also by the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). However, since a specific electric component is configured to operate or emit light as usual, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game, such as maintaining the fun of presentation. In addition, since the power consumption mode can be changed by the player by operating the power saving button 23, a player having a high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty about power consumption. it can. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a suitable game can be provided while performing power saving.

  In particular, in the small power saving mode, the brightness of a part of the light emitting means (i.e., LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) is lower than that in the normal consumption mode (i.e., middle) The power consumption is reduced by reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 631 to lower the brightness) or reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 631. It is possible to provide the player with the fun of the effect almost the same as the mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 includes start-up processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, and timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment) And NMI interrupt processing is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11, the start-up process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S101). Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance, it waits for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the presentation control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. In order to do this, wait processing (one second in this embodiment) is performed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not stored (S105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S111. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) (S111). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S112, S113), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S108). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S110, an interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (outputted) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). In this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 16) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. Also, by this external output process (S201), the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the type command, the stop command, the presentation time addition / subtraction command, etc. are transmitted to the presentation control device 117 If the ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112. When an error occurs in the main control unit 110 and an error command for the error is set, the error command is transmitted to the effect control unit 117 in the external output process (S201).

  After the process of S201, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the processing and the first pattern display device 37 are performed. A variation process of setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation processing, the jackpot processing for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and thereafter, a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (specific implementation) is made to the specific winning opening 65a. In the embodiment, when ten balls enter, the processing for closing the specific winning hole 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when it passes and the second symbol display device 82 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display unit 83 of the above. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S207, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117). It transmits (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S207 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It can start from the process of S201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S302: No), the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the special figure holding ball number N is acquired (S303). After the processing of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304).

  At this time, if the number of special map holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 A holding ball storage area sequential feed process is executed to shift in order to the execution area side (S305). The detailed process executed in the holding ball storage area order forwarding process (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the storage ball storage area order sending process (S305), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variation start process for starting the variation display of the first symbol (S306), and the variation process (S204) is ended. The detailed process executed in the change start process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing as a result of confirmation by the processing of S302 (S302: Yes), the special view control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is selected. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). The special view control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the presentation time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  Here, as for the stop symbol displayed in the stop display of the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol of whether or not the big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. Furthermore, for the stop symbol of the big hit, according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2, the stop symbol when it becomes the high probability mode after big hit (that is, probability variation big hit) and when it becomes the time shortening mode after big hit (that is, Usually, it is distinguished from the stop pattern of the jackpot). For example, if it is a probability variation big hit, the red is lit as the stop symbol on the LED 37b, and if it is a large hit normally, the green is lit as the stop symbol on the LED 37b. On the other hand, when the lottery result (the value of the first random number counter C1) is out, blue is turned on as the stop symbol on the LED 37b. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  The variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, each time the variation process is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display setting is performed to end (stop) the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S309), after setting the stop command to synchronize the stop of the fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 (S310), the fluctuation process (S204) is ended and the main process Return to (see FIG. 12). When the effect control device 117 receives the stop command set in S310, the effect control device 117 ends the 1 variable display being executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as a result of the discrimination in the process of S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), it is discriminated whether the customer waiting effect waiting flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on. To do (S311). At this time, if the customer waiting effect waiting flag is off (S311: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned on (S312), and clocking of the customer waiting effect waiting time is started using a counter not shown (S313) End the variation process (S204), and return to the main process (see FIG. 9). Note that, when time counting by a counter (not shown) is started by the process of S313, this counter is updated each time timer interrupt processing (not shown) is executed periodically. Note that this counter may be updated during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) described later.

  Further, as a result of the determination in the process of S311, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the start of timekeeping in S313 (S314), and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S314: No) Because it is in a period of waiting for the execution of the customer waiting effect, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S314, when the predetermined time has passed (S314: Yes), since it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect command is set (S315). After the standby flag is turned off (S316), the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). The customer waiting effect command set by the process of S315 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 to be executed next in the main process (see FIG. 12). Upon receiving the customer waiting effect command, the effect control device 117 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the customer waiting effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the above-mentioned holding ball storage area order sending process (S305) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the storage ball storage area order sending process (S305) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  In this holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305), first, each data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area (the value of the first random number counter, the value of the first collision type counter, and the stop pattern The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each piece of data stored in the pending second area to the pending fourth area is shifted to an area with a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, among the second to fourth reserve areas, data shift is performed only for the reserve area in which data is stored (pending). Therefore, since no data shift process is performed on a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second to fourth reserved areas may be shifted to an area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the special figure holding ball counter value (special figure holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball counter after subtraction is set (S354). The pending number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 to be executed next in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number as the number N of special drawing holding balls indicated by the holding number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special drawing holding number display unit 87. The display section of is displayed in full (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (special figure holding ball number N), the new number of holding times is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which constitutes the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37 (S355), the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305) ends, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  Next, the aforementioned variation start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area (S401). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at each time.

  In the present embodiment, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “310” or “608” at the time of normal probability (during normal mode or time shortening mode), it is determined as a big hit by the process of S401. Be done. On the other hand, at the high probability (high probability mode), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, If it is any of 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ", it is determined by the process of S401 that a jackpot has occurred.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37b) at the time of jackpot displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S402). Specifically, in S402, after determining the big hit type (that is, stop symbol for big hit) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, the big hit type determined Setting is performed so that the display mode corresponding to is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3” is “probability variation big hit”, and the value of the first hit type counter C 2 is “0, 4”. In the case of "", the jackpot type is "usually a jackpot".

  After the processing of S402, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 S403).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined from normal reach variation (20 seconds) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 The fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol in middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol) in the present embodiment)) stops is determined based on the value of. By the determination of the fluctuation pattern by the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until stopping with the big hit symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined .

  Note that the above-mentioned fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 can be set. Whether to set or to set with both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be appropriately determined depending on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions at each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37b) at the time of detachment displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408). Specifically, in S408, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the storage ball storage area, the stop symbol (front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, or complete out) is determined Then, the display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is set to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the processing of S408, the variation pattern at the time of removal based on the stop symbol at the time of removal indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the values of variation type counters CS1 and CS2. (S409).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, similar to the process of S403 described above, rough out of out fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol) stops) is determined after the reach occurrence based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide. By the determination of the variation pattern by the process of S409, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until stopping with the third symbol display device 81 is determined. .

  In the process of S408, when "reach before out of reach" or "reach other than before or after out of reach" is set as the display mode at the time of out, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S409. The table is preset as described above.

  After the processing of S403 or S409, a rendering time (addition or subtraction value of the rendering time) to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the processing is determined (S404). At this time, based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203, the effect time to be added / subtracted is determined.

  After the processing of S404, a fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S403 or S409 is set (S405), and then the display mode set by the processing of S402 or S408 (that is, stop Set the type command according to the symbol). (S408). Thereafter, a presentation time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the presentation time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S404 is set (S407), the variation start process (S306) is ended, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 13).

  As described above, after the “number-of-holds command” is set in the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (see FIG. 14), “variation pattern command”, “type” in the variation start process (see FIG. 15) Commands are set in the order of “command” and “operation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 12), each command is output in the order in which the commands were set, so when starting the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “number-of-holds command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When 619, 15, 238, 250) respectively are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, the start winning process with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the launch control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the release control processing detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by a touch sensor (not shown), and that a strike stop switch (not shown) for stopping the release is not operated. The condition is a process of determining on / off of the ball firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Here, the above-mentioned start winning process (S504) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), a start winning command is set (S602). The start winning combination command set by the process of S602 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). At this time, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64, and the special figure reservation number of balls N <4 (S603: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the step S503, the first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604).

  Next, the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N is incremented by 1 (S605), and the holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after addition It sets (S606). The pending number command set by the process of S606 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number as the number N of special drawing holding balls indicated by the holding number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special drawing holding number display unit 87. The display section of is displayed in full (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (special figure holding ball number N), the new number of holding times is displayed by the number of lighting of the LED which constitutes the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37 (S607) The start winning process (S504) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, it is not the special figure holding ball number N <4 (S603: No , S604 to S606 are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed at the time of power shutoff of the pachinko machine 10 due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the execution information of the power shutoff is stored in the RAM 203 by execution of the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 includes start-up processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, and commands executed each time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, initialization is performed in response to power on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, the power on notification process is executed (S1002). The power on notification process (S1002) is to notify that the power is on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is on, and the notification is made by the speaker device 226, the front frame 14 or the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 or the like, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301), the screen of the third symbol display device 81, or the like.

  After execution of the power on notification process (S1002), to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and video is displayed. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, the initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 determines whether the current start-up process is performed because the MPU 271 is reset during the execution of the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) described later. It is determined whether the disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instant power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect control device 117 or the like. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 stores power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. And execute the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20). The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process.

  That is, during the execution of the power-off process, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. If the power is completely shut off during or after the completion of the power-off process, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, and in this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, when the power-off process flag is off, the current start-up process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. In the first state, the power supply is completely shut off. Since the data in the RAM 273 is lost when the power is completely shut off, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the second state, a power failure process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power failure does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power failure process is completed. The MPU 271 is in a reset state. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is held without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the third state, only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset by noise or the like. That is, when the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110), the power-off process flag is kept off and the data of the RAM 273 is held. Be done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed It confirms (S1006). It should be noted that it is checked here whether the data is destroyed if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held if the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. For example, control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  The confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the power-on process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the power is turned off (the RAM 273 is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, although a power failure process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, the power is not shut off and returns to normal, and then the MPU 271 is reset after the power shutdown process is completed. If the current start-up process is started after the current start-up process is started, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off occurs. Then, the state returns to normal, and thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset during execution of the power-off process. In this case, the current memory state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue the control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is judged whether or not the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). In addition, as a check method performed in S1007, first, write "0FFh" for each byte, read it for each byte, and check whether it is "0FFh", and if "0FFh", it is normal Determine. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. The read / write check of the RAM 273 clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 has an abnormality (S 1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S 1014), and the power is shut off. Loop up to infinity. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 273. In addition, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the abnormality of the RAM 273 may be notified.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 273 or not.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is performed, and turned off when the power is completely shut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process The MPU 271 is reset during execution of the program or after completion of the process.

  Therefore, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011). Next, an initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process shifts to main processing (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off when the start-up process is executed, for example, the data of the RAM 273 including the data of the power-off flag is lost, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like. Is reset and the power-off flag is not turned on (ie, no power-off command from the main control device 110 is received).

  Therefore, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is off (S1010: No), S1011 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1012 and the RAM 273 After setting the initial value of (S1012), the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the processing shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 20).

  When the power-off flag is turned off, the clear processing of S1011 is skipped if only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up processing is started. This is because control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by storing data of the work area. When the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to a game effect (voice output, display, etc.), and is executed after the start process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 described above ends, and then repeatedly It is a process to be performed.

  In the main processing, first, power consumption mode setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The details of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). The details of the effect mode setting process (S1102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102) is performed, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination is performed (that is, the process of S1103 is performed last time) (S1103), and the previous time If 1 ms or more has passed since the determination of step 1 is performed (S1103: Yes), voice lamp effect processing, which is processing to execute lighting control of various lamps and voice output control, is executed (S1104), S1105 Move to the process of The details of the sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1103, if 1 ms has not elapsed from the previous determination (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. In addition, when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination is performed in the process of S1101, skipping the process of the audio lamp effect process (S1104) is executed in the audio lamp effect process (S1104) This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control in a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed (S1105) after the previous determination is performed (that is, after the process of S1105 is performed the previous time). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect or a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect is displayed as the third symbol A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1106). The details of the display effect process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the display effect process (S1106), the effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. In this effect movable body control process (S1107), the operation pattern of the effect movable body 631 corresponding to each effect is set to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable body drive device The output to 297 causes the effect movable body 631 to operate in the set operation pattern.

  When the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a solenoid, for example, an operation pattern in which the number of times of excitation of the solenoid varies according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode) By setting, the power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained. That is, power consumption is achieved by setting the number of excitations of the solenoid to the normal consumption mode (the number of excitations corresponding to the normal operation)> the small power saving mode (the number of excitations corresponding to the weak operation)> the large power saving mode (the number of excitations = 0). It is possible to obtain the power saving effect according to the mode.

  In addition, when the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a motor, for example, by setting an operation pattern in which the driving period (voltage application time) of the motor is different according to the value of the power saving counter 273a, It is possible to obtain a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode. In other words, by setting the drive period of the motor to normal consumption mode (drive period corresponding to normal operation)> small power saving mode (drive period corresponding to weak operation)> large power saving mode (operation stop), the power consumption mode is set. According to the power saving effect can be obtained.

  On the other hand, when the electric component for operating the effect movable body 631 is a motor, the movable body is driven according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode) in addition to the setting of the operation pattern. By setting information that defines the operation amount of the device 297 and outputting the information to the movable body drive device 297, it is possible to obtain a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode. For example, by setting a value defining the duty ratio of the drive voltage of the motor according to the value of the power saving counter 273a and outputting it to the movable body drive device 297, a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained.

  Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273 a is “0”, the movable body drive device 297 outputs information defining the duty ratio of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effect movable body 631 becomes a normal operation. Do. Thereby, in the normal consumption mode, the movable body drive device 297 can be operated in the normal operation. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “1”, the information defining the duty ratio (value smaller than the normal operation) of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effect movable body 631 becomes weak Output to the device 297. Thereby, in the small power saving mode, the movable body drive device 297 can be operated with a weak operation. In addition, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “2”, information that specifies that the duty ratio of the drive voltage is zero is output to the movable body drive device 297. As a result, in the large power saving mode, the movable body drive device 297 remains stopped.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1105, if 20 ms has not yet passed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the process of S1106 and S1107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1108. In addition, when 20 ms has not passed since the previous determination was executed by the process of S1105, the process of the display effect process (S1106) is skipped by this display effect process being the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. This is because the image to be displayed is updated according to the fluctuation time, so it is not necessary to execute such processing in a cycle shorter than 20 ms. Further, similarly, the effect movable body control process (S1107) does not have to be executed in a cycle shorter than 20 ms.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is stored in the RAM 273 (S1108). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1108: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1110), and the power-off processing is performed. It executes (S1111). After execution of the power-off process (S1111), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1112), and then the process is infinitely looped.

  In the power-off process of S1111, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), and the third The output of the symbol display device 81 is turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased. Note that turning off each output port is to prevent abnormal display or abnormal voice output, and prevents the player from being confused by the abnormal display or abnormal voice output. It is for.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the process of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored (S1108: No), the keyword "55AAh" stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 19). Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1109). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1109: No), the process returns to S1101 and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1109 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the display effect process (S1106) is not executed because it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is an infinite loop, thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. As a result, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can, for example, call a store clerk in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the above-described power consumption mode setting process (S1101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), first, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201), and if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is performed. The process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the power saving counter 273a (S1202), and it is judged whether the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2. It discriminates (S1203).

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2 (S1203: Yes), the power saving counter 273a is cleared to zero, the value is set to zero (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 or less (S1203: No), the process of S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. The power saving counter 273a is sequentially changed within the range of 0 to 2 each time the power saving button 23 is operated by the processing of S1023 and S1204.

  In S1205, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1205). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1205, that is, if the power saving mode is set to the large power saving mode (S1205: Yes), the large power saving mode flag 273c is turned on ( S1206), end the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), and return to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1205, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1205: No), the large power saving mode The flag 273c is turned off (S1207), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the effect mode setting process (S1102) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process (S1102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the effect mode setting process (S1102), first, it is confirmed whether the mode change button 22 is operated (S1221), and if the mode change button 22 is not operated (S1221: No), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is performed. The process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1221 (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-fluctuation flag 273d is on (S1222). At this time, if the variation flag 273d is on (S1222: Yes), it is determined whether the mode change enable flag 273f is on (S1223).

  If it is determined that the mode changeable flag 273f is off as a result of the process of S1223 (S1223: No), it is possible to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22 even during the change (in this embodiment, In this case, the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the mode change enable flag 273f is on as a result of the determination in the process of S1223 (S1223: Yes), a time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 during change (in this embodiment, high speed change) In this case, the during-changing mode change flag 273g is turned on (S1224).

  After the process of S1224, the effect mode counter updating process is executed (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). The effect mode counter updating process (S1225) is a process for updating the value of the effect mode counter 273a, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S1222, if the during-fluctuation flag 273d is off (S1222: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting rendering in-progress flag 273e is on (S1226). At this time, if the customer waiting effect in progress flag 273e is off (S1226: No), since it is a time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited, in such a case, the effect mode setting process (S1102) is ended, It returns to the main processing (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1226, if the customer waiting effect in-progress flag 273e is on (S1226: Yes), since it is a time when the effect mode can be changed (permitted), After the effect mode counter updating process is executed (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the effect mode setting process (S1102), the timing at which the mode change button 22 is operated is whether the mode change enable flag 273f is on (that is, during high speed fluctuation) or the customer waiting effect effect flag 273e Is on (ie, during customer waiting effect), the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is executed. Thereby, the value of the rendering mode counter 273b is updated, and the rendering mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed (switched).

  Next, the effect mode counter update process (S1225) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing effect mode counter update processing (S1225) executed in the effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 22) described above.

  In the effect mode counter updating process (S1225), first, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is incremented by 1 (S1231), and it is determined whether the large power saving mode flag 273c is on (S1232).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S1232, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is on, that is, the power saving mode is set to the large power saving mode (S1232: Yes), the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 1 It is determined whether it exceeds (S1233). If the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 1 (S1233: Yes), the rendering mode counter 273b is cleared to zero (0) (S1234), and the rendering mode counter updating process is performed. The process ends (S1225), and returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 1 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S1233 (S1233: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is ended. , And returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is set to the large power saving mode (that is, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is on), the effect mode counter 273b does not change the mode change button 22 by the processing of S1233 and S1234. The value of 0 or 1 can be alternately taken each time it is manipulated. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the large power saving mode, the general effect mode or the advance effect mode can be set, but it is not possible to set the utility effect mode with the largest power consumption.

  Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S1232, when the large power saving mode flag 273c is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal power consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1232: No), the effect mode counter It is determined whether the value 273b exceeds 2 (S1235). If the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 2 as a result of the determination in the process of S1235 (S1235: Yes), the rendering mode counter 273b is cleared to zero, and the value is set to zero (S1234). The process ends (S1225), and returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 2 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S1235 (S1235: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter updating process (S1225) is ended. , And returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b is in the range of 0 to 2 every time the mode change button 22 is operated by the processing of S1235 and S1234. It will be changed sequentially within. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, any one of three types of effect modes (general effect mode, advance effect mode, and feature effect mode) can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-mentioned sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the audio lamp effect process (S1104), first, a lamp output process (S1241) is executed. The lamp output process (S1241) is a variety of LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 or the like so as to have a lighting pattern edited in the process of S1243 described later. Processing for setting the output of (.about.323, 341 to 346), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1242). In this effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), the effect button 53 monitors an input as to whether or not the player has operated the game to enhance the effect, and the input of the effect button 53 is confirmed. It is a process set so as to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, the expectation value of the jackpot by the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the presentation button 53, or the expectation to the jackpot is displayed by pressing the presentation button 53 during reach production. Change to a playable effect. The operation timing of the effect button 53 is also suggested to the player by lighting or blinking of the effect button LED 323.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), lamp editing processing is executed (S1243). In the lamp editing process (S1243), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310 and 321 to 1) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  After the lamp editing process (S1243) is executed, a sound editing / output process is executed (S1244). In the sound editing / output process (S1244), the output pattern of the speaker device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1244, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1245), the sound lamp effect process (S1104) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1243 and the sound editing / output process of S1244 are executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S1245).

  Next, the above-described lamp output process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a lamp output process (S1241) performed in the above-described voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251). If the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the light emission based on the normal luminance is set to the sixth LED control device 296 (S1252), the process proceeds to S1253. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1253.

  In S1253, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1253). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1253 (S1253: Yes), light emission with normal brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 (S1254), The lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed last time is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended. The process returns to the sound lamp presentation process (see FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1253 (S1253: No), it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256: Yes), light emission with medium brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1257). The lighting pattern edited in step S1243 executed in step is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 (S1255), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended, and the voice lamp effect process (FIG. 24) Return to

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination in the process of S1256, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1256: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 On the other hand, turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process (S1241) is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1255 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296, and the LED control devices 291 to 293 that have received the setting. , 296 are lighting patterns corresponding to the received setting, and light or blink corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346, 348.

  In addition, the brightness set in S1255, S1257, and S1258 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, and the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are the brightness set in S1255, S1257, and S1258. The corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are lit or blinked.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 turn on or off with different brightness according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). It blinks or goes out. Specifically, the luminances of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are regarded as normal luminance when set to the normal consumption mode, and medium luminance when set to the small power saving mode. It is assumed. When the large power saving mode is set, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are turned off (that is, the luminance is set to zero).

  Also, the brightness set in S1252 is output to the sixth LED control device 296, and the sixth LED control device 296 lights or blinks the specified winning opening LED 348 at the brightness set in S1252. Therefore, the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always the normal luminance regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a.

  Next, the above-described display effect process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a effect for a big hit (that is, whether it is a big hit) (S1261), If it is inside (S1261: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S1273). In this jackpot effect processing, effect data according to the jackpot effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276, thereby updating the jackpot effect image. After the end of the jackpot effect process (S1273), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1261, if it is not a big hit (S1261: No), it is determined whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is performing the variation display of the third symbol (that is, it is in the process of variation). (S1262). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S1262: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1263).

  The fluctuation start flag (not shown) is a flag instructing the start of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is started when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on in S1263. . This fluctuation start flag is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29), and is set to OFF when starting the fluctuation display of the third symbol.

  If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1263: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1264), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S1265), and the fluctuation flag 273d is turned on. It turns on (S1266).

  After the process of S1266, an initial value is set to a fluctuation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S1267). In addition, the fluctuation time counter which is not shown in figure is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the fluctuation display of the 3rd symbol is started. The initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S1267 is a time obtained from the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the presentation time indicated by the presentation time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1267, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S1268). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S1262, when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed (during fluctuation) (S1262: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S1274) and the processing of S1268 Then, it is judged whether or not it is within the fluctuation time.

  If it is within the fluctuation time as a result of the judgment by the processing of S1268 (S1268: Yes), fluctuation display processing is executed (S1269). The fluctuation display process (S1269) is a process for executing fluctuation display (that is, fluctuation effect) of a symbol (third symbol), and the detailed process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1269, the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1268, if the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S1268: No), setting based on the type command received from main controller 110 The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1270). After the processing of S1270, the during-fluctuation flag 273d is turned off (S1271), the during-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off (S1272), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag is off (S1263: No), each display process is executed (S1275), the display effect process (S1106) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. In each display process (S1275), a display process such as a customer waiting effect or the like is executed when a predetermined time has not elapsed while the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. The detailed process of each display process (S1275) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation display process (S1269) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing variation display processing (S1269) executed in the display effect processing (see FIG. 26).

  In the variation display process (S1269), first, it is determined whether the during-variation mode change flag 273g is on (S1301). As a result of the determination in the process of S1301, if the changing mode change flag 273g is off (S1301: No), since the effect mode is not changed by the operation of the mode change button 22 during high speed change, in such a case Based on the value of the rendering mode counter 273b and the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, the variation display image of the current rendering mode (ie, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b) It sets according to the value of (not shown) (S1305), and shifts processing to S1303.

  That is, in S1305, the fluctuation display image selected by the effect mode indicated by the value of the presentation mode counter 273b and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, and the fluctuation display image of the timing indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter Make settings for Thereby, the image controller 274 reads necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a variation display image (variation display image in frame units) set by the processing of S1305, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81. Let

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in the process of S1301 is that the during-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is on (S1301: Yes), since the effect mode is changed by the operation of the mode change button 22 during high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode Based on the value of the counter 273b and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, to the value of the fluctuation time counter in the previous rendering mode (that is, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b before being updated) A variation display image is set in which the background image in the corresponding variation display image is changed to the background image corresponding to the current rendering mode (that is, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b at this time) (S1302), To step S1303. The image controller 274 reads necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a variation display image (variation display image in frame units) set by the process of S1302, and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the same.

  The variable display image of one frame is a first image layer (layer) in which the third pattern is drawn, a second image layer in which the background image is drawn, and a third image layer in which the advance character symbol is drawn And the first and third image layers are generated corresponding to the previous rendering mode, and the second image layer (the image layer on which the background image is drawn). ) Is switched to the one corresponding to the current rendering mode. Therefore, when the effect mode is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation, only the background image is switched to the one of the new effect mode, so even if the fluctuation is in progress, the effect mode change is not odd It can be realized.

  If the effect mode is changed during high-speed change, the in-change mode change flag 273g remains on until the change display is ended, so the process of S1302 is executed and only the background image is changed. The display is changed to that of (new) effect mode and the variable display is continued. Thereafter, with the stop of the fluctuation display, the fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off, so from the next fluctuation display, the processing of S1305 is executed, and the fluctuation display in the effect mode after the change is the third symbol display It will be displayed on the device 81.

  In S1303, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter, it is determined whether or not high speed fluctuation is in progress (S1303). If it is determined that the speed change is in progress (S1303: Yes), the mode change enable flag 273f is turned on (S1304) because it is the time when the change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible. End the variable display process. On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the processing of S1303, if it is not in high speed fluctuation (S1303: No), the mode changeable flag 273f is turned off (S1306), the fluctuation display processing (S1269) is ended, and the display effect processing Return to (see FIG. 26).

  Next, each display process (S1275) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing each display process (S1275) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26).

  In each display process (S1275), first, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1321). As a result of the determination in the process of S1321, if the customer waiting effect execution flag is on (S1321: Yes), since the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control unit 110, switching to the customer waiting effect image (S1322) The customer waiting effect execution flag is turned off (S1323), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned on (S1324), and each display process is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S1321, if the customer waiting effect execution flag is off (S1321: No), as another process, for example, an error corresponding to the case where an error command is received from the main control device 110 Processing such as setting an image for display is performed (S1325), and each display processing (S1275) is ended, and the process returns to the display effect processing (see FIG. 26).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control apparatus 110, and is an interrupt process executed each time the various commands transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 are received. It is.

  In the command reception interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1401). At this time, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1402.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S1406), and the fluctuation display is started in the third symbol display device 81 The fluctuation effect setting process for setting the fluctuation effect data necessary for performing the process is executed (S1407), and the process shifts to the process of S1402.

  In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect command has been received (S1402). As a result of the judgment by the process of S1402, when the customer waiting rendering command is not received (S1402: No), it shifts to the process of S1403.

  On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect command is received (S1402: Yes), the customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) set in the RAM 273 is turned on (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1403.

  In the process of S1403, it is determined whether a start winning command has been received (S1403). If the result of determination in the process of S1403 is that the start winning command has not been received (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1404.

  On the other hand, when the start winning command is received (S1403: Yes), the start opening LED lighting control processing for controlling the lighting of the start opening LED 347 is executed (S1409), and the process shifts to the processing of S1404. The details of the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether an error command has been received (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that no error command has been received (S1404: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  On the other hand, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), the fourth LED control unit 294 emits light with a lighting pattern (that is, a lighting pattern according to the error content) according to the received error command and normal brightness. The setting is made (S1410, S1411), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1405.

  The lighting pattern and the light emission luminance set in S1410 and S1411 are output to the fourth LED control device 294, and the fourth LED control device 294 is the lighting set in S1410 with the luminance set in S1411 (that is, normal luminance). The notification LED 311 is lighted or blinked in a pattern (that is, a lighting pattern according to the content of the error). As described above, the brightness of the notification LED 311 is always lit or blinked at normal brightness regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode).

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1405). At this time, if another command has not been received (S1405: No), this command reception interrupt processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when another command is received (S1405: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1411), and this command reception interrupt processing is ended. In addition, as processing (S1411) according to other commands, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received, the special figure holding ball number N indicated by the number-of-holds command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Addition of a presentation time to the display of the figure holding number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d), setting of a stop symbol when a type command is received, presentation time addition / subtraction command reception For example, determination of a notice effect (for example, a slip effect, a return effect, etc.) according to a value may be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-mentioned starting opening LED lighting control process (S1209) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1209) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  In the start opening LED lighting control process (S1209), first, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1341). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1341 (S1341: Yes), light emission with normal luminance is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1342), and a predetermined lighting pattern , And sets the fifth LED control device 295 (S1343), ends the starting opening LED lighting control processing (S1209), and returns to the command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1341 (S1341: No), it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344: Yes), light emission with medium brightness is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1345), and the process proceeds to S1343.

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination in the process of S1344, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1344: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is turned off. The setting is made (S1346), the start opening LED lighting control process (S1209) is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  In the start hole LED lighting control process (S1209) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1343 is output to the fifth LED controller 295, and the fifth LED controller 295 starts with the predetermined lighting pattern set in S143. The mouth LED 347 is turned on or blinks.

  In addition, the brightness set in S1342, S1345, 1346 is output to the fifth LED control device 295, and the fifth LED control device 295 lights or blinks the starting aperture LED 347 at the brightness set in S1342, S1345, 1346. .

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the starting opening LED 347 is lighted, blinked, or extinguished with different brightness according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, the brightness of the start opening LED 347 is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and to the medium brightness when the small power saving mode is set. When the large power saving mode is set, the start opening LED 347 is turned off (that is, the brightness is set to zero).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the power consumption is configured to be different depending on the power consumption mode, and the power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23. Power consumption can be reduced (power saving). In addition, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player having high awareness of environmental protection (eco-consciousness) can concentrate on the game without making him feel guilty for power consumption. Can.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the brightness of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 347 is smaller than when the power consumption mode is set to the normal power consumption mode. Since the player is dropped (dropped), the player can realize that he / she is saving electricity by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is changed (the atmosphere is switched) by lowering the luminance of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 34 to 347, the player is also changed to the atmosphere of such effect Can also realize that they are saving electricity. Similarly, in the case of the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361 is reduced, so that the player saves power according to the changing appearance and effect atmosphere. I can feel that I am

  Furthermore, the player can not only change the power consumption mode by the power saving button 23 which can be operated, but also for the specific electric parts as usual even in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). Since the system is configured to operate or emit light, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game, such as maintaining the fun of presentation while performing power saving.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 40. In the first embodiment described above, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, a predetermined electric component (a light emitting means such as the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 or the like) of a plurality of electric components The power consumption is reduced by reducing the luminance and the operation amount of the effect movable body such as the movable body 361.

  In the second embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, as in the large power saving mode in the first embodiment, the predetermined light emitting means and the movable body for effect are not operated (that is, turned off or the operation is stopped). Control the power consumption by However, when the light emitting means and the movable body for effect are not operated, while the power consumption can be suppressed, the visual effect (for example, the effect of the effect) carried by the light emitting means and the movable body for effect decreases. There is a possibility that inconveniences such as loss of interest will occur. As a countermeasure, in the second embodiment, in the power saving mode, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means or the movable body for presentation set as the target of the power saving (that is, turned off or stopped) It is configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, how the operation of the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed in accordance with the power consumption mode in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the power consumption mode is configured from three modes of the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, but in the second embodiment, the power consumption mode is normally It is comprised from two types of modes, the power saving mode in which the power consumption by an electrical component is small compared with the consumption mode and its normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electric components according to the power consumption mode in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 31, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment as well, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electric components operate with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, except for the notification LED 311, the first symbol display device 37, the second display symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81, Each light emitting means is turned off. More specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the light emitting means for effect (inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LED 341 , 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346), start opening LED 347, and specified winning opening LED 348 are turned off. Further, in the power saving mode, the operation of the effect movable body 361 is also stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, in the power saving mode, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346 as light emitting means for effect, the starting opening LED 347, and the specified winning opening LED 348 are turned off . However, various disadvantages may occur when these LEDs (light emitting means) are turned off. For example, when the light emitting means for effect such as the decoration LEDs 341 and 342 are turned off, there is a possibility that the effect of the lighting or blinking by the light emitting means for effect is lost and the interest of the game is reduced. Also, when the specific winning opening LED 348 is turned off, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot game is in progress, and the player feels the pleasure and enjoyment that the player is feeling for being in the jackpot game. There is a possibility of causing it. Similarly, with regard to the movable body for effect, when the operation of the movable body for effect (movable body for effect 361) is stopped by being set to the power saving mode, it may cause a disadvantage that the interest of the game decreases. .

  In order to suppress these problems, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, generates a pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means and the movable body for effect. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 32 is a schematic view for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441, the pseudo side lamp display portion 442, and the pseudo light lamp portion are displayed as areas for displaying the pseudo image of the light emitting means. The third symbol display device 81 in which the notification lamp display portion 443, the pseudo start opening lamp display portion 444 and the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display portion 445 are formed by the opening 86 a of the center frame 86 as a pseudo image of light emitting means. Provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of

  The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 includes a first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a provided on the upper left side of the screen and a second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b provided on the upper right side of the screen. The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (441a, 441b) (that is, in the hatched area), a pseudo image is displayed in a display mode according to the lighting pattern of the decoration LEDs 341, 342 in the normal consumption mode. As a display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 (441a, 441 b) in the power saving mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined color) is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441. The entire area blinks, or the position or color gradation of a predetermined image (for example, a round image or a fish image) flows in a predetermined direction in the area of the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as the mode. Further, the display mode in which the first pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441b do not have to be symmetrical is not necessary, and various display modes with high rendering effects can be adopted.

  The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is adjacent to the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a and is adjacent to the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442a provided on the lower left side of the screen and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b. And a second pseudo side lamp display unit 442 b provided on the lower right side of the screen. The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (442a, 442b) (that is, in the hatched area), a pseudo image is displayed in a display mode according to the lighting pattern of the side LEDs 343 to 345 in the normal consumption mode. The display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 (442a, 442b) in the power saving mode can adopt various display modes similarly to the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 described above.

  The pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 is provided at the upper center of the screen, more specifically, between the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 b. The pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the notification LED 346. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and when the power saving mode is set, the pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 of the notification LED 346 in the normal consumption mode At the lighting timing, a predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking) in the area of the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 (that is, in the hatched area).

  The false start opening lamp display unit 444 is provided at the lower center of the screen, more specifically, between the false specified winning opening lamps 445a and 445b. The false start opening lamp display unit 444 is an area for displaying a false image corresponding to the start opening LED 347. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the start in the normal consumption mode is set when the power saving mode is set. At the lighting timing of the mouth LED 347 (that is, the timing when the ball hits the first entrance 64), a predetermined image is predetermined in the area of the simulated starting opening lamp display unit 444 (that is, in the hatched area). It is displayed in a display mode (for example, lighting or blinking).

  The pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445 includes a first pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445 a provided between the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442 a and the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 and a second pseudo operation. A second pseudo specified winning opening lamp display portion 445b is provided between the side lamp display portion 442b and the pseudo start opening lamp display portion 444. The pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the specified winning opening LED 348. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and a predetermined image is displayed when the power saving mode is set. It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking). In the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, the display mode of the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 is a display mode in which the opening / closing state of the specified winning opening 65a is known. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. If it is, the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display 445 is lit in red, and if the specified winning opening 65 a is closed, the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display 445 is lit in yellow. That is, in the power saving mode, the display contents of the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 express the opening and closing of the specified winning opening 65 a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means is displayed on each of the lamp display portions 441 to 445 in the power saving mode, so that the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur as the light is turned off.

  For example, the light emitting means for effect such as the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 play a role of giving information on the state of the game to the player by being lit or blinking. When the player's state is advantageous by the player, the player can feel a sense of expectation or the like by the light emission mode of the light emitting means for these effects. Therefore, when the light emitting means for the effect is turned off in the power saving mode, it is not possible to obtain information on the state of the game from the light emitting means for the effect, so that the information the player can enjoy Information and changes in the gaming state), which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the game, which may reduce the interest of the game. In addition, since the light emitting means for effect plays a role of enhancing the effect by being lit or flickering, when the light is turned off in the power saving mode, the effect of the effect may be lost and the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means to be turned off is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display portion 441, the pseudo side lamp display portion 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display portion 443 in a mode corresponding to the lighting pattern of each LED 341-346. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem (a decrease in information related to a game or a decrease in the effect of presentation) that may occur as the light emission means is turned off.

  In addition, since the specific winning a prize LED 348 plays a role of making the player recognize that it is in the jackpot game providing a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning a prize opening 65a, the specific winning a prize If the mouth LED 348 is turned off in the power saving mode, there is a possibility that the player feels less pleasure, enjoyment or the like against being in the jackpot game. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 is displayed at the same lighting timing as the specific winning opening LED 348, the joy or enjoyment of being in the jackpot game Can be provided to the player as in the case where the specific winning opening LED 348 is lighted.

  In addition, the starting opening LED 347 emits light (lights up, blinks) each time a chance for winning a big hit lottery (that is, winning of a ball to the first ball entrance 64) occurs. Therefore, the player recognizes that the opportunity of the jackpot lottery has occurred when the starting opening LED 347 is lighted, and expects the jackpot to be selected in the jackpot lottery. That is, the starting opening LED 347 plays the role of giving the player a sense of expectation based on the occurrence of the jackpot lottery event. When the starting opening LED 347 is turned off in the power saving mode, the above-mentioned role may not be played, and the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the starting opening LED 347 to be turned off is displayed at the same lighting timing as the specific winning opening LED 348 (that is, the timing when the ball wins in the first ball entrance 64 and a big win lottery trigger occurs). Therefore, the player can recognize that a jackpot lottery opportunity has occurred as in the case where the specific winning opening LED 348 is lighted, and thus can expect that a jackpot will be selected in the jackpot lottery. .

  Also, in general, since the third symbol display device 81 is a part that displays the big hit lottery after the variable display, it is a part where the player's consciousness tends to be concentrated. In this embodiment, instead of turning off the light emitting means in the power saving mode, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 where the player's awareness tends to be concentrated. The pseudo image can be sufficiently or easily recognized by the player. Therefore, this pseudo image (substitute image) can be sufficiently functioned as a substitute for the light emission means turned off, and the light emission means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) is turned off in the power saving mode. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur with the

  Moreover, since each display parts 441-445 are provided so that the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may be surrounded, the display content (for example, the fluctuation display of a symbol is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) It is possible to prevent the visibility of various effects and the like from being lowered by the display of the pseudo image. Therefore, the inconvenience (for example, the fall of a rendering effect etc.) which may arise by the fall of the visibility of the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be suppressed.

  In particular, the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 are light emitting means corresponding to the pseudo images displayed on the display units 441 to 443, that is, decoration LED 341 respectively. The position according to the arrangement of the LEDs 342 to 345 and the notification LEDs 346 effectively functions as a substitute for the LEDs 341 to 346 and effectively reduces the visual effect associated with the turning off of the LEDs 341 to 346. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is easily recognized by the player as described above, it is displayed even without displaying the power saving mode display 88 as in the first embodiment described above. It is possible to make the player realize that power saving is being performed by the pseudo image. Not only the pseudo image but also the power saving mode display 88 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, each of the pseudo images displayed on each of the display units 441 to 445 is different from the first to third image layers (layers) for displaying variations and effects of symbols. The fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image is formed on the front of the image layer (first to third image layers) for displaying the fluctuation and effects of the symbol, ie, the player. It is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by overlapping on the closer side. Thereby, the pseudo image can be displayed without reducing each data such as the variable display data stored in the character ROM 275, and the control load of the effect control device 117 (MPU 271) accompanying displaying the pseudo image can be reduced. The increase is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the present embodiment, the special drawing reserve number display unit 87 is configured to display at a position not overlapping with each of the display units 441 to 445. As a result, even when a pseudo image is displayed on each of the display portions 441 to 445, the pseudo image and the special figure holding number display portion 87 do not overlap with each other. There is no need to change the display position of the display unit 87. Also in this point, an increase in control load of the effect control device 117 accompanied by displaying the pseudo image is suppressed.

  FIG. 33 is a schematic view for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the effect movable body. As shown in FIG. 33, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed as the third symbol display device instead of operating the effect movable body 361. Displayed on 81.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 is displayed at the timing when the effect movable body 361 is operated, and the motion of the effect movable body 361 is expressed by a moving image. In the example shown in FIG. 33, two simulated images 451 in the shape of clouds are respectively revealed from the left side (left side in a front view) of the screen and are moved in the arrow X2 direction. The movement of the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the movement of the image in one direction (the direction of the arrow X2) as shown in FIG. Various actions that can be expressed can be adopted.

  When the effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable member 361 is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable to make the same shape as the shape of the effect movable body 361 overlapping the screen, and to make the movement (moving direction, moving speed) of the pseudo image 451 the same as the movement of the effect movable body 361. That is, when both the display of the effect movable body 361 and the display of the pseudo image 451 are performed, the pseudo image 451 may be formed and moved so that the effect movable body 361 overlaps the front of the pseudo image 451. preferable. Thereby, even when the movement of the effect movable body 361 is stopped, it is possible to perform an effect as if the effect movable body 361 is operating, and the effect of the effect movable body 361 and the effect Similar effects can be obtained.

  Further, the movement of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not have to be the same as the movement of the effect movable body 361 provided on the pachinko machine 10, and these movements are different. It is also good. The motion image has a higher degree of freedom than the motion of the effect movable body 361 operated by the electric component such as a solenoid or a motor, so the motion of the pseudo image 451 is compared to the motion of the effect movable body 361. It is possible to make it a complicated movement. By making the motion of the pseudo image 451 a complicated motion as compared to the motion of the effect movable body 361, the appearance of flashy or luxurious appearance due to the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) being turned off It is possible to compensate for the reduction in On the other hand, by making the movement of the pseudo image 451 and the movement of the movable body for presentation 361 the same, the player does not feel discomfort due to the difference between the presentation in the normal consumption mode and the presentation in the power saving mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Similarly, the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not have to be the same as the shape of the effect movable body 361 provided on the pachinko machine 10, and these shapes are different. May be If the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed in the power saving mode is different from the shape of the effect movable body 361, effects unique to the power saving mode can be made, and provision of added value by setting the power saving mode It becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the pseudo image 451 is different from any of the first to third image layers for displaying the variation and effect of the symbol and the fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means. It is configured to be formed in the fifth image layer. As a result, the contents displayed on the first to third image layers which are image layers for displaying the fluctuation and effect of the symbol (that is, the fluctuation display and effects of the symbol, etc.) are also included in the fourth image layer. The pseudo image 451 can be displayed without affecting the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means to be displayed. Therefore, the pseudo image 451 can be displayed by the moving image data of the pseudo image 451 instead of using the dedicated variable display data or presentation data including the pseudo image 451, and the moving image data can be used in various scenes. , Is advantageous in terms of storage capacity. In the example shown in FIG. 33, the fifth image on which the pseudo image 451 is formed is disposed behind the first to fourth image layers (that is, the side away from the player). The arrangement order is not particularly limited.

  Note that the effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the shape and movement of the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 are the same as those of the effect movable body 361. When making it the same as the movement, only the data of the moving image (the variable display data and the effect data) including the pseudo image 451 may be prepared. For example, when a shutter member for effect overlapping the front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of closing is provided as the effect movable body 361, the variable display corresponding to the effect that the shutter member for effect opens and closes As data and effect data, data of a moving image including a pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect shutter member is prepared. When moving image data including the pseudo image 451 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 replacing the movable body for effect 361 is visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, even in the case of the normal consumption mode, since the effect movable body 361 is positioned in front of the pseudo image 451, the player visually recognizes the effect movable body 361, so the effect movable body 361 There is no problem even if the pseudo image 451 is displayed behind the. Therefore, in such a case, only the data of the moving image including the pseudo image 451 may be prepared instead of both the variable display data and the effect data, and the moving image data of the pseudo image 451. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode, so the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur. That is, since the effect movable body 361 plays a role of enhancing the effect by its operation, when the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped in the power saving mode, the effect is lost and the game is entertained May decrease. However, since the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed as a moving image on the third symbol display device 81, it is thereby possible to compensate for the decrease in effect due to the operation stop of the effect movable body 361 it can.

  FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, since the power consumption mode is two types of the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode, the large power saving mode flag 273 c is omitted in the RAM 273 of the second embodiment, and the power saving counter 273 a is replaced with It has a power saving flag 273h. In addition, the RAM 273 of the second embodiment has a start winning combination flag 273i.

  The power saving flag 273 h is a flag indicating which one of two types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode and power saving mode) is set as the power consumption mode. When the power saving mode flag 273 h is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, is set to the normal power consumption mode. The power saving mode flag 273 h is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is alternately switched on and off each time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The start winning combination flag 273i is a flag indicating that a ball has won in the first ball entry port 64 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. When the start winning combination flag 273i is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the ball has won at the first ball entry port 64 in the power saving mode. The start winning flag 273i is set to ON when the ball hits the first ball entry port 64 in the power saving mode, and the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo starting opening lamp display 444 associated with the winning is finished, It is set to off (ie, "0"). The start winning combination flag 273i is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. The start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the second embodiment which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the second embodiment is executed after the end of the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the main processing of the second embodiment, the pseudo lamp display processing (S2101) is performed after the effect movable body control processing (S1107), the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from the main processing of.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the second embodiment, power consumption setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The processing contents of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of this embodiment have different points from the above-described first embodiment, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). In the second embodiment, regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, all three types of effect modes can be selected by the mode change button 22. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter updating process (S1225) in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed The value of the effect mode counter 273b is incremented by one each time, and when the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 2, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is changed to processing for zero clearing.

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103). At this time, if 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103: Yes), the voice lamp presentation process is executed (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105, and 1 ms or more has not elapsed In the case (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1105. The processing contents of the sound lamp rendering process (S1104) of the present embodiment have different points from the first embodiment described above, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, in the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode in the variable display process of S1269, the jackpot effect process of S1273, etc. The fifth image layer (an image layer for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the movable object for presentation) of the pseudo image (for example, the pseudo image 451) corresponding to the movable object for presentation 361 at the timing of moving the movable member 361 A process of forming an image on the other image layer and displaying it is performed. The formation of the pseudo image on the fifth image layer is performed based on the moving image data of the pseudo image.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1107, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, a pseudo lamp display process is performed, which is a process of displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means on each display unit 441 to 445 (S2101). Details of the pseudo lamp display processing (S2101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the pseudo lamp display process (S2101), or when it is determined in S1105 that 20 ms has not yet passed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the first embodiment described above Similarly to the above, the processing of S1108 to S1112 is executed.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the second embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the process of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201). If it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No), the power saving flag 273h is set on (S2202), and if the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes) The power saving flag 273h is set to off (S2203). Then, after the process of S2202 or S2203, the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the audio lamp presentation process (S1104) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the second embodiment.

  In the audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the present embodiment, first, a lamp output process (S1241) is executed. The lamp output process (S 1241) of the second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment described above, with various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like. , The processing contents are different from the first embodiment described above, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. . After the lamp output process (S1241), the effect button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1242) as in the first embodiment described above.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S1242), it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241). As a result of the determination in the process of S2241, when the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2241: No), as in the first embodiment described above, The lamp editing process (S1243), the sound editing / output process (S1244), and the liquid crystal effect execution managing process (S1245) are executed, the voice lamp effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 273h is on as a result of the determination in the processing of S2241 (S2241: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are light emitting means to be controlled. Since the light sources 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, the setting of the lighting pattern for the light emitting means is not necessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S1243) is skipped, and the sound editing / output process (S1244) and the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245) are executed as in the first embodiment described above. The voice lamp presentation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S1243) is not executed when the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S1243) may be executed.

  Next, the lamp output process (S1241) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) according to the second embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251), and if the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the power saving flag 273h is turned on or not. It discriminates (S2251).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S2251, when the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2251: No), as in the first embodiment described above, For the sixth LED control device 296, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1252), and the process proceeds to S2252.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2251: Yes), the sixth LED control device 296 is checked. Turn off is set (S2253), and the process proceeds to S2252. As a result of the process of S2253, the specific winning opening LED 348 is extinguished, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 as a substitute for the specific winning opening LED 348 being extinguished ) Is displayed on the pseudo specified winning opening lamp display unit 445 (see S2265 in FIG. 39).

  If the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a jackpot (S1251: No), the process proceeds to S2252. In S2252, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2252). When the power saving flag 273h is off as a result of the determination in the process of S2252 (S2252: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are determined based on the normal brightness as in the first embodiment described above. Light emission is set (S1254), and the lighting pattern edited in S1243 previously executed is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and lamp output processing To return to the voice lamp presentation process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 273h is on as a result of the determination in the process of S2252 (S2252: Yes), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are the same as in the first embodiment described above. Turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37). As a result of the process of S1258, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 which are light emitting means for effect are extinguished, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the light emitting means for effect which is extinguished Alternatively, pseudo images are displayed on the display portions 441 to 443 (see S2263 in FIG. 39). After the process of S1258, the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, the above-described pseudo lamp display process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a pseudo lamp display process (S2101) performed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the second embodiment described above.

  In the pseudo lamp display process (S2101), first, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2261). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off (S2261: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo image is displayed on the display portions 441 to 445 on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is not necessary to display, in such a case, the pseudo lamp display processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is on and the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2261: Yes), the pseudo lamp editing process is executed (S2262). The simulated lamp editing process (S2262) is a process corresponding to the lamp editing process (S1243) executed in the normal consumption mode, and each display unit 441 to 445 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Is a process of setting the display mode of the pseudo image to be displayed.

  After the processing of the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 442, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 are pseudo images based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process. Is controlled to be displayed in the set display mode (S2263). The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 442, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 as an alternative to the light emitting means for effect turned off by setting the power saving mode by the process of S2263 (in the present embodiment, the LED 341 to 346). The pseudo notification lamp display 443 displays a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means.

  After the processing of S2263, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S2264), and if the jackpot is in progress (S2264: Yes), the pseudo specified winning opening based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing processing (S2262) Control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed in the set display mode on the lamp display unit 445 (S2265). As a substitute for the specific winning opening LED 348 which has been turned off by setting the power saving mode by the process of S2265, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 is displayed on the pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445.

  After the process of S2265, the process proceeds to S2266. If the result of the determination in the process of S2264 is not a big hit (S2264: No), the process of S2265 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2266.

  In S2266, it is determined whether or not the start winning combination flag 273i is on (S2266). If it is determined that the start winning combination flag 273i is on (S2266: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to finish displaying the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2266: Yes) S2267).

  If it is not the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 as a result of the determination by the processing of S2267, that is, if the pseudo image is continuously displayed on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2267: No), based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed in the set display mode on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (S2268), The pseudo lamp display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). By the process of S2268, a pseudo image corresponding to the starting opening LED 347 is displayed on the pseudo starting opening lamp display unit 444 as a substitute for the starting opening LED 347 which is turned off because the power saving mode is set.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo starting opening lamp display unit 444 as a result of the determination by the processing of S2267 (S2267: Yes), the start winning flag 273i is set to OFF ( S2269), the pseudo lamp display process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In addition, as a result of the determination in the processing of S2266, if the start winning combination flag 273i is off (S2266: No), it is not the timing to display the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444, so the pseudo lamp display process is ended. Then, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) according to the second embodiment. The starting opening LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29). Among the processes executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29), the process similar to that of the above-described first embodiment is executed except for the start opening LED lighting control process (S1409) shown in FIG. Be done.

  In the start hole LED lighting control process (S1409) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2341). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2341: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, light emission with normal brightness is set (S1342), a predetermined lighting pattern is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1343), the start opening LED lighting control processing is ended, and the command reception interrupt processing is performed. Return to (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S2341, when the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2341: Yes), the same as the first embodiment described above. In the fifth LED control device 295, turn off is set (S1346). As a result of the process of S1346, the start opening LED 347 is turned off, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the pseudo image corresponding to the start opening LED 347 is simulated as a substitute for the turned off start opening LED 347. It is comprised so that it may display on the starting opening lamp display part 444 (refer S2268 of FIG. 39). After the processing of S1346, the start winning combination flag 273i is set to ON (S2342), the start opening LED lighting control processing is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 29).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, one of the predetermined electric components (the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the decoration LEDs 341, 342, etc. While the light emitting means of the part and the movable object for presentation such as the movable object for presentation 361 are turned off or stopped, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the predetermined electric component which is the target of the power saving It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the light emission mode or the operation mode of the electric component.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visual effects (for example, the reduction in rendering effects) caused by the turning off or stopping of the electric component. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 used for performing variable display of symbols and jackpot effect etc. is used as a display device used for displaying a pseudo image, the electric component is turned off or the operation is stopped. Power consumption can be reduced (power saving) by the amount of power consumption. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, since it is possible to suppress the reduction in visual effects (for example, rendering effects) in the power saving mode, it is possible to save power and to suppress the decrease in interest of the game. Can be provided to the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. In this third embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, the variable display of symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD, and the power saving is configured for saving power by using a 7-segment LED which consumes less power than the LCD. Power consumption is reduced by using the symbol display device 181. In the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed in accordance with the power consumption mode in the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode and the power saving mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than that of the normal power consumption mode. Composed of different types of modes.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electric components according to the power consumption mode in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 41, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment as well, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electric components operate with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, light emitting means for effect (inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower dish LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LEDs 341 and 342, side Among the LEDs 343 to 345 and the notification LED 346), light emitting means other than the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 (ie, outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LED 323, decoration LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and The notification LED 346) is all turned off. On the other hand, for the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304, the luminance is dropped from the normal luminance to the middle luminance.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 of the light emitting means for effect are lit (or blinked) at medium brightness. In the power saving mode, although all of the light emitting means (decorative LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346) for effect provided on the game board 13 are turned off, the inner circumference LED 301 surrounding the periphery of the game board 13 By turning on or blinking 304, it is possible to suppress that the impression of the game board 13 that turns to a line of sight when the player performs a game becomes dark. At that time, since the brightness of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal brightness to the middle brightness, the power consumption of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is also reduced as compared with the normal consumption mode. You can get it.

  Further, outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 arranged apart from the game board 13 as compared with the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and light emitting means (lower dish LEDs 321 and 322 and effect button LED 323) provided in the lower dish unit 15 are Since the ratio at which the player is conscious during the game is relatively low, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are lit or the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are turned on even if the light emitting means (peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and effect button LED 323) By blinking, the power saving effect and the rendering effect can be suitably achieved.

  Moreover, even if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the notification LED 311, the specific winning opening LED 348, the first symbol display device 37, and the second display symbol display device As for 83, the normal luminance is maintained as in the first and second embodiments described above.

  Therefore, by keeping the luminance of the notification LED 311 as the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode, various errors generated in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the errors are displayed. It is possible for the player to quickly return to the game quickly and to detect the fraud early. In addition, by leaving the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 as normal luminance, it is ensured to the player that a jackpot is being played to provide a state advantageous to the player by opening the specific winning opening 65a. It can be made to recognize and it can prevent reducing the pleasure and pleasure which a player feels to being in the jackpot game.

  In addition, devices that display a lottery result relating to the player's benefit, such as the first symbol display device 37 and the second display symbol display device 83, always have normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode. Since the player is left as it is, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery.

  On the other hand, unlike the first and second embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power. However, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, it is not possible to display a decorative symbol (third symbol) indicating the lottery result of the big hit. The stop symbol indicating the jackpot result of the jackpot is also displayed by the lighting color of the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37, but the player tends to pay attention to the decorative third symbol whose lottery result is easy to distinguish Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished in the power saving mode and the third symbol can not be seen, the player can not determine the lottery result of the jackpot. Therefore, for example, when it is difficult for a player to grasp the lottery result after winning a prize in the first entry ball slot 64, and thereby it is felt that the tempo of the game has become worse or the detachment continues, the first entry ball slot A disadvantage may occur, such as doubting whether or not the drawing that should have been made on the occasion of the prize for 64 has actually been made.

  In order to suppress such inconveniences, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a symbol display device 181 for power saving composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and is changed to the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode. The power saving symbol display device 181 is used to display a stop symbol. As shown in FIG. 41, the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off in the normal consumption mode, and is lit with normal brightness when the power saving mode is set. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the stop symbol is displayed by numbers on the symbol display device 181 for power saving which is the 7-segment LED instead of the third symbol display device 81, so the player draws the jackpot lottery immediately after the symbol is stopped. The result can be easily determined, and the problems and the like exemplified above can be prevented. In addition, since the 7-segment LED consumes less power than an LCD such as the third symbol display device 81, a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off in the power saving mode by turning off the backlight of the LCD so that the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. Thereby, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be returned early.

  Next, the power saving symbol display device 181 described above will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.42 (a) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, and FIG.42 (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the power saving symbol display device 181 is configured of three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, and appears when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode to display the third symbol display device 81. Are provided on the front side (the side facing the player) of the shutter member 180 that covers the shutter. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 42 (a), the power saving symbol display device 181 has three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c in the top-bottom direction near the end on the right side on the front side of the left shutter member 180L. In the vertical direction). Although not shown, a substrate for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) is provided on the back side of the left shutter member 180L.

  The shutter member 180 appears from the left side of the opening 86a of the center frame 86 and covers the left side of the visible area of the third symbol display device 81 (the area of the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a) The right shutter member 180R appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81. The shutter members 180 </ b> L and 180 </ b> R are supported by a drive unit (not shown) so as to be vertically movable in the left and right direction.

  A drive unit (not shown) serves as an operating device (not shown) for moving the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R, including a motor capable of positioning control such as a servomotor and a stepping motor, and rotation of a rotor of the motor It has a rack and pinion mechanism that converts motion into linear motion. The moving mechanism of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R is a known technique, and therefore the details thereof will be omitted. However, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are straight lines converted from rotational movement of the motor by the rack and pinion mechanism. Move in the lateral direction by exercise.

  When the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode, the shutter members 180 are in the open state in which the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are accommodated in the center frame 86. When the shutter member 180 is in the open state, the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the player, and the player changes the display of the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the jackpot effect Etc. can be viewed.

  When the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the motor of the operating device (not shown) is driven and controlled, whereby the left shutter member 180L is moved in the closing movement direction (arrow ML direction) facing right. The right shutter member 180R moves in the closing movement direction (arrow MR direction) facing left. The left and right shutter members 180L and 180R stop in contact with each other substantially at the center of the opening 86a of the center frame 86, thereby forming a closed state.

  When the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is closed, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the visible area of the third symbol display device 81 (ie, the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a). The region is covered by the shutter member 180.

  As described above, since the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) are provided on the front side (the side facing the player) of the left shutter member 180L, the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are in the open state. If the shutter member 180 is closed, it can not be seen because it is hidden by the center frame 86, and becomes visible. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the symbol display devices for power saving 181 (181a to 181c) appear and can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player can recognize that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode from the shutter member 180 in the closed state being in the closed state, the appearance of the symbol display device for power saving 181, and the like.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and uses the symbol display device for power saving 181 (181a to 181c) instead. The stop symbol (the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed. Of the three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, the first seven-segment LED 181a disposed at the top corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the middle row The second 7-segment LED 181b disposed in the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the third 7-segment LED 181c disposed in the lowermost row is the third symbol display device 81 Corresponds to the below-described pattern row Z3 displayed on.

  At the time of the power saving mode, after these seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c are variably displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is represented by numbers and stopped. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is selected by the jackpot lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating the probability variation jackpot (for example, the combination of the same odd value) is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 a to 181 c as a stop symbol. When the big hit is selected by the big hit lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers (for example, the combination of the same even value) indicating that the big hit is usually displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 a to 181 c as the stop symbol. . On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is selected for out-of-lot, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating out-of-range is displayed as a stop symbol on the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, the left shutter member 180L is formed with a notch 180La above the end of the right side (the side in the closing movement direction of the left shutter member 180L). Similarly, in the right side shutter member 180R, a notch 180Ra is formed below the end of the left side (the side in the closing movement direction of the right side shutter member 180R). When the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are in the closed state, the player can view the screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the cutouts 180La, 180Ra.

  As described above, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, so the screen of the third symbol display device 81 seen from the notches 180La and 180Ra is a black screen. is there. Therefore, the player can confirm the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 through the cutouts 180La and 180Ra, and knows that the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished based on the confirmation. be able to. Therefore, from the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 visible through the notches 180La and 180Ra, it can be realized that the user is cooperating in power saving.

  FIG. 43 is a schematic view for explaining the process of shifting the power saving symbol display device 181 to the closed state. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, but the turn-off of the third symbol display device 81 is the display of the third symbol display device 81 Rather than deleting the content in an instant (turning off), the display content is gradually reduced, and after being reduced to a predetermined size, the display content is deleted.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, as shown in FIG. 43, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced. At this time, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color. Note that various colors such as black and red can be adopted as the lighting color (predetermined color) of the area 81 b. Then, after the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size, the display content of the display area 81a is erased.

  On the other hand, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is gradually moved in the closing movement direction (arrow ML direction, arrow MR direction) in accordance with the reduction speed of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the shutter member 180 is gradually moved in the closing movement direction so as to increase the overlap with the area 81 b which is enlarged as the display area 81 a is reduced. Then, after the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the display contents of the display area 81a are erased, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are moved to a position where they are in contact with each other (that is, until completely closed). Let

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the player can visually recognize both the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181 temporarily. It is done. Therefore, the player compares the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181 while switching the device used as the display device of the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery). It can be observed. This makes it possible for the player to convince the player that disadvantages such as a change in stop symbol will not occur with switching from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. It can be played without having a sense of distrust.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stop symbol is the third symbol display device 81, particularly if the variable display of symbols is executed when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size. The shutter member 180 is configured so as not to be in a completely closed state until it is displayed on both the and power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c). In the example shown in FIG. 43, “777” is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6), and “7” stops at each of the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the symbol display device 181 for power saving. It is displayed as a pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a character symbol corresponding to a numeral is displayed as a main symbol (see FIG. 6), but in FIG. 43, the character symbol is indicated by a numeral for convenience.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving are displayed when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the variable display of symbols is executed. Since the stop symbol is displayed on both of 181 and the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the stop symbol (the result of the jackpot lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is justified without doubt Can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from having a sense of distrust.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) It will be closed gradually. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player on switching from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode, and it is possible to impress the player that power saving is being performed. In particular, since switching from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode is performed by the player operating the power saving button 23, the player visually recognizes the display area 81a which is gradually reduced and the shutter member 180 which is gradually closed. In this case, you can realize that you are cooperating with saving electricity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating a big hit is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle line L2, and among the stop symbols, the number of the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a. The numbers in the middle symbol column Z2 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181b, and the numbers in the lower pattern column Z3 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181c, but the predetermined combination number indicating a jackpot is valid other than the middle line L2 Also in the case where the lines (left line L1, right line L3, right upward line L4, left upward line L5) are aligned, the numbers of the upper symbol row Z1 are displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a, and the numbers of the middle symbol row Z2 are 7 segments It may be displayed on the LED 181 b, and the numbers in the lower row design Z3 may be displayed on the 7-segment LED 181 c. In addition, when it is the combination which the stop design shows the disassembly, the number of each design column Z1-Z3 which is lined up on the particular effective line (for example, middle line L2), 7 point LED181a-LED181c similar to the case of big hit Display it.

  FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, since the display of the pseudo image (substitute image) is not performed, the configuration of the second embodiment (273b, 273d to 273h; see FIG. 34) excluding the start winning combination flag 273i, is the RAM 273 of this embodiment. In addition to the above, the in-transition flag 273 j and the closing start flag 273 k are included.

  The during-transition flag 273 j is a flag indicating whether the state of the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. If the in-transition flag 273 j is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is in transition. On the other hand, when the transition flag 273 j is set to off (ie, “0”), the state of the shutter member 180 is not in transition, ie, the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. During the transition, the flag 273 j is set to ON when the closing or opening of the shutter member 180 is started by the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. When open, it is set to off. The in-transition flag 273 j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 273k is a flag indicating that the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state have started closing. When the closing start flag 273 k is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the open state has started closing. The closing start flag 273 k is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) when the power is turned on, and in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 273 h is off), the player operates the power saving button 23. Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when the closing of the shutter 180 is started, it is set to be off.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 45 to 50. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. Further, the start-up process and the command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 and 29, respectively.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the third embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the third embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 as in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the main processing of the third embodiment, the processing of S3101 to S3104 is performed after the effect movable body control processing (S1107), the main of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from processing.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the third embodiment, power consumption setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). The process contents of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of this embodiment have different points from the above-described first embodiment, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). Also in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, three types of effect modes are performed by the mode change button 22 regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode. Both are configured to be selectable. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter updating process in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment as in the second embodiment described above. Each time (S1225) is executed, 1 is added to the value of the rendering mode counter 273b, and when the value of the rendering mode counter 273b exceeds 2, the processing of changing the value of the rendering mode counter 273b to zero clear processing is performed. .

  After the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103). At this time, if 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1103: Yes), the voice lamp presentation process is executed as in the first embodiment (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1105.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, as in the second embodiment described above.

  After the processing of S1107, the power saving symbol display control processing, which is processing for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S3101). The details of the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S3101), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102: Yes), the apparatus used as a display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) is switched to the power saving mode from the normal consumption mode. A power saving mode transition process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S3103). The details of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S3102: No) as a result of the determination in the processing of S3102, the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode when the device used as the display device for the stop symbol is switched. A power saving mode release process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S3104). The details of the power saving mode canceling process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) or the power saving mode cancellation process (S3104), the processes of S1108 to S1112 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. Also, if it is determined in S1105 that 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S1105: No), the processing in S1108 to S1112 is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Do.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the third embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation by the processing of S1201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3201). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273 j is on (S 3201: Yes), the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. , End the power consumption mode setting process, and return to the main process (see FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is in operation, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-transition flag 273 j is off as a result of the determination in the processing of S 3201 (S 3201: No), the in-transition flag 273 j is set to on (S 3202). Next, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201).

  If it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No), the power saving flag 273h is set on (S2202), and the closing start flag 273k is set on (S3203). The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 273h is set to off (S2203), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the main process (FIG. Return to 45).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the lamp output processing (S1241) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) according to the third embodiment. The lamp output process (S1241) of the third embodiment is a process executed in the sound lamp effect process (S1104) in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment. It is to be noted that, of the processing executed in the sound lamp rendering processing (S1104), processing similar to that of the first embodiment described above is executed except for the lamp output processing (S1241) shown in FIG.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1251). If the jackpot is in progress (S1251: Yes), the first embodiment is the same as the first embodiment. For the 6 LED control device 296, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1252), and the process proceeds to S3251. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3251.

  In S3251, it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S3251). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S3251: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the first to third LEDs Light emission with normal brightness is set for the control devices 291 to 293 (S1254), and the lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed at the previous time is sent to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 Then, the setting is made (S1255), the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp presentation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3251: Yes), the first LED control device 291 is checked. Setting is performed so that the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 emit light at medium brightness (S3252). Next, the first LED control device 291 is set to turn off the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 (S3253), and the second and third LED control devices 292 and 293 are set to turn off (S3254). As described above, in the power saving mode, the processing of S3252 to S3254 is performed, so that only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 of the light emission means for effect are lit (or blink) at medium brightness, and the other light emission means The LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323) are turned off.

  After the process of S3254, the process of S1255 is executed, the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process. However, if the power saving flag 273h is on, the processing of S3253 and S3254 is executed, and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 are turned off. Then, the lighting pattern for the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 or the specific winning opening LED 348 among the lighting patterns edited in S1243 executed last time is set for the first LED control device 291 or the sixth LED control device 296. In the lamp editing process (S1243), when the power saving flag 273h is on, the lighting patterns of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower tray LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 may not be set.

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S3101), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3401). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off (S3401: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and there is no need to display by the symbol display device for power saving 181, so Turns off the power saving symbol display device 181 (S3417), ends the power saving symbol device display control processing, and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress. It discriminates (S3402). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3402, if it is not a jackpot (S3402: No), it is discriminated whether or not it is in the process of fluctuation (during the display of fluctuation of the symbol) (S3403). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S3403: No), it is determined whether the change start flag (not shown) is on as in the process of S1263 in the display effect process (see FIG. 26) (S3404).

  If the result of determination in the process of S3404 is that the change start flag is off (S3404: No), each display process is executed (S3416). In this display process (S3416), a process of setting an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, a process of S1322 or a process of setting an image in the process of S1325 is omitted. The same processing as the display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment is executed. After execution of each display process (S3416), the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S3417), the power saving symbol device display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3404, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S3404: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S3405), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S3406), and the fluctuation is in progress. The flag 273d is turned on (S3407). After the process of S3407, as in the process of S1267 in the display effect process (see FIG. 26), an initial value is set in the fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S3408).

  After the processing of S3408, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S3409). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3403, if it is in the midst of fluctuation (S3403: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S3415), and it proceeds to the processing of S3409. Make a decision on

  If it is within the fluctuation time as a result of the judgment by the processing of S3409 (S3409: Yes), fluctuation display by the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S3410). That is, the segment patterns of the seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 are varied. After the processing of S3410, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S3409, if the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S3409: No), setting based on the type command received from main controller 110 The stopped symbols are displayed on the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) (S3411). After the processing of S3411, the in-fluctuation flag 273d is turned off (S3412), the in-fluctuation mode change flag 273g is turned off (S3413), the power saving symbol display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45). .

  If the result of the determination in the process of S3402 is that the jackpot is in progress (S3402: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S3414). In the power saving mode, when a big hit is generated, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the processing of S3414, so that the player can recognize that the big hit is in progress by visually recognizing the blinking. It can be recognized. In the power saving mode, since the display mode of the power saving symbol display device 181 in the jackpot is different from the other states such as in the movement, it is possible to play the jackpot providing the state advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the person surely recognize, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electric component. After the processing of S3414, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  Next, the power saving mode shift process (S3103) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process (S3103) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S3103), first, it is determined whether the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421). At this time, if the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421: YES), the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, and the shutter member 180 (180L, 180L, Since it is the timing to start the closing of 180R), in this case, first, the closing start flag 273k is set to OFF (S3422).

  After the process of S3422, the reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are set (S3423), and the process proceeds to S3424. When the processing of S3423 is executed, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display effect processing (see FIG. 26) is formed so as to be reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the third symbol display device It is displayed in the 81 display area 81a. On the other hand, the motor of the operating device (not shown) is controlled such that the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) are closed in accordance with the reduction speed of the image. Thus, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction rate. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing start flag 273k is off (S3421: No), the process of S3422, S3423 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3424.

  In S3424, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3424). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273j is off (S3424: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The migration process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 273 j is on (S 3424: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 in transition to the closed state has reached the predetermined position (S 3424). S3425). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S3425: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, and the main process Return to (see FIG. 45).

  If the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position (S3425: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S3425, it is determined whether the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S3426).

  As a result of the discrimination by the process of S3426, if it is not in stop (S3426: No), the reduction of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427), and the process is changed to S3428 Transition. On the other hand, if the process is stopped (S3426: Yes), the process of S3427 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3428.

  At S3428, it is determined whether or not it is in motion (during symbol display of symbols) (S3428). At this time, if it is not during fluctuation (S3428: No), it is judged whether or not fluctuation display of symbols has been started (S3429). At this time, if fluctuation display of symbols is not started (S3249: No), predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after closing of the shutter member 180 (or reduction of the display area 81a) is stopped by the processing of S3427. Is determined (S3430).

  As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3430, when the closing display of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the variable display of the symbol is not executed (that is, S3428: No and S3429: No), and the predetermined time has not passed. (S3430: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S3430, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S3431), and The symbol display device 81 is turned off (S3432). Therefore, when the variation display of the symbol is not performed after the closing is stopped by the shutter member 180 reaching the predetermined position, the shutter member 180 is completely closed after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the third The symbol display device 81 is turned off. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 is turned off after the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player is allowed to display an image in a display area 81a of a predetermined size. It is hard to feel discomfort due to the 81a being erased.

  When the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player can view the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 only through the notches 180La and 180Ra. Here, when a color such as red is adopted as the lighting color of the area 81 b, after the shutter member 180 is completely closed, clearly identify the change in color visually recognized from the notches 180La and 180Ra. Can. Therefore, the player can strongly recognize that the power saving mode is in effect by the clear color change, and can strongly realize that he / she is cooperating in power saving.

  In S3432, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off by turning off the backlight of the LCD so that the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. By not interrupting the power supply to the image controller 274, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be restored early.

  After the processing of S3432, the in-transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3433), the power saving mode transition processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S3428 is that it is changing (S3428: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter (not shown) is 0 or not (S3434). Also, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3429, also when the fluctuation display of symbols is started (S3429: Yes), the processing is shifted to S3434.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3434 that the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the timing at which the fluctuation time ends (S3434: Yes), the processing is shifted to S3431. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the processing of S3431 (full closing of the shutter) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is not 0 as a result of the determination in the processing of S3434 (S3434: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to wait for the value of the fluctuation time counter to become 0. Return to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the shutter member 180 is moving at the time when the closing is stopped by reaching the predetermined position, or the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped. When the variable display of the symbol is started, the shutter member 180 is not completely closed until the variable display ends. That is, when the variable display of symbols is executed in the display area 81a reduced to a predetermined size, the stop symbol is the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving 181 (181a to 181c). The shutter member 180 is configured not to be completely closed until it is displayed on both sides. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is set to the power saving mode and thus the legitimacy without doubt. It is possible to prevent the person from having a sense of mistrust.

  Next, the power saving mode release processing (S3104) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode release process (S3104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode releasing process (S3104), first, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3441). At this time, if the in-transition flag 273j is off (S3441: No), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of determination by the processing of S3441, when the flag 273j during transition is on (S3441: Yes), the shutter member 180 is in a completely open state, and in such a case, the third symbol display device 81 Lights up (S3442). When the process of S3442 is executed, the image formed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26) is displayed over the entire visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S3442, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S3442). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, the shutter member 180 is completely turned on after the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. Open. At this time, since the shutter member 180 is opened after the third symbol display device 81 is turned on, the dark screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not seen from between the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the switching from the light-off state of the third symbol display device 81 to the lighting state, and it is difficult to feel a sense of discomfort in switching. After the processing of S3442, the in-transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3444), the power saving mode cancellation processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181 Is configured as. The seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol according to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to, and the player is the jackpot lottery There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern which is easy to determine the result of. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished and the stop symbol by the third symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and thereby the tempo of the game becomes worse, or If the deviation continues, it may cause inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery has been truly or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery is represented by a combination of numerals using the symbol display device for power saving 181 As configured as described above, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the symbol display device 181 for power saving, the third symbol After the display corresponding to the display content (for example, the fluctuation display of the symbol and the jackpot effect) displayed on the display device 81 is also displayed on the symbol display device 181 for power saving, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off Is configured as. That is, after displaying the same contents on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181, the display device used to display the stop symbol is displayed from the third symbol display device 81. It is comprised so that it may switch to the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the fluctuation display of symbols and the stop symbol etc.) and the display contents displayed on the symbol display device for power saving 181 are justified without doubt. This can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from having a sense of distrust.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, only the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 surrounding the periphery of the game board 13 among the light emitting means for effecting are lit (or blinked) Since this is done, it is possible to suppress that the impression of the game board 13 which looks at when the player plays a game becomes dark. At that time, since the brightness of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal brightness to the middle brightness, the power consumption of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 is also reduced compared to the normal consumption mode. Power savings can be obtained.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. Also in the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, when the power saving mode is set, the variable display of symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81, and the power consumption is smaller than that of the LCD 7. The power consumption is reduced by using the power saving symbol display device 181 configured of segment LEDs. In the fourth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by an LCD as in the first and second embodiments. In the third embodiment described above, the power saving mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned on. However, in the fourth embodiment, use of the power-saving symbol display device 181 is started at the timing when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size. In the fourth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments described above are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. The RAM 273 according to the fourth embodiment has a closing stop flag 271 in addition to the configuration (273b, 273d to 273h, 273j, 273k; see FIG. 44) according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 51, the small letter "l (el)" of the block body is marked with a cursive el.

  The closing stop flag 2731 is a flag indicating whether or not the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R), which shifts from the open state to the closed state, is stopped at a predetermined position. When the closing stop flag 2731 is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the shutter member 180 is stopped at a predetermined position. On the other hand, when the closing stop flag 2731 is set to OFF (ie, "0"), the shutter member 180 is not stopped at the predetermined position, that is, the shutter member 180 changes from the open state to the closed state. Indicates that it is in transition, completely closed, or completely open. The closing stop flag 271l is set to ON when the shutter member 180 for transitioning from the open state to the closed state reaches a predetermined position, and is then set to OFF when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Note that the closing stop flag 271l is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 52 and 53. The control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 18 as in the third embodiment described above. Further, the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is also as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, as in the third embodiment described above.

  In addition, the main processing of the fourth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117, is skipped when the closing stop flag 2731 is on, and the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S3101) The same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above is executed except that the processing of the power saving mode transition processing (S3103) is different.

  Next, a power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment is a closing stop flag instead of the process of S3401 in the power saving symbol display control process (see FIG. 48) of the third embodiment. This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the process (S4401) of determining whether 2731 is on is performed.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether the closing stop flag 2731 is on (S4401). At this time, if the closing stop flag 2731 is off (S4401: No), the processing of S3417 is executed as in the third embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing stop flag 2731 is on as a result of the determination in the processing of S3401 (S4401: Yes), the processing of S3402 to S3417 is executed as in the third embodiment.

  Next, the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode shift process (S3103) according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3421 to S3426 are executed as in the third embodiment described above. Here, as a result of the determination in the processing of S3426, if the shutter member 180 is not stopped at the predetermined position (S3426: No), the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is the same as in the third embodiment described above. The reduction and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427).

  After the processing of S3427, the closing stop flag 271l is set to ON (S4421). By setting the closing stop flag 271l to ON, the use of the power saving symbol display devices 181 (181a to 181c) is started (see FIG. 52). Therefore, at this timing, the display of the content corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the symbol display device for power saving 181.

  After the process of S4421, as in the third embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 by the process of 3427 is stopped (S3430) . If it is determined that the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S3426: Yes), the process of S3427 and S4421 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3430.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S3430, when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: No), the power saving mode release process is ended, and the main process (see FIG. 45) Return to On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S3430: Yes), the closing stop flag 2731 is set to OFF (S4422). After the process of S4422, the processes of S3431 to S3433 are executed as in the third embodiment described above.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, the display of the same content is performed on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181 Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 because the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. The player can clearly indicate to the player that the displayed content (for example, the variable display of the symbol or the stop symbol etc.) and the displayed content displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 are correct without any doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23 (specifically, the display area 81a has a predetermined size) Since the use of the symbol display device for power saving 181 is started at the timing when it arrives, the period for using both the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol display device for power saving 181 becomes short. Power consumption can be suppressed more suitably.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the power saving mode in the game can be switched using the power saving button 23 provided on the front frame 14 (upper tray 17). In the fifth embodiment, by using the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to switch the presence or absence of power saving during customer waiting effects, thereby suppressing power consumption. Plan. In the fifth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a volume control switch 227 is provided in the effect control device 117. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is also configured to function as a changeover switch as to whether or not to save power at the time of customer waiting effect.

  While a power saving button 23 is provided on the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 10 and is an operation element (button) for switching the power consumption mode according to the player's intention, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 The volume adjustment switch 227 is a dedicated operation (switch) for allowing the staff of the hall, not the player, to manage the power saving at the time of customer waiting effect.

  Here, the volume adjustment switch 227 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the volume adjustment switch 227. FIG. The volume adjustment switch 227 is a switch for changing the size (volume) of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226, and the rotary switch 227b (see FIG. 56) and the operation axis of the rotary switch 227b are manually operated. It is comprised from the operation knob 227a for making it rotate.

  The rotary switch 227 b is a 16-position (contact) rotary switch, and outputs a value of 0 to 15 (0 to F in hexadecimal) according to the position. The position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed by rotating the operating shaft.

  The operation knob 227a is a knob for manually rotating the operation shaft of the rotary switch 227b, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by an operator such as an employee of the hall. Therefore, when the operator rotates the operation knob 227a, the operation shaft can be rotated, whereby the position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed. Specifically, the position of the rotary switch 227b can be set by aligning the mark 227a1 written on the operation knob 227a with any of the values 0 to F written around the operation knob 227a. The rotary switch 227b outputs a value (output value) indicated by the mark 227a1.

  FIG. 55 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (that is, the output value from the rotary switch 227b) and the volume setting value. As described above, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 can take 16 levels of values from 0 to F (hexadecimal number; 0 to 15 in decimal number), and 0 to 0 for each of the 16 levels of output value. A volume setting of 8 is assigned. As the volume setting value is larger, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 is larger. That is, the minimum value “0” of the volume setting value is the minimum volume that the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 can take, and the maximum value “8” of the volume setting value is released from the speaker device 226 This is the maximum volume of the sound that can be heard.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 is “0”, the volume setting value is “0” and the mute is performed. As the output value (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) increases from "0", the volume setting value also increases. Specifically, as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value increases by one, and when the output value is "8", the volume setting value becomes "8" which is the maximum volume.

  Then, in the range where the output value is larger than "8", that is, in the range of 9 to F (hexadecimal number), as the output value increases, the volume setting value gradually decreases and the volume also decreases. Specifically, when the output value is "9", the volume setting value is "7", and as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value decreases by one, and the output value "F" , And the volume setting value is "1".

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the volume setting value when the output value is "0" is "0" and the volume setting value when the output value is "F" is "1". Therefore, the operator rotates the operation knob 227a to change the output value from “F” to “0” or change the output value from “0” to “F”. It is configured such that no sudden volume change occurs.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output value range of 0 to 8 is assigned as the volume setting range of the normal specification, and the output value range of 9 to F is assigned as the volume setting range of the power saving specification. ing. The "power saving specification" is a specification for saving power during customer waiting effects, and specifically, the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) for effect is turned off during customer waiting effects. Specifications. On the other hand, the "normal specification" is a specification which does not extinguish the light emitting means for effect even during the customer waiting effect.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), since the output value assigned to the normal specification is in the range of 0 to 8, in the normal specification, values of 0 to 8 can be taken as the volume setting value. On the other hand, since the output value assigned to the power saving specification is in the range of 9 to F, the power saving specification can take values of 1 to 7 as the volume setting value.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the volume settings (that is, the volume setting values within the range of 1 to 7) that can be set in not only the normal specification but also the power saving specification. The desired volume can be set.

  Here, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both of the normal specification and the power saving specification can be set by the single volume adjustment switch 227 for the volume setting values in the range of 1 to 7 It is configured. That is, only by rotating the operation knob 227a of the volume adjustment switch 227, adjustment of the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 (setting of the volume setting value in the range of 1 to 7), normal specification and power saving It can do both of switching with the specification. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing power saving.

  Also, as the volume is smaller, the amount of power consumed by the speaker device 226 is smaller. Therefore, the volume adjustment switch 227 enables not only the power saving during the customer waiting effect by the power saving specification but also the power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, the power saving by reducing the volume). Therefore, switching of presence / absence of power saving during the customer waiting effect and adjustment of the volume can be realized by one operator (in the present embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227), so a person who performs such switching / setting The operation of the hall staff should be easy, and the work load is small.

  In addition, since the maximum volume (volume setting value "7") that can be taken by the power saving specification is smaller than the maximum volume (volume setting value "8") that can be taken by the normal specification, Can contribute to power saving. In the present embodiment, the volume setting value “0” is assigned to the normal specification and not assigned to the power saving specification, but the volume setting value “0” is not assigned to the normal specification, and the power saving specification is It may be configured to be assigned to

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the volume setting value is increased or decreased by one each time the output value of 16 steps changes by one step. Although the range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the normal specification is 0 to 8, the range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the power saving specification is 1 to 7, but for example, 18 levels of output values can be taken As a result, the range of possible sound volume setting values of the normal specification and the power saving specification may be configured to be 0 to 8. That is, for example, an output value larger by one than the output value at which the volume setting value is "8" in the normal specification is assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for that output value is "8". An output value larger than the output value for which “1” is “1” may be assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for the output value may be set to “0”. However, this embodiment in which the sound volume setting values for the adjacent output values are different values is preferable because the boundary between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be easily distinguished by the change in the sound volume.

  The relationship between the output value and the volume setting value shown in FIG. 55 (b) is stored as a volume setting value table (not shown) in the ROM 272 of the effect control device 117, and the relationship from the volume adjustment switch 227 is stored. The output value (the output value from the rotary switch 227b) is referred to when converting into the volume setting value.

  FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (fifth embodiment). As shown in FIG. 56, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the block diagram of the first embodiment described above in that the rotary switch 227b of the volume adjustment switch 227 is connected to the input / output port of the effect control device 117. It differs from (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The RAM 273 according to the fifth embodiment has a rotary switch memory 273 m, a volume setting value memory 273 n, and a second power saving flag 273 o in addition to the configuration (273 a to 273 g; see FIG. 9) of the first embodiment. .

  The rotary switch memory 273 m is a memory for storing the output value from the rotary switch 227 b (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) to be described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  The volume setting value memory 273n is a value for storing a volume setting value corresponding to the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m (that is, the output value from the rotary switch 227b). The speaker device 226 emits a sound at a volume according to the value stored in the volume setting value memory 273 n (ie, the volume setting value set by the operation of the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the volume setting value memory 273n stores the volume setting value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) to be described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  The second power saving flag 273o is a flag that defines whether the specification is to save power during the customer waiting effect, that is, whether it is the power saving specification or the normal specification. If the second power saving mode flag 273o is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the power saving specification is set, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"). , Indicates that the normal specification is set. When the power is turned on, a value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time is set in the second power saving flag 273o. That is, when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 0 to 8, OFF is set, and when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 9 to F, ON is set. Thereafter, in the sound volume setting process (see FIG. 60) which will be described later, the stored content is updated according to the output value each time the output value from the rotary switch 227 b changes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, how the operation of the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed between the normal specification and the power saving specification in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a list of operations in a normal specification or a power saving specification for main electric components provided in a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. As described above, since the normal specification and the power saving specification are specifications for power saving during the customer waiting effect, in FIG. 58, the electric components that can be operated during the customer waiting effect, that is, the light emitting means for the effect (LED 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346), the light emitting means (i.e., the notification LED 311) used for the notification purpose, and the operation of the third symbol display device 81 are listed.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the normal specification is set, all the listed electric components emit light with normal luminance. That is, when the normal specification is set, the light emitting means for effect and the notification LED 311 emit light with normal brightness, and in the third symbol display device 81, customer waiting effect is executed with normal brightness.

  On the other hand, when the power saving specification is set, in the third symbol display device 81, the customer waiting effect is executed with normal brightness, but all the light emitting means for effect is turned off. As a result, power can be saved compared to the normal specification as much as the light emitting means for effect is turned off. On the other hand, even when the power saving specification is set, the notification LED 311 is normally kept at the luminance. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to various errors during the waiting-to-wait effect, the errors can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, so that the errors can be eliminated quickly. Thus, it is possible for the player to quickly return to the game or to detect an illegal act early.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 to 63. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. In the present embodiment, in the launch control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), when the launch control device 112 is instructed to launch a ball, the effect control device 117 And a launch command indicating that a launch instruction has been issued. The start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the fifth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the fifth embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 as in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above, and is repeated thereafter. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the main processing of the fifth embodiment, the volume setting processing (S5101) and the customer waiting rendering cancellation processing (S5102) are performed after the rendering mode setting processing (S1102). It differs from the main processing of the first embodiment shown.

  Specifically, in the main processing of the fifth embodiment, the power consumption setting processing and the rendering mode setting processing are executed as in the first embodiment described above (S1101 and S11202). Next, a volume setting process (S5101) and a customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) are executed, and thereafter, the processes of S1103 to S1112 are executed. Of the processing of S1103 to S1112, the processing content of the lamp output processing (S1241) executed in the sound lamp rendering processing (S1104) is the lamp output processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 25). And the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

  The volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment sets the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 according to the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b). The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. The customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) is a process for canceling the customer waiting effect accompanying the operation of a button such as the effect button 53, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described volume setting process (S5101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sound volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the volume setting process (S5101), first, the output value from the rotary switch 227b (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) is acquired (S5201), and the acquired output value and the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m And whether or not there is a change in the output value from the rotary switch 227b (S5202). At this time, if there is no change in the output value, that is, if the output value obtained in S5201 and the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273 m are the same (S5202: No), the volume setting process is ended. Return to main processing (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if there is a change in the output value, that is, if the output value obtained in S5201 is different from the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273 m (S5202: Yes), The process shifts to step S5203.

  In S5203, the output value acquired in S5201 is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m by overwriting (S5203). After the processing of S5203, the volume setting value corresponding to the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is stored in the volume setting value memory 273n. The volume setting value (that is, the volume setting value stored in volume setting value memory 273n) according to the value of rotary switch memory 273m is referred to the volume setting value table (not shown) provided in ROM 272. , Volume setting value converted from the value of the rotary switch memory 273 m.

  After the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (that is, 9 to F in hexadecimal notation) (S5205). At this time, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (S5205: Yes), the power saving specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227, so the second power saving flag 273o is set to ON (S5206). The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273 m is less than 9 (that is, 0 to 8) as a result of the determination in the process of S5205 (S5205: No), the normal specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227. The second power saving flag 273o is set to off (S5207), the volume setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the above-described customer waiting effect canceling process (S5102) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S5102) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on (S5221). At this time, if the customer waiting effect flag 273e is off (S5221: No), since the customer waiting effect is not in progress, in such a case, the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the main process (FIG. 59) Return to

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5221, when the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect effect is being performed (S5221: Yes), the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, or It is determined whether or not various buttons provided on the pachinko machine 10, such as the power saving button 23, have been operated (S5222). At this time, if no button is operated (S5222: No), it is not a timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5222, when any button is operated (S5222: Yes), it is the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to OFF ( In step S5223, the processing for releasing the customer waiting effect is finished, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 59).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the lamp output processing (S1241) of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the lamp output processing (S1241) of the fifth embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag is on (S5251). As a result of the judgment in the processing of S5251, when the customer waiting effecting flag is off, that is, when the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S5251: No), the processing of S1251 to S1258 is the same as the first embodiment described above. Run.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S5251, when the flag waiting for customer waiting effect is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is in progress (S5251: Yes), whether or not the second power saving flag 273o is on It is determined (S5252).

  If it is determined as a result of the processing in S5252 that the second power saving flag 273o is on (S5252: Yes), the power saving specification is set, so the process proceeds to S1258, and the first to third LED control devices 291 For ".about.293", turn off is set (S1258), and the lamp output process is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp presentation process (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are set to be turned off, so the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 34 are light emitting means for effect. 346 will be turned off.

  On the other hand, if the second power saving flag 273o is off (S5252: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S5252, the normal specification is set, so the process proceeds to S1254, and the first to third LEDs In the control devices 291 to 293, light emission with normal luminance is set (S1254). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the normal brightness is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, so the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 which are light emitting means for effect are set. ~ 346 is usually emitted with luminance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment. The command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is also for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, similarly to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment described above. This process is an interrupt process that is executed each time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to output a firing command to the effect control device 117 when instructing the firing control device 112 to launch a ball, as shown in FIG. The command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is different from the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment in that the process when receiving a launch command is included.

  Specifically, when the effect control device 117 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the customer waiting effect command, the start winning command, and the error command from the main control device 110, the command reception process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). (S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1411).

  Also in the command reception process of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), the fourth LED control device 294 responds to the received error command. The lighting pattern (that is, the lighting pattern according to the content of the error) and the light emission with the normal luminance are set (S1410, S1411). Therefore, when the error command is received during the customer waiting effect, the notification LED 311 can be lit at normal brightness regardless of whether it is the normal specification or the power saving specification. As a result, various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the errors can be quickly resolved to allow the player to quickly return to the game, or illegal. It becomes possible to detect an action early.

  Here, when the effect control device 117 receives a launch command from the main control device 110 (S5401: Yes), the customer waiting effect effect flag 273e is set to OFF (S5402). Therefore, when the player operates the operation handle 51 to cause the ball to be fired (that is, when the firing command is output from the main control device 110), the flag 273e during customer waiting effect is set to off. When the customer waiting effect is being executed, the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled.

  After the process of S5402, the process proceeds to S1405, and as in the first embodiment described above, if another command is to be received (S1405: Yes), the process according to the received command is executed ( S1411), end the command reception interrupt process. On the other hand, if the effect control device 117 has not received a launch command from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S5401 (S5401: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the 16 output values from the volume adjustment switch 227 are compared with a plurality of output values for each of the normal specification and the power saving specification (more specifically, By assigning 9 output values from 0 to 8 to the normal specification and 7 output values from 9 to F to the power saving specification, not only the normal specification but also a plurality of power saving specifications This volume setting value (more specifically, seven volume setting values from 1 to 7) can be set by the operation of the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, even in the power saving specification, it is possible to set a desired volume from among the seven levels of the volume by operating the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing power saving. Further, not only the power saving during the customer waiting effect by the power saving specification but also the power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, the power saving by reducing the volume) can be achieved.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. In the third and fourth embodiments described above, power saving is achieved by turning off the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) in the power saving mode, but in the sixth embodiment, the third symbol is used. The backlight of the display device 81 (LCD) is turned off, and the power supply to the image controller 274 is cut off (power is turned off) to save power. In the sixth embodiment, the same parts as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is changed to the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments described above, and an audio lamp control device 113 and a display control device 114. And.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is performed by the sound output in the speaker device 226, lighting and extinguishing in the various LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, lighting and extinguishing of the symbol display device 181 for power saving, and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 controls the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power supply unit 251 of the power supply device 115 performs the operation necessary for each of the control devices 110 to 114 and 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, etc. Supply voltage.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the configurations of the above-described audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the audio lamp control device 113 has an MPU 221, an input / output port 225, a bus line 224, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, and a movable body drive device 297. There is.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 225, the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the first to sixth LED control units 291 to 296, the movable body drive unit 297, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and effects The button 53 and the speaker device 226 are connected. Further, a power saving symbol display device 181 and an operation device 182 are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The operating member 182 is a device for moving the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R), and the rotational movement of the rotor of the motor such as a servomotor or stepping motor can be made linear motion. It has a rack and pinion mechanism to convert. In the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R, the rotational movement of the motor of the operating device 182 is converted into a linear movement by the rack and pinion mechanism, thereby moving in the left and right direction.

  The MPU 221 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 221 incorporates a ROM 222 storing control programs to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data and the like, and various circuits such as the RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The work RAM 233 has a fluctuation counter (not shown). The fluctuation time counter (not shown) is a counter that counts an elapsed time (variation elapsed time) from when the fluctuation effect is started when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This fluctuation time counter is a display effect process (see FIG. 79) executed every 20 milliseconds, and has an initial value corresponding to the fluctuation time extracted from the fluctuation pattern command for display immediately before the fluctuation effect is started. It is set (see S6606 in FIG. 79) and updated by subtracting 1 each time display effect processing is performed while variation effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see S6610 in FIG. 79) ). That is, the fluctuation time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the display effect process, the fluctuation effect data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter and the continuous notice effect data are read out from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233, as a flag (not shown), includes an effect permission flag (not shown) indicating whether the effect is permitted or not, a fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating whether to start fluctuation display, etc. Have. Note that the effect permission flag (not shown) is turned on when the effect permission command transmitted after the processing of the initial setting of the main control device 110 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S6411 in FIG. 77), and the power is off It is turned off by occurrence (not shown). Further, the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for display instructing a mode of fluctuation effects or continuous notice effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 77) When the variable display is started in the third symbol display device 81 (see S6412), it is turned off (see S6604 in FIG. 79).

  The image controller 236 is a video display processor (VDP) similar to the image controller 274 (see FIG. 7), and adjusts the timing of each of the character ROM 235, video RAM 234, and output port 238 based on internal commands received from the MPU 231. While reading and writing data, the data stored in the video RAM 234 is read at a predetermined timing, and a variable display image in units of frames is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (third symbol or decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. Data similar to that of the character ROM 275 (see FIG. 7) is stored in the character ROM 235 in the same format. The data for presentation compressed and stored in the character ROM 235 is read out and decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 236.

  Similar to the video RAM 276 (see FIG. 7), the video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state. The video RAM 234 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). The variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (fluctuation effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 236 according to time to generate a variable display image in frame units.

  FIG. 66 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the RAM 223 has a rendering mode counter 223b, a power saving flag 223h, a transition flag 223j, a closing start flag 223k, and a return waiting flag 223p.

  The effect mode counter 223 b is a counter for setting an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among three effect modes (general effect mode, advance notice effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 223b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 223b of this embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and the mode change button at an effective or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during customer waiting effects) Each time 22 is operated, it is incremented by one. Then, after reaching the value set as the maximum value ("2" in the present embodiment), the effect mode counter 223b is returned to zero.

  The power saving flag 223 h is a flag indicating which one of two types of power consumption modes (normal consumption mode and power saving mode) is set as the power consumption mode. When the power saving mode flag 223 h is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, is set to the normal power consumption mode. The power saving mode flag 223 h is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is alternately switched on and off each time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The in-transition flag 223 j is a flag indicating whether the state of the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. If the in-transition flag 223 j is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is in transition. On the other hand, when the flag 223j is set to off (ie, "0") during transition, the state of the shutter member 180 is not in transition, ie, the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. The transition flag 223j is set to ON when the closing or opening of the shutter member 180 is started by the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or complete. When open, it is set to off. The during-transition flag 223 j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 223k is a flag indicating that the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state has started closing. When the closing start flag 223 k is set to ON (ie, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the open state has started closing. The closing start flag 223 k is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) when the power is turned on, and the player operates the power saving button 23 in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is off). Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when the closing of the shutter 180 is started, it is set to be off.

  The return standby flag 223p is a flag indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. When the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (ie, "1"), it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return. When the player operates the power saving button 23 in the power saving mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is on), the return standby flag 223 p is set to an initial value off (that is, “0”) at power on. Set to on. Thereafter, when a return waiting time (25 seconds in the present embodiment) which is a predetermined wait time has elapsed, the return waiting flag 223p is set to off. Alternatively, in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223 h is off), when the player operates the power saving button 23, the return standby flag 223 p is set to off.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, until the return standby time elapses). ) Is configured so that the power saving symbol display device 181 is not turned off. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power supply of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off in the power saving mode, so power saving can be suitably achieved. However, since the power supply of VDP is turned off, even if the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode and the power is turned on again to VDP, it takes time to start (return) of VDP. Therefore, there is a problem that the image can not be normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on again to the VDP until the VDP is started and returned. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is maintained on and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off during the return standby time. Therefore, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to the normal state, and the player can change the symbol display and stop symbols etc. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming invisible.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control apparatus 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the work RAM 233 has a rendering mode counter 233b, a customer waiting rendering in progress flag 233e, and a floating mode change flag 233g.

  The effect mode counter 233 b is a counter for setting the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among the three types of effect modes (general effect mode, advance effect mode, and feature effect mode). The effect mode counter 233b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 233b according to the present embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and an effect mode command (a command indicating an effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22) from the audio lamp control device 113 Is received, the value of the effect mode command is set.

  The waiting for customer effect flag 233e is a flag indicating whether or not the waiting for customer effect is being performed by the third symbol display device 81. When the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to on (ie, "1"), it indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and if it is set to off (ie, "0"), the customer Indicates that no waiting effect has been made.

  After the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the customer waiting effect image (customer waiting effect) after the customer waiting effect flag 233e is received And set to on. Then, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF when the display control device 114 receives a customer waiting effect cancellation command from the sound lamp control device 113 or along with the start of the variable display. The voice lamp control device 113 displays a customer waiting effect cancellation command when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, or when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated. Output to That is, when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated, or when the variable display is started, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off. Ru. Note that the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The fluctuating mode change flag 233g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the fluctuating display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed fluctuation. If the changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON (ie, "1"), the effect mode in the variable display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 233g is set to OFF (ie, "0") as an initial value at power-on, and then set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high speed change, and then the change display thereof Will be turned off when the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, how the operation of the main electric components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power consumption mode includes two modes: a normal consumption mode and a power saving mode in which the power consumption by the electric component is smaller than that of the normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electrical components according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, each electric component enumerated in FIG. 67 turns off the power supply of the image controller 236 (VDP) in the power saving mode when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. , And the third embodiment (see FIG. 41).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, each control processing performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. However, in the present embodiment, in the firing control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the voice lamp control device is instructed when the firing control device 112 is instructed to shoot the ball. It is assumed that a launch command indicating that the launch instruction has been issued is output to 113.

  First, each process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer division activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a 2 ms cycle) There is an embedded process.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The start-up process is started when the power is turned on. When the start-up process is started, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S6001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S6122 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current start-up process (see FIG. 69). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S6002). As described later with reference to FIG. 69, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S6118 in FIG. 69), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S6122. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S6122 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S6002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power of S6122 is shut off. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S6006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S6003: Yes), the process proceeds to S6004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6007.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003: Yes), and the process moves to S6004.

  On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S6122 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S6003: No), and the process moves to S6007.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S6002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S6122. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S6004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S6004, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S6004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S6005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and RAM destruction check data is set (S6006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S6005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S6011), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the notification LED 311. Note that sound may be output from the speaker device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S6007, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S6007). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S6122 is performed (see S6121 in FIG. 69). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S6122 is performed, the process of S6007 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S6122 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S6007: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S6008), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6010). ).

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S6007 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, since the current startup processing was started after the power was completely shut off, S6004 through the processing of S6004 to S6006. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in this case (S6007: No), S6008 which is the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S6009, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6009).

  The reason for skipping S2008 clear processing is that when the processing from S6004 to S6006 is followed to the processing in S6007, all storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing in S6004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued. After the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S6009, the interrupt permission is set (S6010), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This main process is a process that is executed after the end of the above-described startup process (see FIG. 68) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main processing, first, power consumption mode setting processing for setting the power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S6101). The details of the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S6102). The details of the effect mode setting process (S6102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S6102), a customer waiting effect cancellation process is performed to cancel the customer waiting effect accompanying the button such as the effect button 53 being operated (S6103). The details of the customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the customer waiting effect releasing process (S6103), it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed (S6104) since the previous determination is performed (that is, the process of S6104 is performed last). If 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (S6104: Yes), lamp output processing (S6105) is performed. The lamp output process (S6105) is a variety of LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like so as to be the lighting pattern edited in the process of S6109 described later. It is the processing which sets the output of ~ 323, 341-346). Although not shown, in the lamp output process (S6105) of the present embodiment, the same process as the lamp output process (see FIG. 47) of the third embodiment described above is executed.

  After the lamp output process (S6105) is executed, a power on notification process is executed (S6106). The power on notification process (S6106) is a notification to notify that the power is on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is on, and the notification includes the speaker device 226, a notification It is performed by light emitting means such as LED 311 or the like. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S6107 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

  In S6107, the effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S6107). In this effect button input monitoring / rendering process (S6107), in the same way as the effect button input monitoring / rendering process (S1242; see FIG. 42, FIG. 37) described above, the effect button 53 is used for the player to enhance the effect. This is processing for monitoring the input as to whether or not it has been operated, and setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the effect button 53 has been confirmed.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect processing (S6107), it is determined whether the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108). If it is determined in the processing of S6108 that the power saving flag 223h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6108: No), lamp editing processing is executed (S6109), The process shifts to step S6110. In the lamp editing process (S6109), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310 and 321 to 1) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13 and the like to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6108, when the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are light emitting means to be controlled. Since the light sources 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, the setting of the lighting pattern for the light emitting means is not necessary. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S6109) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6110. In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S6109) is not executed when the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S6109) may be executed.

  At S6110, sound editing / output processing is executed (S6110). In the sound editing / output process (S6110), an output pattern or the like of the speaker device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After the sound editing / output processing (S6110), the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S6111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S6111), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S6109 and the sound editing / output process of S6110 are executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111).

  After execution of the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111), an effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S6112). In this movable object control process for effect (S6112), the operation pattern of the movable object for effect 631 corresponding to each effect is set to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable body drive device The output to 297 causes the effect movable body 631 to operate in the set operation pattern.

  After execution of the effect movable body control process (S6112), the power saving symbol display control process which is a process for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6113). The details of the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of symbol display control processing for power saving (S6113), it is judged whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114). At this time, if the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114: Yes), the apparatus used as a display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) is switched to the power saving mode from the normal consumption mode. A power saving mode transition process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181, is executed (S6115). The details of the power saving mode transition process (S6115) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 223h is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6114 (S6114: No), the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode when the apparatus used as the display device for the stop symbol is switched A power saving mode release process, which is a process of switching from the symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S6120). The details of the power saving mode canceling process (S6120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power saving mode transition processing (S6115) or the power saving mode cancellation processing (S6120), the decorative symbol variation display processing is executed (S6116). In the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command to set the effect aspect of the variation display (variation effect) in the third symbol display device 81 and instruct the set aspect to the display control device 114 (display variation pattern command , And a process for transmitting a display stop symbol command).

  After executing the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S6117). The details of the command determination process (S6117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S6117), it is determined whether or not generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 223 (S6118). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S6118 (S6118: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S6121), and the power-off process is executed (S6122). After execution of the power-off process (S6122), the power-off process flag is turned off (S6123), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process (S6122), the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and the output ports are turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), and 3 Turn off the output of the symbol display device 81. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S6118, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored (S6118: No), the keyword "55AAh" stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S6006 in the startup processing (see FIG. 68). Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6119). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S6119: No), the process returns to the process of S6101, and the above-described processes of S6101 to S6119 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6119 that the RAM 223 is to be destroyed (S6119: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the display effect process (S6505; see FIG. 78) is not executed by determining that the RAM is destroyed and the process is an infinite loop, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed thereafter. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner circumference LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), first, it is checked whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S6201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S6201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of confirmation in the processing of S6201, when the power saving button 23 is operated (S6201: Yes), it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6202). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223 j is on (S 6202: Yes), the shutter member 180 (180 L, 180 R) is in transition from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. , And ends the power consumption mode setting process, and returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is in operation, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-transition flag 223j is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6202 (S6202: No), the in-transition flag 223j is set to on (S6203). Next, it is determined whether the power saving flag 223h is on (S6204).

  If it is determined in the process of S6204 that the power saving flag 223h is off (S6204: No), the power saving flag 223h is set on (S6205), and the closing start flag 223k is set on (S6206). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to off (S6207), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in the process of S6204 is that the power saving flag 223h is on (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 223h is set to off (S6208). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to ON (S6209), and counting of the return waiting time is started (S6210).

  Next, a lighting restart command is output to the display control device 114 (S6211), the power consumption mode setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives this lighting restart command, it turns on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 and turns on the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP (power on again).

  As described above, according to the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the process of S6209 is executed, and the return standby flag 223p is set to ON. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, the recovery standby flag 223p set to ON in S6209 is maintained in the ON state in the period until the recovery standby time elapses, and in that period, the symbol display for power saving is displayed The display by the device 181 is continued. In the present embodiment, the recovery standby time is set as a time (for example, 25 seconds) sufficient for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal after the VDP (image controller 236) is turned on again. It is done. Thus, the player is switched between the power saving mode and the normal consumption mode, and after the lighting restart command is displayed on the display control device 114 in S6211, until the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal. However, it is possible to prevent that the display of the fluctuation display of the symbol or the stop symbol etc can not be visually recognized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the effect mode setting process (S6102) of the sixth embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing effect mode setting processing (S6102) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the effect mode setting process (S6102), first, it is checked whether the mode change button 22 is operated (S6221), and if the mode change button 22 is not operated (S6221: No), the effect mode setting process is ended, Return to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, when the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of confirmation in the processing of S 6221 (S 6221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change is in progress (S 6222). At this time, if it is in the process of change (S6222: Yes), it is determined whether the process is in the high speed change (S6223).

  As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6223, if it is during high speed fluctuation (S6223: No), even if it is during fluctuation, it is not the time when the change of the effect mode by the mode change button 22 is possible. The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6223, if it is during high speed fluctuation (S6223: Yes), since it is time to change the rendering mode by the mode change button 22 during fluctuation, in this case, the fluctuation mode A change command is output to the display control device 114 (S6224). When the display control device 114 receives the during-fluctuation mode change command, the display control device 114 sets the during-fluctuation mode change flag 233g to on (see FIG. 77).

  After the processing of S6224, 1 is added to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (S6225). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect mode counter 223b exceeds 2 (S6226). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6226, when the value of the rendering mode counter 223b exceeds 2 (S6226: Yes), the rendering mode counter 223b is cleared to zero, the value is made zero (S6227), and the processing shifts to S6228 Do. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode counter 223b is 2 or less as a result of the determination in the process of S6226, the process of S6227 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6228.

  At S6228, an effect mode command according to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (ie, indicating the value) is output to the display control device 114 (S6228). After the process of S6228, the effect mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives this effect mode command, the display control device 114 sets the effect mode counter 233b based on the effect mode command (see FIG. 77).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6222, if it is not in the process of variation (S6222: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6229). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6229: No), since it is a time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited, in such a case, the effect mode setting process is ended and the main process (see FIG. 69) Return to

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6226, if it is during the waiting for customer effect (S6226: Yes), since it is the time when it is possible (permitted) to change the effect mode, in such a case, the process S6225 Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the above-described customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing customer wait effect cancellation processing (S6103) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the customer waiting effect canceling process (S6103), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is in progress (S6241). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6241: No), the customer waiting effect cancellation process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the process of S6241, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6241: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, etc. It is determined whether or not various buttons have been operated (S6242). At this time, if no button is operated (S6242: No), it is not the timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect releasing process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6242, when any button is operated (S6242: Yes), it is the timing to release the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect release command is output to the display control device 114 (S6243). After the processing of S6243, the processing for releasing the customer waiting effect is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69). When the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect cancellation command, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S6113), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6261). At this time, if the power saving flag 223h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S6261: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (S6262). As a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6262, if it is not a jackpot (S6262: No), it is discriminated whether or not it is in fluctuation (during symbol fluctuation display) (S6263). At this time, if it is not during the fluctuation (S6263: No), it is judged whether it is the start timing (the fluctuation start timing) of the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 (S6264).

  If it is the fluctuation | variation start timing as a result of determination by the process of S6264 (S6264: Yes), a process will transfer to S6265. In addition, as a result of the determination in the process of S6263, also in the case of being changed (S3403: Yes), the process is transferred to S6265.

  At S6265, it is determined whether it is a stop timing of the symbol (S6265). At this time, if it is not the stop timing of the symbol (S6265: No), since it is within the variation time of the symbol, the variation display by the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6266). That is, the segment patterns of the seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 are varied. After the processing of S6266, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S3409, when it is the stop timing of the symbol (S3409: Yes), the symbol display device 181 for power saving is displayed for the stop symbol set based on the type command received from the main control device 110. It displays on (181a to 181c) (S6273). In this embodiment, the display pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command received from the main controller 110 (S6351; see FIG. 76), and the decorative symbol effect setting process (S6116; based on the display pattern of the extracted stop symbol). (Refer to FIG. 69). After the processing of S6273, the power saving symbol display control device ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S6264, if it is not the fluctuation start timing (S6264: No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the power saving symbol display control device is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69). In such a case, the stop symbol being displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S6272, if it is during the waiting for effect presentation (S6272: Yes), there is no need to display by the power saving symbol display device 181, and in such a case, the power saving symbol display device 181 Is turned off (S6270), the power saving symbol device display control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). In the present embodiment, as a result of the determination in the process of S6272, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the stop symbol being displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is. When the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the processing may be shifted to S6270 (that is, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be turned off).

  If the result of the determination in the process of S6262 is that the jackpot is in progress (S6262: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S6271). In the power saving mode, when a big hit is generated, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the process of S6271, so that the player can recognize that the big hit is in progress by visually recognizing the blinking. It is possible to surely recognize, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electric component. After the processing of S6271, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6261, when the power saving flag 223h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6261: No), the recovery standby flag 223p is on. It is determined whether there is any (S6267).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6267, if the recovery standby flag 223p is on (S6267: Yes), the recovery standby time (25 seconds in the present embodiment) is after the recovery standby flag 223p is set to on. It is determined whether it has elapsed (S6268). At this time, if the return waiting time has not yet elapsed (S6268: No), the process proceeds to S6262. That is, after the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode), the symbol display device for power saving is performed until the return standby time elapses. The display by 181 is continued.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6267, when the recovery waiting time has elapsed (S6267: Yes), the recovery waiting flag 223p is set to off (S6269), and the power saving symbol display device 181 is extinguished (S6270). ). After the processing of S6270, the power saving symbol device display control processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  Also, as a result of determination by the process of S6267, when the return standby flag 223p is off (S6267: No), after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the power saving symbol display device 181 is used. Since the period for continuing the display (that is, return waiting time) has already elapsed, the process moves to S6270.

  Next, the power saving mode shift process (S6115) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process (S6115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S6115), first, it is determined whether the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301). At this time, if the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301: Yes), it is the timing to start closing the shutter members 180 (180L, 180R) based on the fact that the player operates the power saving button 23. In such a case, first, the closing start flag 223k is set to off (S6302).

  After the processing of S6302, the display area reduction command is output to the display control device 114 (S6303). The display area reduction command is a command instructing start of reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives this display area reduction command, the third display area reduction command 3 The image to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 is formed so as to be reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the reduced image is displayed in the display area 81a.

  Subsequently, closing of the shutter member 180 is set (S6304), and the process proceeds to S6305. When the process of S6304 is executed, the motor of the operating device 182 is controlled to move the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R in the closing direction. At this time, the operating device 182 sets the moving speed of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R (speed at which the shutter member 180 is closed) to the reduction speed of the display area 81a based on the display area reduction command output by the processing of S6303. Control the motor to fit. Thus, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction rate, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction rate. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing start flag 223k is off (S6301: No), the process of S6302 to S6304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6305.

  In S6305, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6305). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223j is off (S6305: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The migration processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 223 j is on (S 6305: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 in transition to the closed state has reached a predetermined position (S 6305). S6306). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S6306: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, and the main process Return to (see FIG. 69).

  If the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position as a result of the determination in the process of S6306 (S6306: Yes), it is determined whether the shutter member 180 is stopping at the predetermined position (S6307).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6307, if it is not in stop (S6307: No), the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S6308), and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, if the process is stopped (S6307: Yes), the process of S6308 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6309.

  In S6309, it is determined whether or not it is in motion (during symbol display of symbols) (S6309). At this time, if it is not during fluctuation (S6309: No), it is judged whether or not fluctuation display of symbols has been started (S6310). At this time, if fluctuation display of symbols is not started (S6310: No), predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after closing of the shutter member 180 (or reduction of the display area 81a) is stopped by the processing of S6308. Is determined (S6311).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S6311, when the closing display of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the variable display of the symbol is not executed (that is, S6309: No and S6310: No), and the predetermined time has not passed. (S6311: No), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6311, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S6311: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S6312) Are output to the display control device 114 (S6313). When receiving the turn-off command, the display control unit 114 turns off the backlight of the third symbol display unit 81 and turns off the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP (turns off the power). After the process of S6313, the in-transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6314), the power saving mode transition process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S6309 is that it is changing (S6309: Yes), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the symbol (S6315). Also, as a result of the discrimination by the processing of S6310, also when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started (S6310: Yes), the processing is shifted to S6315.

  As a result of determination by the processing of S6315, when it is the stop timing of the symbol (S6315: Yes), the processing is shifted to S6312. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the processing of S6312 (full closing of the shutter) is performed. On the other hand, if it is not the stop timing of a symbol as a result of determination by processing of S6315 (S6315: No), power saving mode shift processing is ended, and it returns to main processing (refer to Drawing 69).

  Next, the power saving mode release process (S6120) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode release processing (S6120) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode release process (S6120), first, it is determined whether the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6321). At this time, if the in-transition flag 223j is off (S6321: No), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in a completely open state, and in such a case, the power saving mode The release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6321: Yes), it is determined whether the return standby flag 223p is on (S). At this time, if the return standby flag 223p is on (S6322: Yes), the period during which the third symbol display device 81 waits for normal return after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. In this case, the power saving mode release process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6322, when the return standby flag 223p is off (S6322: No), the lighting restart command is output after the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode (ie, as shown in FIG. After the process of S6211 of 70 is executed), the return waiting time has elapsed, and the third symbol display device 81 has returned to the normal state. Therefore, in such a case, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S6323), the in-transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6324), the power saving mode release processing is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 69) is performed. Return. Therefore, according to the power saving mode cancellation processing, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the player operating the power saving button 23, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. After returning to normal, the shutter member 180 is completely opened.

  Next, the aforementioned command determination process (S6117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S6117) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this command determination process (S6117), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and the main control It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the device 110 (S6341). At this time, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6341: No), the process proceeds to S6342.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the processing of S6341 (S6341: Yes), the variation pattern command reception flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set on. (S6349). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received from main controller 110, and is on (ie, "1") when the fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110. And set to off (that is, "0") when the display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S6350). Transfer to the processing of S6342. The fluctuation time extracted by the process of S6350 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223.

  When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is turned on by the process of S6349, fluctuation display (variation according to the fluctuation time extracted from the fluctuation pattern command by the process of S6350 in the decorative symbol fluctuation setting process (S6116; FIG. 69) The effect mode of the effect is set, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the set effect mode of the variable display is output to the display control device 114.

  In S6342, it is determined whether a type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6342). At this time, when the type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6342: No), the process proceeds to S6343.

  On the other hand, when the type command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the processing of S6342 (S6342: Yes), the display pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command (S6351), and the process proceeds to S6343. Do. The display pattern of the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6351 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223. Then, in the decorative symbol variation setting process (S6116; FIG. 69), the stop symbol is set based on the stop pattern of the stop symbol extracted from the type command, and the display stop symbol command corresponding to the set stop symbol is displayed control It is output to the device 114.

  In S6343, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6343). At this time, when the stop command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6343: No), the process proceeds to S6344.

  On the other hand, when the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S6343 (S6343: Yes), the stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S6352), and the process proceeds to S6344. .

  In S6344, it is determined whether a customer waiting rendering command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6344). At this time, when the customer waiting effect command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S 6344: No), the process proceeds to S 6345.

  On the other hand, as a result of the discrimination in the processing of S3344, when the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control unit 110 (S6344: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is outputted to the display control device 114 (S6353). Transfer to processing.

  In S6345, it is determined whether or not the start winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S6345). At this time, when the start winning combination command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6345: No), the process proceeds to S6346.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6345, when the start winning command is received (S6345: Yes), the start opening LED lighting control process for controlling the lighting of the start opening LED 347 is executed (S6354), and the process of S6346 Transition to In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the starting opening LED lighting control processing (S6354) of this embodiment, the process similar to the starting opening LED lighting control processing (refer FIG. 40) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above is performed.

  In the process of S6346, it is determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6346). If it is determined in the process of S6346 that no error command has been received (S6346: No), the process proceeds to S6347.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6346, when an error command is received (S6346: Yes), a lighting pattern according to the received error command is given to the fourth LED control unit 294 (that is, Lighting patterns are set and light emission based on normal luminance is set (S6355, S6356), and the process proceeds to the processing of S6347.

  In the process of S6347, it is determined whether a launch command has been received from the main control device 110 (S6347). At this time, when the launch command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6347: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6347, when a launch command is received (S6347: Yes), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6357). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6357: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6357, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6357: Yes), a customer waiting effect cancellation command is output to the display control device 114 (S6358), and the process proceeds to S6348. When the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect canceling command output in the process of S6358, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting in effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  In the process of S6348, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6348). At this time, if another command has not been received (S6348: No), the command determination process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6348 (S6348: Yes), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S6359), the command determination process is ended, and the main process (FIG. Return to 69). In addition, as processing (S6359) according to other commands, for example, when the pending number command is received from the main control device 110, the pending command is output to the display control device 114, and the like.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. The processes of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power on and an external interrupt process that is executed when a command is received.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt processing is executed in response to the reception of the command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether the received command is a rendering permission command (S6401). At this time, if the received command is not a rendering permission command (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6402.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the effect permission command (S6401: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6401, the effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S6401) ) And the process of S6402. The effect permission flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the initial setting of the main control device 110 is performed, and the effect permission command transmitted after the processing of the initial setting of the main control device 110 is an audio lamp control device It is set to on (i.e., "1") when it is received via 113, and is set to off (i.e., "0") upon occurrence of a power-off.

  In the process of S6402, it is determined whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S6402). At this time, if the received command is not the display variation pattern command (S6402: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the display variation pattern command (S6402: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6402 (S6402: Yes), the variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set on ( S6412). Note that the fluctuation start flag (not shown) is a flag (not shown) indicating whether or not to start fluctuation display, and is turned on (ie, “1” when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113). When the variable display is started in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is set to off (that is, "0").

  Subsequently, the variation mode indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S6413), and the process proceeds to S6403. Although the fluctuation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception of the display fluctuation pattern command, this fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation mode extracted in the process of S6413.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not the received command is a display stop symbol command (S6403). At this time, if the received command is not the display stop symbol command (S6403: No), the process proceeds to S6404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the display stop symbol command (S6403: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is extracted (S6414), and the process proceeds to S6404. Do. The fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped at the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6414.

  In the process of S6404, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect command (S6404). At this time, if the received command is not the customer waiting effect command (S6404: No), the process proceeds to S6405.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the customer waiting effect command (S6404: Yes), the customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is set to ON (S6415), and the process of S6405 is performed. Transition to The customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, and is on (ie, “1”) when a customer waiting effect command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 When the customer waiting effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, it is set to off (that is, "0").

  In the process of S6405, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405). At this time, if the received command is not the customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405: No), the process proceeds to S6406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the customer waiting effect cancellation command as a result of the determination in the process of S6405 (S6405: Yes), the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off (S6416), and the process proceeds to S6406 .

  In the process of S6406, it is determined whether the received command is a turn-off command (S6406). At this time, if the received command is not the turn-off command (S6406: No), the process proceeds to S6407.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the turn-off command as a result of the determination in the process of S6406 (S6406: Yes), the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP is turned off (S6417) and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (Not shown) is turned off (S6418), and the process proceeds to the process of S6407. As described above, the turn-off command is a command output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the power supply of the image controller 236 is turned off and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 whose power consumption is lower than that of the third symbol display device 81 is started. Therefore, the power consumption can be suppressed (power saving) while the player can confirm the visual recognition of the stop symbol.

  In the process of S6407, it is determined whether the received command is a lighting restart command (S6407). At this time, if the received command is not the lighting restart command (S6407: No), the process proceeds to S6408.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the lighting restart command (S6407: Yes), the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP is turned on (S6419), and the third symbol display device 81 is back A light (not shown) is turned on (S6420), and the process proceeds to the process of S6408. As described above, the lighting restart command is a command output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the image controller 236 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on again) and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. By relighting, the display by the third symbol display device 81 is restored.

  In the process of S6408, it is determined whether the received command is a fluctuating mode command (S6408). At this time, if the received command is not the fluctuating mode command (S6408: No), the process proceeds to S6409. On the other hand, if the received command is the in-fluctuating mode command (S6408: Yes), the in-fluctuating mode change flag 233g is set to ON (S6421), and the process proceeds to S6409.

  In the process of S6409, it is determined whether the received command is a rendering mode command (S6409). At this time, if the received command is not a rendering mode command (S6409: No), the process proceeds to S6410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the effect mode command (S6409: Yes), the effect mode indicated by the received effect mode command (general effect mode, preview effect mode, and feature effect effect). A value corresponding to the mode) is set in the effect mode counter 233b (S6422), and the process proceeds to S6410.

  In the process of S6410, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6410). At this time, when another command has not been received (S6410: No), the external interrupt processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6410 (S6410: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6423), and the external interrupt process is ended. In addition, as processing (S6423) according to other commands, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure-held ball number N indicated by the number-of-holds command is displayed as the third symbol Displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when displaying on the special drawing reserve number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d) displayed on the device 81 or when a display area reduction command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 The image to be reduced may be formed at a predetermined reduction rate, and the reduced image may be displayed in the display area 81a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, main processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  The main processing shown in FIG. 78 is processing to be activated when the power is turned on, and when activated, first, an initial setting processing associated with the power on is executed (S6501). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S6501), in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 235, and the video RAM 234 is displayed. Are stored in the predetermined area of the (S6502). Then, using the effect data, the initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6503).

  Next, it is checked whether the effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S6504). As a result of confirmation by the process of S6504, if the effect permission flag is off (S6504: No), since the effect permission command has not been received from the sound lamp control device 113 yet, in such a case, from the sound lamp control device 113 The process from S6505 is on standby until the effect permission command is received, that is, until the effect permission flag is turned on.

  As a result of confirmation by the process of S6504, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S6504: Yes), the third pattern display device (LCD) displays the moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect or the moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect ) The display effect process which is a process for displaying on 81) is executed (S6505). The details of the display effect process (S6505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the display effect process (S6505) is performed to execute the display effect process (S6505) every 20 milliseconds (20 ms) after the display effect process (S6505) is performed (S6506).

  As a result of confirmation by the process of S6506, if 20 ms has not passed yet (S6506: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more passes, and if 20 ms or more has passed (S6506: Yes) , Display effect processing (S6505) is executed. Thus, the display effect process (S6505) is repeatedly performed every 20 ms until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the above-described display effect process (S6505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing display effect processing (S6505) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 78) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S6505), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for a big hit (that is, whether it is a big hit) (S6601), If it is inside (S6601: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S6609). In this jackpot effect processing, effect data according to the jackpot effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276, thereby updating the jackpot effect image. After the end of the jackpot effect process (S6609), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, in the process of S6601, if it is not a big hit (S6601: No), it is determined whether the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fluctuation display of the third symbol (that is, whether it is in fluctuation). (S6602). At this time, if the change is not in progress (S6602: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S6603).

  If it is determined in the process of S6603 that the fluctuation start flag is on (S6603: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S6604), and the customer waiting effect flag 233e is turned off (S6605). Next, an initial value is set to a fluctuation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6606). In addition, the fluctuation time counter which is not shown in figure is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the fluctuation display of the 3rd symbol is started. The initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S6605 is determined according to the fluctuation mode indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command.

  After the process of S6606, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is larger than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the fluctuation time (S6607). On the other hand, as a result of the judgment in the processing of S6602, when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed (during fluctuation) (S6602: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S6610) and the processing of S6607 Then, it is judged whether or not it is within the fluctuation time.

  If it is within the fluctuation time (S6607: Yes), the fluctuation display processing is executed (S6608), the display effect processing (S6505) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 78). . The fluctuation display process (S6608) is a process for executing fluctuation display (that is, fluctuation effect) of a symbol (the third symbol), and although not shown, the fluctuation display process of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 27), it is comprised as a process which abbreviate | omitted S1303, S1304, S1306.

  On the other hand, as a result of the judgment by the processing of S6607, when the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, the fluctuation time has ended (S6607: No), the display stop symbol command received from the audio lamp control device 113 The stop symbol extracted from is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6612). After the process of S6612, the during-variation mode change flag 233g is turned off (S6613), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  Also, as a result of the judgment in the process of S6603, if the fluctuation start flag is off (S6603: No), each display process is executed (S6611), the display effect process (S6505) is ended, and the main process (FIG. 28) Return to In addition, each display process (S1275) is a process of executing display process such as a customer waiting effect to be executed when a predetermined time has not been played by the player for the pachinko machine 10, and the illustration is omitted. The same processing as each display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment described above is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the symbol display device 181 for power saving in the power saving mode. Is configured as. The seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  Further, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol according to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to, and the player is the jackpot lottery There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern which is easy to determine the result of. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is extinguished and the stop symbol by the third symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and thereby the tempo of the game becomes worse, or If the deviation continues, it may cause inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery has been truly or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery is represented by a combination of numerals using the symbol display device for power saving 181 As configured as described above, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, and the power supply of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off. Power saving can be achieved. However, on the other hand, even if the VDP is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode and the VDP is turned on again due to the power supply of the VDP being turned off, it takes time to start (return) the VDP. A problem arises in that it is not possible to display the image properly on the symbol display device 81 immediately. To solve this problem, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is maintained on for the return standby time, and the symbol display for power saving is displayed. Since the device 181 is configured not to be turned off, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, and the player can change the symbol display or It is possible to prevent the display of a stop symbol or the like from becoming invisible. Therefore, by turning off the power supply of the VDP, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the interest is lost due to the power saving. As a result, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the first to fifth embodiments, one control device (i.e., the effect control device) controls audio output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LEDs and lamps) and controls the third symbol display device 81. However, the control of the sound output and the lighting of various light emitting means and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be performed by different control devices.

  For example, a control device (voice lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is connected to the main control device 110, and a control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is a voice lamp It may be configured to be connected to the control device, transmit each command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device, and to give a display instruction to the display control device from the audio lamp control device. Alternatively, the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (audio lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is displayed and controlled Connected to the device, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit, and the display control unit instructs the audio lamp control unit to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. It is also good. Also, the command may be transmitted directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit.

  In the sixth embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 controls sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LEDs and lamps) and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81. However, as in the first to fifth embodiments, one control device (that is, control of sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (such as LED and lamp) and control of the third symbol display device 81) It may be configured to be performed by the effect control device 117). At this time, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the image controller 274 which is VDP is turned off. do it.

  Alternatively, the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (audio lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is displayed and controlled Connected to the device, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit, and the display control unit instructs the audio lamp control unit to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. It is also good. Also, the command may be transmitted directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit.

  In the first embodiment, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIG. 21) for updating the power saving counter 273a when the power saving button 23 is operated is one of the main processes (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117. However, the power consumption mode setting process may be performed in a timer interrupt process that is performed periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Similarly, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIGS. 36 and 46) according to the second to fourth embodiments may be executed during timer interrupt process periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Good.

  In each of the above embodiments, the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117. However, the power saving button 23 is connected to the main control device 110, and the setting is read by the main control device 110. A setting command corresponding to the above may be output to the effect control device 117, and the power saving counter 273a or the power saving flag 273h may be set by the setting command. In such a case, the light emission (lighting or blinking) of the light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) controlled by the effect control device 117, the light emission controlled by the main control device 110 as well as the operation by the effect movable body 361 The power consumption of the light emission of the means and the operation of the effect movable body can also be changed according to the power consumption mode. For example, as in the first embodiment, the brightness of the special view holding lamp 37c, which is an LED, and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and the small power saving mode is set. When set, the brightness can be medium brightness, and when the large power saving mode is set, it can be zero (ie, turned off).

  When the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the first embodiment, a setting command corresponding to the value of the power saving counter 273a is output to the main control device 110, and the setting command is output. The value of the power saving counter similar to the power saving counter 273a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 may be set by the above. Similarly, when the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the second to fourth embodiments, a setting command corresponding to the state of the power saving flag 273 h is output to the main control device 110. The power saving flag similar to the power saving flag 273 h provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 may be set by the setting command.

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, the power consumption is saved by lowering (reducing) the luminance of the light emitting means (LED). However, power consumption may be reduced by thinning out the LEDs to be emitted. Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption may be reduced by thinning out the LEDs to be emitted. For example, when the small power saving mode is set, power saving can be achieved by alternately turning on each of the target LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346. It is also good. In this case, in each of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346, it is preferable to preferentially light the LEDs at both ends and the LEDs corresponding to the corner portions so that their shapes do not change as much as possible.

  Also, when flashing light emitting means such as LEDs as effects, by reducing the number of times of lighting or lighting time in the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) as compared to the normal consumption mode (ie, turn off time) Power consumption may be saved by increasing the power consumption. Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of times of lighting or the lighting time as compared with the normal consumption mode. .

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) is set, power consumption is saved by reducing the operation amount of the effect movable body 361. Power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of effect movable bodies 361 to be operated. Alternatively, in the power saving mode, all of the effect movable bodies 361 may not be operated (stopped). Also in the second to fourth embodiments, when the power saving mode is set, power consumption can be saved by reducing the number of effect movable bodies 361 to be operated, or all of the effect movable Power consumption may be saved by not operating the body 361.

  In each of the above embodiments, power consumption is saved by reducing the luminance of the light emitting means (LED) or reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361. Power consumption may be saved by reducing the volume of the sound). In addition, power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of speaker devices 226 used for sound emission.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the feature effect mode can not be set when the large power saving mode is set. However, instead of or in addition to the feature effect mode, the advance effect mode can not be set. It is also good. Further, in the mode in which the power consumption is suppressed as compared with the normal consumption mode, only the general effect mode may be configured to be selectable.

  In the first embodiment, when the large power saving mode is set, the feature effect mode can not be set by the subsequent operation of the mode change button 22, but when the effect mode is the feature effect mode When the large power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23, the feature rendering mode set at that time is forcibly changed to another rendering mode (for example, a general rendering mode). It is also good. Alternatively, when the large power saving mode is set by the operation of the power saving button 23 when the effect mode is the feature effect mode, the player is informed that the current effect mode is the feature effect mode ( For example, it may be configured to display that effect on the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, in the first and fifth embodiments, the power consumption mode is configured of three types of the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, but the second to fourth and sixth embodiments and Similarly, the mode in which power consumption is suppressed as compared to the normal consumption mode may be only the power saving mode, and the power consumption mode may be configured from two types, the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode. Further, the power saving mode may be divided into three or more types of modes according to the degree of suppression of power consumption, and the power consumption mode may be configured from a normal power consumption mode and three or more types of power saving modes.

  In the second to fourth and sixth embodiments, the power consumption mode is configured of two types, the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode, but the power saving mode is a plurality of modes according to the degree of suppression of the power consumption. It may be divided into For example, as in the first embodiment, the power consumption mode may be configured of three types: a normal consumption mode, a small power saving mode, and a large power saving mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the notification LED 311 always has normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode, but in the case of light emitting means for notifying various notification events as in the notification LED 311, in the power saving mode May be configured to reduce the luminance according to the content. For example, when the notification LED 311 gives notification of the occurrence of an error, the normal brightness is always kept regardless of the power consumption mode, and when the notification LED 311 gives notification during payout, the brightness is lowered in the power saving mode. It is also good.

  In the first and second embodiments, the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is either the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). However, when the power saving mode is set, power saving may be achieved by narrowing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as compared with the normal consumption mode. For example, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, display is performed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, when the small power saving mode is set, the third symbol display device 81 is selected. For example, an area of 80% of the screen may be used to reduce the effect, and the remaining area (e.g., an area around the screen corresponding to 20% of the entire area) may be extinguished. On the other hand, when the large power saving mode is set, the effect is reduced and displayed using a smaller area (for example, 60% of the screen of the third symbol display device 81) than when the small power saving mode is set. The remaining area may be turned off. In addition, a shutter member which can be stopped at a position which is accommodated in the center frame 86 at normal times and which appears from the vertical direction at the time of effect and covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD is provided If so, an area of a predetermined size that can be covered by the shutter member in the third symbol display device 81 may be extinguished, and reduction display of effects may be performed in the remaining area.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is not changed. However, when the power saving mode is set, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to a moving image or a still image with less movement than the moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode. It may be configured to save power. In such a case, special effect data for the power saving mode may be provided, or effect data of a moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode may be thinned out and used.

  In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is not changed even if the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode). In the configuration, when the power saving mode is set, three seven-segment LEDs corresponding to three symbol rows may be provided, and the variation display of symbols may be performed by these seven-segment LEDs. In addition, a shutter member which can be stopped at a position which is accommodated in the center frame 86 at normal times and which appears from the vertical direction at the time of effect and covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD is provided If so, three 7-segment LEDs may be provided on the front of the shutter member (the surface viewed by the player).

  In the first embodiment, the LED as the light emitting means is installed to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10), but for the power saving mode, A light emitting means (for example, an LED) may be provided with the irradiation direction directed in the direction along the surface of the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15 or the game board 13. The light emitting means whose radiation direction is directed in the direction along the surface of the game board 13 or the like can illuminate a wide range of area and thus can provide sufficient color even with a small number of light emitting means. The light emitting means for the power saving mode (i.e., the light emitting means whose irradiation direction is directed along the surface of the game board 13 or the like) is composed of main components (e.g. ) May be provided. Further, by providing the light emitting means for the power saving mode along the periphery of the game board 13, even in the power saving mode, sufficient color can be provided during the rendering. Further, by setting the irradiation direction of the light emitting means for the power saving mode to a direction along the arrangement direction of the LEDs used in the normal consumption mode (that is, the issuing means whose irradiation direction is irradiated toward the player), With a reduced number of light emitting means, it is possible to mimic a shape similar to that of the LEDs formed in normal consumption mode.

  In the first embodiment, for example, among the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode) In the power saving mode, the brightness of the inner LEDs 301 to 304 is kept as normal and the brightness of the outer LEDs 305 to 310 is lowered or extinguished in the power saving mode. Good. That is, the luminance of the light emitting means closer to the game area (in this case, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304) is given priority as the normal luminance, and the light emission means on the side away from the game area (the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 in this case) It may be configured to decrease the brightness or to turn off the brightness. Since the player plays while watching the game area, the awareness of the light emitting means far from the game area is relatively thin. Therefore, even if the luminance of the peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, which are the light emitting means on the side away from the game area, is lowered or extinguished, the player is not particularly concerned about that and the possibility of the game may be reduced. Low. On the other hand, since the player is more aware of the light emission mode as the light emitting means is closer to the game area, when the luminance of the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 which are light emitting means close to the game area is lowered, the player feels discomfort in the effect This is likely to reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, the brightness of the light emitting means closer to the game area is given priority as the normal brightness, and the brightness of the light emitting means away from the game area is lowered or extinguished, so that the player feels entertaining in the power saving mode. It is possible to suppress the decline.

  In the first embodiment, power saving is achieved by lowering the luminance of the light emitting means (LED). However, all the light emitting means for effect are turned off, and the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The light emission mode of the center frame 86 and the notification lamp 85 may be displayed in a pseudo manner.

  In the first embodiment, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the amount of movement of the effect movable body 361. However, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is operated without operating the effect movable body 361. Alternatively, a display imitating the effect movable body 361 may be made to appear, and the movement of the effect movable body 361 may be displayed in a pseudo manner by making the display appear.

  Further, in the first embodiment, power saving during the customer waiting effect is not considered, but even during the customer waiting effect, for example, as in the first embodiment, the light emitting means (LED) Power consumption may be saved by performing control such as lowering the brightness of the image. Alternatively, as in the second embodiment, the pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means may be displayed on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 during the customer waiting effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the power consumption mode is changed based on the operation (depression) of the power saving button 23 by the player. However, the employee of the hall operates the power saving button 23 for a specific operation (for example, 5 seconds) If the button is pressed, or if the power saving button is composed of a plurality of buttons, it is operated in a specific order of pressing, etc.) until a predetermined release operation (for example, power on / off etc.) is performed. The power consumption mode set in may be fixed. In addition, a dedicated switch or button that can fix the power consumption mode may be provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the effect control device 117).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the switch can be operated by only the hall employee instead of the player without providing the power saving button 23 It is also possible to provide a button or a button so that not the player but the employee of the hall can change the power consumption mode. In this case, for example, by providing a switch or button on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 such as the effect control device 117, only the employee of the hall can operate. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned switch or button to the effect control device 117, if it is also used as a volume operation unit for adjusting the volume of the speaker device 26, consumption can be achieved without additionally mounting the operation unit. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the power mode can be changed only by the employee.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the power saving button 23 is not provided, or in addition to providing the power saving button 23, the predetermined power saving button 23 is provided. The power consumption mode can be automatically switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode at a timing (for example, the start timing of customer waiting effect) or a timing that can be regarded as a predetermined timing (for example, a game start timing) Also, the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by the detection of the winning of a predetermined winning opening, the operation of the operation handle 51, the detection of the mode change button 22 or the effect button 53). Good.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the player is provided with the power saving button 23 operable by the player. However, in addition to the power saving button 23, only the hall employee can operate. A switch or button may be provided, and the staff in the hall may operate the switch or button to change the state in which the player can switch between the power consumption modes and the state in which the player can not switch.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 operable by the player is provided. However, the player is not provided with the power saving button 23 or in addition to the power saving button 23. Instead of providing a switch or button that can be operated only by the employee of the hall, the employee of the hall operates this switch or button to obtain the above-mentioned predetermined timing (for example, winning or operation to a predetermined winning opening) It may be configured to be able to change between a state in which switching of the power consumption mode by detection of the operation of the handle 51, detection of the mode change button 22 and the effect button 53, etc. is permitted and a state not permitted.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control unit 110 sets a stop command instructing the end of the fluctuation display of the third symbol at the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first symbol and outputs it to the effect control device 117, Although the effect control device 117 is configured to end the fluctuation display of the third symbol based on the reception of the stop command, the effect control device 117 uses the fluctuation time counter (not shown) to display the third symbol It is good also as composition which manages an execution period of change display of the 3rd pattern by measuring change time.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the value of the special figure holding ball number N (that is, the number of holding times for winning to the first ball entrance 64) is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display control device 81 (the special figure holding number display section 87 However, it is also possible to provide a special view holding lamp which is an LED controlled by the effect control device 117, and to turn on a number of LEDs according to the value of the special view holding ball number N. In addition, special figure reservation number indicatory department 87 indicates the value of special figure reservation sphere number N with the number, or the aspect which differs the territory divided into 4 by the number of times of retention (for example, color and lighting It may be displayed as a pattern). In addition, the number of suspension of winnings to the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, it is also possible not to display the special figure holding number display section 87 or the special figure holding lamp.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the winning to the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times is limited to 4 times. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of times of suspension of variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64 is different by a number or number of areas divided by four even in part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of times of suspension A light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and the number of reservations is notified by the light emitting member. You may.

  In the second embodiment, the fourth image layer on which the pseudo image is formed is superimposed on the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying variations and effects of the symbol. Although the display unit 81 is configured to display, the display contents (variation of the symbol, effects, etc.) formed on the first to third image layers can be displayed inside the display area of each of the display portions 441 to 445. It may be reduced.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the fifth image layer on which the pseudo image (pseudo image 451) is formed is superimposed on the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying the variation and effects of the design. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be displayed, but dedicated variable display data and effect data including a pseudo image are prepared, and the pseudo image is displayed on any of the first to third image layers. By forming an image including an image, the pseudo image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using the fifth image layer.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure reserve number display unit 87 causes the special image reserve number display unit 87 to be displayed at a position not overlapping the display units 441 to 445, thereby displaying the pseudo image. Although the display position of is not changed, the display position of the number-of-special-views reserve display portion 87 may be changed when displaying the pseudo image.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, although each display part 441-445 was arrange | positioned so that the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may be enclosed in 1 row, the display part which can display a pseudo image is 2 It may be arranged side by side in columns or more.

  In the second embodiment, the pseudo decoration lamp display 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, and the pseudo side lamp display 442 is a pseudo corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345. Among the LEDs that are turned off in the power saving mode, such as the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310, there are also LEDs that do not consider pseudo images (alternative images), which are areas for displaying images. Instead of this, the displayed pseudo image such as the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 or the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 may be displayed in a display mode in consideration of all the LEDs turned off in the power saving mode.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the shutter member 180 is exposed from the left side of the opening 86 a of the center frame 86 to cover the left side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 and Although the right shutter member 180R appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81, the shutter member 180 is formed of the opening 86a of the center frame 86. It may be composed of two shutter members that emerge from the upper side and the lower side, respectively. Alternatively, the shutter member may be a single shutter member emerging from one side of the opening 86 a of the center frame 86.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180 used exclusively in the power saving mode. When a member is provided, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be arranged on the shutter member for effect. In addition, the shutter member 180 provided with the symbol display device 181 for power saving may be a shutter member exclusively used in the power saving mode, and a shutter member for effect may be provided on the front side or the back side.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180, and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode and is exposed only in the power saving mode. However, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be disposed at a position where it can be constantly exposed on the game board 13. Also in the case of adopting such a configuration, in the power saving mode, a shutter member such as the shutter member 180 may be provided to cover the extinguished third symbol display device 81.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180, and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode and is exposed only in the power saving mode. However, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed at a predetermined position (for example, a predetermined position near the operation handle 51) on the front side of the front frame 14 (the side viewed by the player when playing a game). It may be set up. In such a case, in the normal consumption mode, a seven-segment LED that performs other functions such as a rendering function may be diverted as the symbol display device 181 for power saving.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is continued with the shutter member 180 in the closed state until the return standby time elapses. In the configuration, when the game board 13 or the front frame 14 is provided with a 7-segment LED provided so as to be always visible, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the wait for the return standby time is waited Instead, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be turned off, and the shutter member 180 may be opened to perform display using a 7-segment LED provided on the game board 13 or the front frame 14 so as to be always visible. .

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is configured of three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c arranged in the vertical direction, but when the variable display of symbols is vertical scroll Alternatively, three seven-segment LEDs 181a to 181c may be arranged in the left-right direction. Further, nine seven-segment LEDs may be provided in three rows and three stages.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are respectively provided with the notches 180La and 180Ra. However, the notches such as the notches 180La and 180Ra are left and right shutters. It is sufficient if at least one of the members 180L and 180R is provided.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the notches 180La and 180Ra are provided at the end of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R in the closing movement direction, but the third symbol display device The position at which the notch is provided is not particularly limited as long as the screen 81 can be viewed. Further, the notch may be formed by notching the end portions of the shutter members 180L and 180R like the notch portions 180La and 180Ra, or may be notched as holes in the shutter members 180L and 180R. May be Further, the number of notches is not particularly limited, and, for example, four holes may be formed as notches in the vicinity of the four corners of the opening 86a.

  In the third, fourth and sixth embodiments, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) is executed every 20 ms in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117. As in the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), the process may be performed every 1 ms.

  In the third, fourth, and sixth embodiments, the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 are set to middle brightness and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are turned off in the power saving mode, but the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 and The luminance of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 may be smaller than that of the normal consumption mode, and the luminance of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 may be larger than the luminance of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310.

  In the fourth embodiment, the power saving symbol display device 181 starts to be used at the timing when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size, but the power saving symbol display device 181 is used The timing to start is not particularly limited as long as it is a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by the power saving button 23 being operated.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the area 81b outside the display area 81a is expanded as an area lit in a predetermined color. did. Instead of this, the third symbol display device 81 is not an LCD but an electroluminescent display (hereinafter referred to as "ELD"), and the display region 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced and a display region The area 81b outside the area 81a may be enlarged as the extinguished area. The ELD may be an organic ELD or an inorganic ELD. Since the area 81 b is an extinguished area, power consumption can be further suppressed.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power, while the image controller (VDP) is used. By configuring so that the power supply to 274 is not cut off, when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode thereafter, it is possible to return to the display state in the third symbol display device 81 early. did. Instead, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power supply to the image controller (VDP) 274 is also cut off (turned off). ) To further save power. In this case, it is preferable to switch from the symbol display device for power saving 181 to the third symbol display device 81 after waiting for the display state of the third symbol display device 81 to be normally operated. .

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device for power saving 181, but it is transparent when not emitting light. A light guide plate display device on top of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that information such as "during power saving" is fixedly displayed on the light guide plate display device during customer waiting effects It may be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a lateral direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the main control unit 110 is configured to output a firing command indicating that a ball is to be fired (a firing instruction for the ball has been issued) from the main control unit 110 to the effect control unit 117. When the operation handle 51 is operated for emission, a signal is output from the operation handle 51 to the effect control device 117, and the effect control device 117 recognizes that the ball is emitted by this signal. It is good also as composition. Alternatively, the emission control device 112 outputs to the effect control device 117 a signal or command indicating that the control for emitting the ball has been performed, and the effect control device 117 causes the ball to be emitted by this signal or command. It may be configured to be recognized.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the power saving mode in the game can be set by the power saving button 23 which can be operated by the player, and the customer waiting effect is produced by the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to switch the specification of power saving (presence or absence of power saving) in the middle. Instead of this, the volume adjustment switch 227 may be configured to be able to set not only the specification of power saving during the customer waiting effect but also the power consumption mode during the game. That is, the power consumption mode may be set by the volume adjustment switch 227, and the specification of power saving during the waiting for customer effect may be determined according to the set power consumption mode. For example, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) is divided into three, and each is assigned to the normal consumption mode, the small power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, and included in the normal consumption mode by the volume adjustment switch 227 When an output value to be set is set, power saving is not performed during the customer waiting effect, while when an output value included in the small power saving mode or the large power saving mode is set, Configure to save power. As described above, in the case where the power consumption mode in the game can be set by both the power saving button 23 and the volume adjustment switch 227, the setting by the power saving button 23 or the volume adjustment switch 227 may be prioritized. .

  Alternatively, the player can omit the power saving button 23 which can be operated, and the power adjustment mode during the game is provided by the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and operated by an employee of the hall instead of the player. Alternatively, it may be configured to set both the specification of power saving during the customer waiting effect.

  In the fifth embodiment, switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification is performed using the volume adjustment switch 227 which is an operation element for adjusting the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226. However, switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification is performed using a switch for adjusting the luminance of various light emitting means such as an LED or a switch for adjusting the operation amount of a movable body for presentation (for example, the movable body for presentation 361). It may be a configuration to be performed. Also in this case, only by operating 1 switch (a switch for adjusting the luminance of the light emitting means, a switch for adjusting the operation amount of the movable body for effect, etc.), the luminance of the light emitting means and the operation of the movable body for effect Both the adjustment of the amount and the like and the switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be performed, and the player can play a suitable game with a volume suitable for the situation while performing the power saving as in the fifth embodiment. Can be provided.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, when it switches to the power-saving specification, the structure which light-extinguishes the light emission means (LED301-310, 321-323, 341-346) for presentation with the start of customer waiting production. However, it may be configured to wait for the light emitting means for effecting to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, until one demonstration display in the customer waiting effect ends) after the customer waiting effect is started. When the light emitting means is turned off with the start of the customer waiting effect, there is a possibility that the dark atmosphere is rapidly given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a sudden dark atmosphere.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitting unit (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) for effect is turned off during the customer waiting effect when the power saving specification is switched to the power saving specification. In addition to this, the luminance of the third symbol display device 81 may be reduced to a value of zero or more during the customer waiting effect.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the output value from the volume control switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) to be rotationally operated is divided into two, and each is allocated to the normal specification and the power saving specification. Instead of the switch 227 (rotary switch 227 b), a slider type switch capable of outputting a plurality of output values may be used. Alternatively, using a push-on type rotary encoder provided with a push button in the operation knob portion, assuming that the output value when operated without pressing the push button is the output value of the normal specification and operated while pressing the push button The output value of may be set as the output value of the power saving specification.

  In the sixth embodiment, the display control device 114 turns on the power of the image controller 236, which is a VDP, when receiving the lighting restart command, and lights the backlight of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to perform both of That is, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the image controller 236 is turned on and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on by the command 1 (lighting restart command). Both are configured to be executed. Instead, the display control device 114 only turns on the power of the image controller 236, which is VDP, when the lighting resumption command is received, and the voice lamp control device 113 takes another command after the recovery waiting time has elapsed. The display control device 114 may be configured to turn on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 when the command is received. The lighting of the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 can be delayed, and power consumption can be reduced accordingly.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 in a closed state until return waiting time passes, but it changes to this or In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal. The fluctuation display data of fluctuation time (for example, fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more) in consideration of time required for (for example, 20 seconds) may be forcibly selected. By adopting this configuration, before the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, the variable display (and the effect included in the variable display) of the symbol is finished, and the player can display the symbol It is not possible to enjoy the variable display and presentation of the game, and it is possible to suppress lowering the interest of the game. The fluctuation display data of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) in consideration of the time required for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal may be stored in the character ROM 235 as dedicated data.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 in a closed state until return waiting time passes, but it changes to this or In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display should be performed at the timing when the fluctuation display is stopped. The stop symbol may be cut in and displayed. When the power is turned on again to the image controller 236, the timing at which the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal is not constant, so it is difficult to slow down the fluctuation speed of the symbol and stop it at an appropriate position. However, by adopting the above configuration, the symbol can be stopped at an appropriate position at an appropriate timing by easy control.

  In the sixth embodiment, although the third symbol display device 81 is an LCD, the third symbol display device 81 may be an ELD, and in such a case, not only the ELD is turned off, but also an image that is VDP. Further power saving may be achieved by turning off (off) the power supply to the controller 274 as well.

  Further, the configurations of the first to sixth embodiments and the respective modifications can be combined as appropriate. For example, in the above-described third and fourth embodiments, even in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a configuration in which the inner circumference LEDs 301 to 304 have middle brightness and the outer circumference LEDs 305 to 310 are extinguished in the power saving mode. Good.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as V zone. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an allearch or a ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area after the jackpot symbol is displayed. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of the gaming machine of the present invention and various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts A game machine A1 comprising: power saving means for reducing the power to be used for an electrical component other than a specific one of the plurality of electrical components at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the power saving unit reduces the power used for the electrical components excluding the specific electrical components at a predetermined timing, it is possible to suppress the power consumption (power saving). In addition, since certain electric parts are excluded from the target of power saving, it is possible to save the power by excluding electric parts that may cause an inappropriate situation due to the power saving, thereby making it possible for the player to play a suitable game. Can be provided.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the gaming machine A1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117, the movable object control process for effect ((1) S1107) is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine A1, S1257 and S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment and the starting aperture LED lighting control of the first embodiment S1345 and S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 30) are illustrated.

  The gaming machine A1 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means reduces the power used for the electric parts other than the specific electric parts at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine A2 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine A2.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the power saving unit is configured to reduce the luminance of at least a part of the electrical components other than the specific electrical component to reduce the electrical components other than the specific electrical component. A game machine A3 characterized by reducing power consumption.

  According to the gaming machine A3, since the power is reduced (i.e., power saving is intended) due to the decrease in the brightness of the electric parts, the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by lowering the luminance of the electric component, the player can realize that power is saved even by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the power saving means removes the specific electrical component by thinning out and emitting light of at least a part of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A4 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the power saving is achieved by thinning out the electric parts to emit light, so that the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by thinning out the electric parts and emitting light, the player can realize that power is saved even by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the power saving means excludes the specific electrical component by reducing the number of light emissions of at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A5 characterized by reducing power used for electrical components.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electric component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A5, the power saving means removes the specific electrical component by reducing the operation amount of at least a part of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A game machine A6 characterized by reducing the power used for the electric parts.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the operation amount of the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the operation amount of the electrical component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the power saving means removes the specific electric component by operating at least a part of the electric components except the specific electric component. A game machine A7 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A7, power saving is achieved by thinning and operating the electric components. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by thinning and operating the electric parts, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the electricity saving means excludes the specific electric component by not operating the electric component operated by electric power among the electric components excluding the specific electric component. A game machine A8 characterized by reducing power used for parts.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the power saving is achieved by not operating the electric parts operated by the power, so that the player can realize that the power saving is realized by the change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by not operating the electric component operated by the power, the player can also realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the power saving unit reduces the volume of the sound emitted from at least a part of the electric components excluding the specific electric component, thereby reducing the specific power. A game machine A9 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical components excluding the electrical components.

  According to the gaming machine A9, power saving is achieved by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electric component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electrical component, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A9, the power saving means removes the specific electric component by thinning out the electric component that emits a sound by electric power among the electric components excluding the specific electric component. A game machine A10 characterized by reducing the power used for the electrical component.

  According to the gaming machine A10, power saving is achieved by thinning out electric components that emit sound by power. Since the sound emitted is reduced by thinning out the electric parts emitting the sound by the power, and the sound image localization changes and the atmosphere of the effect is switched, the player saves power by the switching. You can feel the

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a rendering mode setting unit configured to set one rendering mode out of a plurality of rendering modes, the rendering execution unit including the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting unit The effect corresponding to the gaming state is executed, and the power saving means includes mode setting control means for preventing the predetermined effect mode from being set by the effect mode setting means among the plurality of effect modes. The power saving unit is configured to cause the mode setting control unit not to set a predetermined effect mode by the effect mode setting unit, thereby reducing the power used for the electric component other than the specific electric component. A game machine A11 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A11, power saving is achieved by not setting a predetermined rendering mode, so that power saving is effectively achieved by not setting a rendering mode that uses a large amount of power (that is, a large amount of power consumption). be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the effect mode setting process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 22) is exemplified as the effect mode setting device of the game machine A11, and the first embodiment is the mode setting control device of the game machine A11. Steps S1232 and S1233 executed in the effect mode counter updating process (see FIG. 23) of the embodiment are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, it is possible to pass the game medium to the predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means for performing the lottery when the starting condition is satisfied and the lottery means By setting the special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state, and the specific electric component is provided at a position where the predetermined part can be suggested A game machine A12 which is a component and is an electric component which emits light or is operated in a predetermined pattern when a special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the specific electric component excluded from the power saving target is an electric component capable of suggesting a part that provides the player with an advantageous state in the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is generated. In this case, it is an electrical component that emits or operates in a predetermined pattern. By making such electric parts out of the target of power saving, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the special gaming state is in progress, and the player feels pleasure or enjoyment that the special gaming state is in progress. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine A12, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine A12, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, it is possible to pass the game medium to the predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means for performing the lottery when the starting condition is satisfied and the lottery means By setting a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state, and the specific electric component reports the result selected by the lottery means to the player A game machine A13 characterized by being an electric component for causing

  According to the gaming machine A13, the specific electric component which is not the target of the power saving is the electric component for notifying the player of the result selected by the lottery means. By excluding such electric parts from power saving targets, the player can surely see the result related to his own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery. .

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine A13, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine A13, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  A game machine A14 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A13, wherein the specific electric part is an electric part for reporting an error that has occurred in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A14, a specific electrical component that is not targeted for power saving is regarded as an electrical component for reporting an error. By excluding such electric parts from power saving targets, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the employee of the hall of various errors that occur in the gaming machine. Can quickly return to the game.

  The game machine A15 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A14, wherein the specific electric component is an electric component for displaying a moving image constituting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine A15, the specific electric component which is not the target of the power saving is the electric component for displaying the moving image which constitutes the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. The moving image constituting the effect to be executed by the effect executing means can cause the player to most effectively recognize the effect. Therefore, by excluding the electric parts for displaying the moving image from the power saving target, Even if the power used for some of the electrical components is reduced, the fun of the effect can be maintained.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the power saving unit is provided with a notification unit for notifying that effect when the electric power used for the electric components excluding the specific electric component is reduced by the power saving unit. A game machine A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, when the power saving unit reduces the power used for the electric component excluding the specific electric component, the notification unit notifies that effect, so that the player is saving power. Can make you realize.

  A gaming machine A17 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine A18 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine A19 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A16, characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts Power saving means for reducing the power used for a predetermined one of the plurality of electric components at a predetermined timing, and the plurality of electric components are used for effect performed by the effect executing means A first electric component having a display screen capable of displaying a moving image or a still image, and a second electric component which is an electric component different from the first electric component and which is the predetermined electric component The power saving means includes a power reduction means for reducing the power used for the second electrical component, and the second electrical component for which the power used is reduced by the power reduction means. And an alternative image display means for displaying an alternative image as a substitute for the game member on the display screen of the first electric component together with a moving image or a still image for effect in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the game member A game machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the substitute image to be substituted for the gaming member having the second electric component in which the power used is reduced by the power reduction means is displayed by the alternative image display means according to the effect by the effect execution means The information is displayed on the first electric component together with the moving image or the still image for effect in an aspect, so that information (regarding information concerning expectation and changes in the gaming state) that the player can enjoy along with the reduction of the power used It is possible to suppress the reduction of information) and the reduction of visual effects (for example, the reduction of rendering effects). At this time, since the first electrical component for displaying a moving image or a still image for effect is used as an electrical component for displaying a substitute image, the power reduction means for the power used for the second electrical component is used. As a result, power consumption can be reduced (power saving) by the amount of reduction. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  Note that "the operation of the second electric component" in the gaming machine B1 is intended to include various operations such as light emission, movement or rotation in a predetermined direction, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the game machine B1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the effect control device 117, and the movable object control process for effect (S1107) Is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first electric component of the game machine B1, and the LEDs 341 to 348 and the movable body for effect are exemplified as the second electric component of the game machine B1. 361 is illustrated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the game machine B1, S2253, S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 38) of the second embodiment and the starting aperture LED lighting control of the second embodiment. S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 40) and the pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39) are exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, S2253 and S1258 executed in the lamp output processing (see FIG. 38) of the second embodiment and the starting aperture LED of the second embodiment are used as means for reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine B1. S1346 executed in the lighting control process (see FIG. 40) is exemplified, and a pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39) is exemplified as the substitute image display means of the gaming machine B1.

  In the gaming machine B1, the alternative image display means operates the alternative image as a substitute image for replacing the gaming member having the second electric component whose power consumption is reduced by the power consumption reduction means as the alternative image. It is displayed on the said display screen in the display mode which imitated, The game machine B2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the substitute image for replacing the gaming member having the second electric component driven and operated by the electric power is displayed on the display screen in a display mode imitating the operation by the substitute image display means (first Is displayed on the display screen of the electric component), it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction of visual effects such as the rendering effect accompanying the reduction of the power used for the second electric component.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, the substitute image display means displays the substitute image on an outer peripheral side of a visual recognition area visible to a player on a display screen of the first electric component. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, since the substitute image is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area visible to the player on the display screen of the first electric component, the effect displayed on the display screen of the first electric component It is possible to prevent the visibility of a moving image or a still image from being degraded by the display of a substitute image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of various inconveniences such as a decrease in visual effect (for example, a decrease in the effect of rendering) due to a decrease in the visibility of the moving image or the still image for effect.

  In the gaming machine B3, the substitute image display means is the second electric component whose power consumption is reduced by the use power reduction means, and is disposed around the display screen of the first electric component. Displaying a substitute image as a substitute for the game member having the second electric component driven by the electric power and emitting light as the substitute image at a position according to the arrangement of the game components to be the target of the substitute image A game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in the alternative image displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen (the display screen of the first electric component) by the alternative image display means, the power used is reduced by the power consumption reduction means A second electric component, an alternative image as a substitute for a game member having a second electric component disposed around the display screen and illuminated by electric power, the game serving as a target of the substitute image It is displayed at the position according to the arrangement of the members. Therefore, since the visual effect (for example, the rendering effect) by the light emission of the second electric component included in the game member targeted for the alternative image can be effectively simulated by the alternative image, the power used for the second electric component Can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second electric component disposed around the display screen of the first electric component emits light in a light emission mode according to the effect to be executed by the effect executing means. Feature game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the second electric component emits light in the light emission mode according to the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the second electric component arranged around the display screen of the first electric component An alternative image as a substitute for a game member having an electrical component is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen by the alternative image display means in an arrangement according to the arrangement of the game members targeted for the alternative image. Therefore, it is possible to effectively simulate the effect by the light emission of the second electric component included in the game member as the target of the alternative image by the alternative image, and it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a special result that is more advantageous for the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means. A special game state generation means for generating a game state, and the second electric component emits light during a special game state period generated by the special game state generation means Machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the substitute image for the gaming member having the second electric component emitting light during the special gaming state period generated by the special gaming state generation means is the display screen of the first electric component Displayed to the player, even if the power used for the second electric component is reduced by the power reduction means, it is ensured to the player that the player is in the special gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state. Can be transmitted to Therefore, since the player can enjoy the pleasure and enjoyment of being in the special gaming state without changing before and after the power saving by the power saving means, it is possible to prevent lowering the interest of the game by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine B6, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. In the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B6, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a special result that is more advantageous for the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means. A game machine B7, comprising: special game state generation means for generating a game state, wherein the second electric component emits light when the start condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B7, since the substitute image to be used as a substitute for the gaming member having the second electric component that emits light when the start condition is satisfied is displayed on the display screen of the first electric component, the second image Even if the power used for the electric component of the above is reduced by the power reduction means, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player enjoys the expectation that the predetermined result (the special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means) may be selected by the lottery by the lottery means before and after the power saving by the power saving means. Since it is possible to save the interest of the game by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, as the lottery means of the gaming machine B7, the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified. In the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B7, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. .

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B7, the alternative image display means is the second electric component included in the game member corresponding to the alternative image, the alternative image being driven by electric power in a predetermined direction A game machine B8 characterized by displaying on the display screen as a moving image of movement according to movement of a moving or rotating game member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the moving image of the movement according to the movement of the gaming member driven by the power and moving or rotating in the predetermined direction is displayed as the substitute image by the substitute image display means. Therefore, since the feature of the operation of the game member can be suitably represented by the substitute image, it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction of the visual effect (for example, the rendering effect) accompanying the reduction of the power used for the second electric component. it can.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the alternative image display means is formed as an image layer different from an image layer including the alternative image, and an image layer including the moving image or still image for effect. And display control means for displaying an image layer including the alternative image formed by the alternative image layer forming means on an image layer including the moving image or still image for presentation. A game machine B9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the alternative image is displayed by superimposing the image layer including the alternative image formed by the alternative image layer forming means and the image layer including the moving image or the still image for presentation by the display control means By doing this, it is displayed on the display screen of the first electric component. Therefore, for example, in order to display the substitute image on the outer peripheral side of the display screen of the first electric component, there is no need to reduce the moving image or the still image for presentation, and the control load increases with the increase of the substitute image. It can be suitably suppressed. In addition, it is not necessary to separately prepare an image for presentation (moving image, still image) including a substitute image from an image for presentation used when power saving is not performed by the power saving means, and the consumption of storage capacity is suppressed. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the display device has notification image display means for displaying a notification image for notifying predetermined information at a position not overlapping the substitute image on the display screen of the first electric component. Game machine B10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B10, the substitute image is displayed by the substitute image display means at a position where the notification image for notifying the predetermined information does not overlap with the substitute image on the display screen of the first electric component. Therefore, control of the notification image can be diverted regardless of whether or not power saving is performed, visibility of necessary information (predetermined information) can be secured, and predetermined information indicated by the notification image can be used. It can be reliably transmitted to the player.

  The "predetermined information" in the gaming machine B10 is intended to include, for example, the value of the special figure holding ball number N, the stop symbol, and the notice character display.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B10, an operation means operable by the player is provided, and the power saving means reduces the power used for the predetermined electric component at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine B11 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B11, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine B11.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B11, the alternative image display means displays the alternative image on the display screen in correspondence with the arrangement position of the game member based on the first electric component. A game machine B12 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B12, the substitute image is displayed on the display screen in correspondence with the arrangement position of the gaming member based on the first electric component, so that the correspondence relationship between the gaming member and the substitute image is a player However, the player can surely obtain the information given from the second electrical component from the substitute image.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the gaming member moves so as to overlap the display screen of the first electric component, and the substitute image display means sets the substitute image on the display screen. A game machine B13 displaying on the display screen as a moving image representing the game members moving so as to overlap.

  According to the gaming machine B13, the power saving effect can be enhanced by not operating the gaming member, and the amount of information regarding the feeling of expectation given by the operation of the gaming member is not reduced, and the visual effect as a presentation is not reduced. .

  In any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, a gaming machine B14 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, a gaming machine B15 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine B16 according to any one of gaming machines B1 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  Lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, In the gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol suggesting a result selected by the lottery means, the display means has a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. And 2 display means, and the game machine uses the display means to display the stop symbol at a predetermined timing from the first display means to the second display means. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising power saving means for switching.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is a power saving means, at a predetermined timing, from the first display means to the second display means consuming less power than the first display means. It is switched to the display means. Therefore, suppression (power saving) of power consumption can be aimed at by using a 2nd display means in order to display a stop symbol.

  Further, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol which the player particularly pays attention to. Therefore, when such a stop symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and it is felt that the tempo of the game is thereby deteriorated, or the lottery by the lottery means is really lost. There may be inconveniences such as doubting whether it has been done or not. However, according to the gaming machine C1, the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game in which the problems exemplified above are suitably prevented while performing power saving.

  In the above embodiment, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified as the lottery means of the gaming machine C1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine C1, the generation of the jackpot by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. . Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first display means of the gaming machine C1, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is exemplified as the second display means of the gaming machine C1. Ru. In the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine C1, the power saving symbol display control process of the third and fourth embodiments (refer to FIG. 48 and FIG. 42) and the power saving mode transition process of the third and fourth embodiments The process of S3432 executed in FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first display means has a display screen for displaying the stop symbol as an image, and the display means is the first display means used to display the stop symbol. When the display means is stored, the display screen is stored so as to be visible, and when the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched by the power saving means, the front side of the display screen In a state in which the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and the front side member is disposed on the front side of the display screen. A game machine C2 characterized by being exposed so as to be visible.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and is exposed so as to be visible in a state in which the front side member is overlapped on the front side of the display screen. On the other hand, when the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by the power saving means, the stored front side member is on the front side of the display screen. Because the display screen of the first display means is hidden by the front side member, the stop symbol can be displayed on the second display means because the display screen of the first display means is hidden. Therefore, power consumption is smaller while suppressing deterioration of the impression (for example, deterioration of the impression due to the display screen becoming dark) due to the stop symbol being not displayed on the display screen of the first display means. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on the second display means, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game while performing the power saving.

  In the embodiment, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is exemplified as the front side member of the gaming machine C2.

  In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the front side member has a cutout portion or a hole portion in which the display screen can be viewed when the display side is overlapped with the front side of the display screen. C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the front side member is disposed on the front side of the display screen (the display screen of the first display means), the front side member has a cutout portion or a hole portion that allows the display screen to be viewed As a result, the player can confirm that the stop symbol is not displayed on the display screen (for example, that the display screen is dark) through the cutout portion or the hole portion. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that power saving is being performed from the state of the display screen confirmed through the cutout portion or the hole portion.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the power saving means is displayed on the first display means when the first display means is used as a display means for displaying the stop symbol. After the first means for displaying the display corresponding to the display content on the second display means and the display by the first means, the stop symbol is displayed on the first display means And a second means for erasing the display content displayed on the first display means in an impossible state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, after the display corresponding to the display content displayed on the first display means is also displayed on the second display means by the first means, the second means The display content displayed on the first display means is erased. That is, after displaying the same content on both the first display means and the second display means, the display means used to display the stop symbol is the first display means to the second display means. Switch to means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display contents such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means are justified without doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving symbol display control process (see FIGS. 48 and 52) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the first means of the gaming machine C1, and the second means of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified. As means, the process of S3432 executed in the power saving mode transition process (refer to FIG. 49, FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C4, a display area reducing means for gradually reducing the display area in the first display means, and an area other than the display area on the display screen in accordance with the reduction of the display area by the display area reducing means. And front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side side member so as to increase the overlap with the front side side member, and the display means is provided with the predetermined display area by the display area reduction means. Or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member reaches a predetermined size by the front side member control means. A game machine C5 characterized in that a display corresponding to the display content displayed on the display means is also displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and according to the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Since the overlap of the front side member control means is increased by the front side member control means, it is possible to impress the player on the switching of the display means by the power saving means, and it is possible to make the player realize that the power saving is being performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition processing (refer to FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the display area reducing means of the gaming machine C5. As the front side member control means of the gaming machine C5, the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, according to the display area reduction means for gradually reducing the display area in the first display means and the reduction of the display area by the display area reduction means, other than the display area in the display screen The front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side member so as to increase the overlap between the front side member and the region of the front side member, and the variable display of the symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. And / or symbol display control means for causing the display means to display a stop symbol suggesting the result selected by the lottery means after having been displayed on the second display means, and the second means The display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member is the front surface. When the symbol display control means displays the variable display of the symbol on the first display means and / or the second display means when the member control means reaches a predetermined size, After the stop symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means by the symbol display control means after the variable display of the symbols, the stop symbol displayed on the first display means is erased. A game machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and according to the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Since the overlap of the front side member control means is increased by the front side member control means, it is possible to impress the player on the switching of the display means by the power saving means, and it is possible to make the player realize that he is cooperating in the power saving.

  In addition, the display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member reaches a predetermined size by the front side member control means. In the case where the variable display of the symbol is displayed on the first display means and / or the second display unit by the symbol display control means, the stop symbol is displayed by the symbol display control means after the variable display of the symbol. After being displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the stop symbol displayed on the first display means is erased by the second means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display contents such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means are justified without doubt. It is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition processing (refer to FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the display area reduction means of the gaming machine C6. As the front side member control means of the game machine C6, the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a first electric component provided around the gaming area where the first display means is disposed, and driven by electric power to emit light, and the first electric component And a second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side and driven by electric power to emit light, and the power saving means reduces the electric power used for the first electric component by a predetermined level at the predetermined timing. At the same time, the electric power used for the second electric component is lowered by a level larger than the predetermined level.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the first electric component provided around the game area in which the first display means is provided, and the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component Since the power to be used is reduced by the power saving means, it is possible to suppress power consumption (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level larger than the predetermined level, so the first display means is provided. The brightness and operation amount of the first electric component provided around the game area can be made larger than the brightness and operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Since the first display means on which the stop symbol is displayed is the area to which the player pays attention, the brightness and the operation amount of the first electric component arranged at a position closer to the game area are the second electric component By making the power consumption smaller (power saving) (eg, switching from the first display means to the second display means with lower power consumption). Can be suppressed, and thereby, the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are illustrated as a first electric component of the gaming machine C7, and outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are illustrated as a second electric component of the gaming machine C7. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3252 and S3253 executed in the lamp output processing (see FIG. 47) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the power saving means of the gaming machine C7.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means is a display means used to display the stop symbol at the timing when the operation means is operated, A game machine C8 characterized by switching from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C8.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C9 characterized in that the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state of being arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the first display means. .

  According to the gaming machine C9, since the position where the stop symbol is displayed does not change, the player can easily shift the viewing position even if the display means is switched by the power saving means.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a front side member operable to switch between a state of overlapping with the first display means and a state of exposing the first display means, the second display means being the front side The second display means is accommodated in a state where the display means provided on the side member and displaying the stop symbol is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the second display means in the unused state is stored and hidden. People are not concerned about unnecessary things.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the first display unit includes an image forming light emitting unit for forming an image on a screen, and the power saving unit turns off the image forming light emitting unit, A game machine characterized by switching display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means by executing display by the second display means. C11.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the power saving means turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means, and executes the display by the second display means to display the stop symbol. Is switched from the first display means to the second display means. Therefore, the first display means can be returned by turning on the light emitting means for image formation again, so that the display means used to display the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means If it switches back to, it can be completed early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inability to display the effect portion that gives interest to the game at the timing of switching, so it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest of the game without being able to see such a effect portion.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine further comprises display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means, the first display means forming an image for forming an image on a screen A light emitting means, the power saving means interrupting the power to the display control means, turning off the image forming light emitting means, and executing the display by the second display means A game machine C12 characterized by switching display means used to display a symbol from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C12, the power saving means not only turns off the light emitting means for image formation of the first display means, but also power to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means. As a result, power can be saved even more as the power to the display control means is shut off.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, a gaming machine C13 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine C14. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine C15 characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electric parts provided at a position where a player can visually recognize and driven by electric power, and effect execution means for executing an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electric parts In the game machine, the plurality of electric components include a first electric component provided around the game area and a second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component, and the game machine Among the plurality of electrical components, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level at a predetermined timing, and the power used for the second electrical component is higher than the predetermined level A game machine D1 characterized in that it comprises power saving means for reducing the power consumption.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the power saving means reduces the power used for the first electric component provided around the game area and the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Therefore, it is possible to suppress power consumption (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level greater than the predetermined level. The brightness and operation amount of the electric component can be made larger than the brightness and operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Since the game area is an area for the player to pay attention to, the power saving and the operation amount of the first electric component arranged at a position closer to the game area can be saved by making it larger than that of the second electric component. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression (for example, the absence of a bright impression in the game area) accompanying the suppression (power saving) of the power consumption by the means, thereby suppressing the decrease in the amusement of the game. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the game machine D1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117, the movable object control process for effect ((1) S1107) is illustrated. Further, in the above embodiment, inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are illustrated as a first electric component of the gaming machine D1, and outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are illustrated as a second electric component of the gaming machine D1. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S3252 and S3253 executed in the lamp output processing (refer to FIG. 47) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified as the power saving means of the gaming machine D1.

  In the game machine D1, the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components driven by electric power to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the power saving unit reduces the power used for the first electrical component by a predetermined level and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level higher than the predetermined level. The luminance of the first electrical component provided around the region is higher than the luminance of the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electrical component. Therefore, it is possible to relatively brighten the periphery of the game area to be watched by the player, and it is possible to suppress that the game area loses a bright impression due to the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the game machine D2, the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components that emit light in a light emission mode according to the effect executed by the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, since the first electric component and the second electric component are electric components that emit light in the light emission mode according to the effect performed by the effect execution means, they are provided around the game area Since the luminance of the first electrical component to which the player's awareness tends to be high is higher than the luminance of the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side than the first electrical component, the rendering effect associated with the power saving by the power saving means Can be effectively suppressed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes operation means operable by the player, and the power saving means is the first electric component of the plurality of electric components at the timing when the operation means is operated. A game machine D4, characterized in that the electric power used for the second electric component is reduced by a level higher than the predetermined level while the electric power used for the second electric component is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine D4, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power. Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine D4.

  A gaming machine D5 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A game machine D6 according to any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A game machine D7 according to any one of the game machines D1 to D4, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  In a gaming machine provided with electric components for presentation driven by electric power, the game machine is manually operated to be in a normal mode and a power saving mode in which power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode when a game is not executed by a player. The power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting the mode to any of the modes, the judgment means for judging whether or not the player is playing a game, and the game judgment means sets the power saving mode. Power saving means for reducing the power used for at least a part of the electric component for effect when it is determined that the mode setting means determines that the normal mode and the power saving mode are not performed. The game machine E1 is characterized in that the output amount of a predetermined one of the electric parts for effecting can be adjusted in a plurality of stages.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting either the normal mode or the power saving mode, and the judgment means judges that the game is not executed, the effect is produced. Since the power used for at least a part of the electric components for the purpose is reduced by the power saving means, it is possible to suppress the power consumption (power saving) when the game is not performed. Further, since the power saving by the power saving means is limited to the case where the power saving mode is set by the manually operated mode setting means, it is switched as necessary whether or not to save the power when the game is not executed. be able to.

  Furthermore, the mode setting means is configured to be able to adjust the output amount by a predetermined electrical component of the electrical components for presentation in a plurality of stages for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode. In addition, as an output amount by the electrical component for a predetermined | prescribed effect, the volume which is an output amount from the electrical component for presentation which can output a sound (for example, speaker apparatus), for example, the electrical component for a light emission possible effect The luminance is an output amount of (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED), and the operation amount is an output amount of an electrical part for presentation (for example, a movable body for presentation) which performs a predetermined operation. That is, the amount of output by the predetermined electric component can be adjusted to the amount suitable for the game by the mode setting means. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In addition, since the amount of power consumed by the electric component can be reduced when the output amount of the predetermined electric component is lowered, switching of whether or not to save power when the game is not executed, and the predetermined The adjustment of the power consumption of the electric parts for presentation can be realized by the mode setting unit 1. The setting operation can be facilitated and the operation load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is exemplified as the mode setting means of the gaming machine E1. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S314 executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13) is exemplified as the judging means of the gaming machine E1, and the power saving means of the gaming machine E1 is the fifth embodiment. The processes of S5252 and S5253 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 62) are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1, the mode setting unit is configured to be able to rotate, and a plurality of output values can be sequentially changed in accordance with the rotation operation, and the output value is rotated in a predetermined direction. Are sequentially increased, and the maximum value is reached, then the minimum value is reached, and if it is rotated in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially decreased, and the minimum value is reached, then the maximum value is shifted The normal mode is assigned to a plurality of continuous output values among the plurality of output values, and the power saving mode is assigned to the remaining plurality of output values. The gaming machine includes conversion means for converting an output value from the mode setting means into an output amount by the predetermined electric component, and the conversion means has a plurality of output values which can be output from the mode setting means. People The amount of output by the predetermined electrical component is configured to convert so as to increase after reaching the maximum value and to increase toward the maximum value after reaching the minimum value, A maximum value is assigned to at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. And a third output value different from the first output value, and a power saving mode adjacent to the third output value, wherein the minimum value of the output amount is an output value assigned to the normal mode. A game machine E2 assigned to at least one output value of the fourth output different from the second output value.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the output value from the mode setting unit is converted by the conversion unit into an output amount by a predetermined electric component. In the conversion by the conversion means, as the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means change in one direction, the amount of output by a given electrical component increases after reaching the maximum value and decreases to the minimum value Converted to increase towards the post maximum. At this time, at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value is the maximum value of the output amount. A third output value assigned to the value, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and being different from the first output value, and adjacent to the third output value The output value assigned to the power saving mode is assigned to at least one output value of a fourth output different from the second output value. Therefore, even when the mode setting means is operated to rotate, it is prevented that the amount of output (for example, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device) by a predetermined electrical component is rapidly increased or decreased. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the conversion means of the game machine E2 is executed in the volume setting value table (see FIG. 55 (b)) (not shown) stored in the ROM 272 and in the volume setting process (see FIG. 60). The processing of step S5204 is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A game machine E5 according to any one of the game machines E1 and E2, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  Lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, In the gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol suggesting a result selected by the lottery means, the display means has a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. The first display unit includes an image forming light emitting unit for forming an image on a screen, and the game machine is configured to display an image on the first display unit. Display control means for generating the image data of the image data, cutting off the power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, turning off the light emitting means for image formation, and executing the display by the second display means By Serial display means used to display the stop symbols, from said first display means, said game machine F1, characterized in that it comprises a power saving means for switching to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is a power saving means, at a predetermined timing, from the first display means to the second display means consuming less power than the first display means. It is switched to the display means. Therefore, suppression (power saving) of power consumption can be aimed at by using a 2nd display means in order to display a stop symbol. Further, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol which the player particularly pays attention to. Therefore, when such a stop symbol is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the lottery result, and it is felt that the tempo of the game is thereby deteriorated, or the lottery by the lottery means is really lost. There may be inconveniences such as doubting whether it has been done or not. However, according to the gaming machine F1, the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the light emitting means for image formation of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating the image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, power can be saved even more as the power to the display control means is cut off.

  In the above embodiment, the processing of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is exemplified as the lottery means of the gaming machine F1. Further, in the above embodiment, as the special game state generation means of the game machine F1, the generation of the big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main control device 110 is exemplified. . Further, in the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the first display means of the game machine F1, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is exemplified as the second display means of the game machine F1. Ru. Further, in the above embodiment, a backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as a light emitting means for image formation of the gaming machine F1, and an image controller 236 is exemplified as a display control means of the gaming machine F1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine F1, the processing of S6313 and the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) which are executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIG. 74) of the sixth embodiment. The processing of S6417 and S6418 executed in FIG.

  In the gaming machine F1, the electric power is supplied to the display control means at a predetermined timing, the light emitting means for image formation is turned on, and the display by the second display means is stopped by the stop. Display used to display the stop symbol by the power saving cancellation means that switches the display means used to display the symbol from the second display means to the first display means, and the power saving cancellation means And standby means for waiting for the display by the second display means to be not performed for a predetermined period when the means is switched from the second display means to the first display means. A game machine F2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F2, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving cancellation means In that case, for a predetermined period, the standby unit waits for the display by the second display unit not to be executed. Normally, it takes some time for the display control means to operate normally (return) after power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means. It is difficult to return early (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine F2, since the standby unit is configured to stand by for the non-execution of the display by the second display unit for a predetermined period, the player changes the symbol It is possible to prevent the display or the stop symbol from becoming invisible and to save power (that is, display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which interest is lost due to switching to the means). Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the power saving cancellation means of the gaming machine F2, the processing of S6211 and the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) executed in the power consumption mode setting process (see FIG. 70) of the sixth embodiment. The processes of S6419 and S6420 executed in the inside are exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, the processing of S6267 to S6269 and S6270 executed in the power saving symbol display control processing (see FIG. 73) of the sixth embodiment is exemplified as the standby means of the gaming machine F2.

  In the gaming machine F2, the power saving termination means supplies power to the display control means by the first power saving termination means for supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, and the first power saving termination means. And second power saving canceling means for lighting the image forming light emitting means, and the standby means supplies power to the display control means by the first power saving canceling means. A game machine F3 which waits for non-execution of display by the second display means for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F3, switching of the display means by the power saving canceling means is performed by supplying power to the display control means by the first power saving canceling means, and then the light emitting means for image formation is lit by the second power saving canceling means. Be done. Normally, it takes some time for the display control means to start up after the power is supplied to the display control means, but since it does not take time to light the image forming light emitting means, the image forming light emitting means By performing the lighting of the light source after the supply of the power to the display control means, the power consumption can be suppressed accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state where the second display means is arranged in a superimposed manner on the front side of the first display means. A gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, since the position where the stop symbol is displayed does not change, the player can easily shift the viewing position even if the display means is switched by the power saving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second display includes a front side member operable to switch between a state of overlapping the first display means and a state of exposing the first display means. The means is provided on the front side member, and the second display means is accommodated in a state where the display means for displaying the stop symbol is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A game machine F5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the second display means in the unused state is stored and hidden. People are not concerned about unnecessary things.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F5 includes an operating means operable by the player, and the predetermined timing is a timing when the operating means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operation means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the needs of the player, and the player is also saving power Can make you realize.

  In the above embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine F6.

  A gaming machine F7 according to any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174956). In a gaming machine provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, a symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display screen triggered by the establishment of a start condition (for example, winning of a ball to the start opening), and the fluctuation display is stopped. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of predetermined symbols, a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and a large amount of award balls can be paid out. In such gaming machines, various effects (for example, advance effects, reach effects, jackpot effects, etc.) are performed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In recent years, various effects have been performed by making full use of a large number of electrical components (for example, liquid crystal display screens, light emitters such as LEDs, movable bodies operated by motors or solenoids, speaker devices, etc.).
On the other hand, players are becoming more aware of power saving from the viewpoint of environmental protection. However, when power saving is achieved by simply reducing the number of electrical components, for example, there has been a problem that differentiation due to diversification of effects becomes difficult, and the fun of the game due to effects decreases.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a suitable game while saving power.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 is provided with electric components for presentation driven by electric power, and is manually operated to execute the game by the player in the normal mode. Mode setting means capable of setting the mode to any one of the power saving mode in which the power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode, and the judgment means for judging whether or not the player is playing a game. Power saving means for reducing the power used for at least a part of the electric component for effect when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means and the game is judged not to be executed by the judgment means; And the mode setting means sets, for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode, a plurality of output amounts by a predetermined one of the electric components for effect. Adjustable configured.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the mode setting means is configured to be capable of rotational operation, and can sequentially change a plurality of output values in accordance with the rotational operation, When rotating in a predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially increased, and after reaching the maximum value, it shifts to the minimum value, and when rotating in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially Among the plurality of output values, the normal mode is assigned to a part of the plurality of continuous output values, and the remaining plurality of outputs are configured to decrease and to reach the maximum value after reaching the minimum value. A power saving mode is assigned to the value, and the gaming machine includes conversion means for converting an output value from the mode setting means into an output amount by the predetermined electric component, and the conversion means is the mode. Setting means The amount of output by the predetermined electrical component increases to the maximum value and then decreases as the output values that can be output from the output change in one direction, and then increase toward the maximum value after reaching the minimum value And the first output value assigned to the normal mode, and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. A third output value assigned to at least one of the output values, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and different from the first output value; The output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the output value 3 is assigned to at least one of the fourth output different from the second output value.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting either the normal mode or the power saving mode, and the judging means judges that the game is not executed. The power saving means reduces the power used for at least a part of the electrical components for effect, so that it is possible to reduce the power consumption (power saving) when the game is not executed. . Further, since the power saving by the power saving means is limited to the case where the power saving mode is set by the manually operated mode setting means, it is switched as necessary whether or not to save the power when the game is not executed. It has the effect of being able to
Furthermore, the mode setting means is configured to be able to adjust the output amount by a predetermined electrical component of the electrical components for presentation in a plurality of stages for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode. In addition, as an output amount by the electrical component for a predetermined | prescribed effect, the volume which is an output amount from the electrical component for presentation which can output a sound (for example, speaker apparatus), for example The luminance is an output amount of (for example, a light emitting means such as an LED), and the operation amount is an output amount of an electrical part for presentation (for example, a movable body for presentation) which performs a predetermined operation. That is, the amount of output by the predetermined electric component can be adjusted to the amount suitable for the game by the mode setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.
In addition, since the amount of power consumed by the electric component can be reduced when the output amount of the predetermined electric component is lowered, switching of whether or not to save power when the game is not executed, and the predetermined The adjustment of the power consumption of the electric parts for presentation can be realized by the mode setting unit 1. The setting operation can be easily performed and the operation load can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. An output value from the mode setting means is converted by the conversion means into an output amount by a predetermined electric component. In the conversion by the conversion means, as the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means change in one direction, the amount of output by a given electrical component increases after reaching the maximum value and decreases to the minimum value Converted to increase towards the post maximum. At this time, at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value is the maximum value of the output amount. A third output value assigned to the value, the minimum value of the output quantities being an output value assigned to the normal mode and being different from the first output value, and adjacent to the third output value The output value assigned to the power saving mode is assigned to at least one output value of a fourth output different from the second output value. Therefore, even when the mode setting means is operated to rotate, it is prevented that the amount of output (for example, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device) by a predetermined electrical component is rapidly increased or decreased. It has the effect of being able to

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
8 1 3rd symbol display device (Electric device, first electric device)
1 10 Main controller 117 Effect controller
1 81 Symbol Display Device for Power Saving (Electric Device, Third Electric Device)
3 61 Moveable body for presentation (electrical device, second electrical device )

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with an electric component for presentation driven by power,
Mode setting means capable of setting the mode to one of a normal mode and a power saving mode in which power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode when the player does not play a game.
A determination unit that determines whether a game is being executed by a player;
Power saving means for reducing the power used for at least a part of the electric component for effect when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means and the game is judged not to be executed by the judgment means; Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the mode setting means is capable of adjusting an output amount by a predetermined electric component among electric components for effects in each of the normal mode and the power saving mode in a plurality of stages. The mode setting means is configured to be capable of rotational operation, and can sequentially change a plurality of output values in accordance with a rotational operation, and in the case of rotating in a predetermined direction, sequentially increase the output value; When the maximum value is reached and then shifted to the minimum value, and when it is rotated in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially decreased, and the minimum value is reached and then the maximum value is shifted. The normal mode is assigned to a part of the plurality of continuous output values among the plurality of output values, and the power saving mode is assigned to the remaining plurality of output values,
The game machine is
A conversion unit configured to convert an output value from the mode setting unit into an output amount by the predetermined electric component;
As the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting unit change in one direction, the conversion unit increases the output amount of the predetermined electric component to the maximum value and then decreases to reach the minimum value. The first output value assigned to the normal mode and the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value are configured to convert to increase toward the post-maximum value, and the maximum value of the output amount is set to the first output value assigned to the normal mode. The minimum value of the output amount allocated to at least one of the allocated second output values is the output value allocated to the normal mode, which is different from the first output value. At least one of a third output value and a fourth output that is allocated to the power saving mode adjacent to the third output value and is different from the second output value Assigned Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein.